Docstoc

2001 Mazda B-Series Owner's Manual

Document Sample
2001 Mazda B-Series Owner's Manual Powered By Docstoc
					Table of Contents
                    Your Vehicle at a Glance                                            1
                    Essential Safety Equipment                                          2
                    Knowing Your Mazda                                                  3
                    Protecting Your Mazda                                               4
                    Including Information on Trailer Towing (page 4-18)
                    Driving Your Mazda                                                  5
                    In Case of Emergency                                                6
                    Appearance Care                                                     7
                    Maintenance                                                         8
                    Customer Information                                                9
                    Including Information on How to Report Safety Defects (page 9-11)
                    Specifications                                                      10
                    Index                                                               11
                                                                        A Word to Mazda Owners

Thank you for choosing a Mazda.         An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows        We assure you that all of us at
We at Mazda provide and build           your vehicle best. So when mainte-      Mazda have an ongoing interest in
vehicles with complete customer         nance or service is necessary, that’s   your motoring pleasure and in your
satisfaction in mind.                   the place to go.                        full satisfaction with your Mazda
                                                                                product.
To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-   Our nationwide network of Mazda
free operation of your Mazda, read      professionals is dedicated to pro-       Mazda Motor Corporation
this manual carefully and follow its    viding you with the best possible
recommendations.                        service.                                            HIROSHIMA, JAPAN
A Word to Mazda Owners

 Important Notes About This Manual
 Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should you
 resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.
 Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may find some
 explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
 All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal
 at Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.


 Air Conditioning and the Environment
 Your Mazda’s genuine air conditioner is filled with R134a, a refrigerant that has been found not to damage the
 earth’s ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
                                                                    How to Use This Manual

We want to help you get the most                                         Index: A good place to start is the
driving pleasure from your vehicle.                                      Index, an alphabetical listing of all
Your owner’s manual, when read                                           information in your manual.
from cover to cover, can do that in
many ways.                                                               Sections: This manual has eleven
                                                                         sections. Sections 1 through 10
Illustrations complement the words                                       begin with a brief list of contents so
of the manual to best explain how to                                     you can usually tell at a glance if
enjoy your Mazda. By reading your                                        that section has the information you
manual, you can find out about the                                       want.
features, about important safety
information, and about driving under   The above symbol in this manual
various road conditions.               means “Do not let this happen”.
How to Use This Manual

You’ll find several WARNINGs,
                                               CAUTION                      NOTE
CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the
manual.                                                                     A NOTE provides information and
                                    A CAUTION indicates a situation
                                                                            sometimes suggests how to make
                                    in which injury or damage to your
                                                                            better use of your vehicle.
           WARNING                  vehicle, or both, could result if the
                                    caution is ignored.
 A WARNING indicates a situation
 in which serious injury or death
 could result if the warning is
 ignored.
                                                                         How to Use This Manual

Graphic symbols:
Some of the following symbols are used to identify controls and displays on your vehicle.




                        HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAM     HEADLIGHT LOW BEAM        PARKING LIGHTS    ILLUMINATION
        LIGHTS                                                                                CONTROL




                          HAZARD WARNING                                  TRUNK RELEASE
    TURN SIGNALS             FLASHER               HOOD RELEASE                                 FUEL




   ENGINE COOLANT                                BATTERY CHARGING           SEAT BELTS
    TEMPERATURE               ENGINE OIL              SYSTEM                                BRAKE SYSTEM
How to Use This Manual




 VENTILATION FAN   AIR RECIRCULATION    FRESH AIR          VENT          VENT-FLOOR




                                                       REAR WINDOW        WINDSHIELD
     FLOOR         FLOOR DEFROSTING    DEFROSTING       DEFROSTING      WIPER & WASHER




    LIGHTER                                            MALFUNCTION
                         HORN          WASHER FLUID   INDICATOR LIGHT
    Your Vehicle at a Glance
1   Your Mazda is a complex vehicle, but the design throughout considers your safety and comfort
    paramount. This requires many controls, locks, graphic symbols, mechanisms, and amenities that need
    to be understood for proper operation.
    Section 1 illustrates this information to familiarize you with what needs to be known to help make
    your motoring safer and easier, and lots more fun.




                                                                         Interior Overview         1-2
                                                                       Dashboard Overview          1-3
                                                                                     Doors         1-4
                                                                        Rear Compartment           1-5
                                                                                Cargo Area         1-6

                                                                                                          1-1
Your Vehicle at a Glance

Interior Overview




*Some models.

1-2
                     Your Vehicle at a Glance

Dashboard Overview




                                  *Some models.

                                          1-3
Your Vehicle at a Glance

Doors




*Some models.

1-4
                   Your Vehicle at a Glance

Rear Compartment




                                *Some models.

                                        1-5
Your Vehicle at a Glance

Cargo Area




*Some models.

1-6
    Essential Safety Equipment
2   Personal safety and comfort are what make driving your Mazda a pleasurable experience. Section 2
    describes essential information for optimal safe driving including seats, seat belt systems, and the
    supplemental restraint system.




                                                                                Front Seats       2- 2
                                                                                Rear Seats        2- 4
                                                                          Seat Belt System        2- 5
                                                                           Child Restraint        2-21
                                                     Supplemental Air Bag Restraint System        2-29

                                                                                                           2-1
Essential Safety Equipment

Front Seats
                                                           WARNING
                                               Driver’s Seat Adjustment:
                                               Adjusting the driver’s seat while the
                                               vehicle is moving could cause the
                                               driver to lose control of the vehicle.
                                               Adjust this seat only when the vehi-
                                               cle is stopped.



J Seat Adjustment                                          WARNING                      J Seat Recline*
To move a front seat forward or back-
                                               Luggage Behind Seatback:                 To change the seatback angle, lean for-
ward, lift the handle up and slide the seat.
                                                                                        ward slightly and raise the seat recline
Release the handle to latch the seat in its    Luggage or other cargo should not
                                                                                        lever. Then, lean back to the position you
new position.                                  be piled higher than the seatbacks.
                                                                                        want and release the lever.
Make sure the seat locks securely in           This will help keep items from being
place.                                         thrown about and injuring people
*Some models.
                                               in a collision or sudden stop.


2-2
                                                                                             Essential Safety Equipment


Make sure the lever returns to its original
position.                                                 WARNING                                  WARNING
Lifting this lever (when a seat is unoccu-    Reclining:                                Upright Seatbacks:
pied) allows the seatback to fold forward     Sitting in a reclined position in a       Rear seat passengers should not
for access to the rear seat.                  moving vehicle can be dangerous           lean on the front seatback while the
                                              because you don’t get the full pro-       vehicle is in motion. A seatback
                                              tection from seat belts. In a collision   which is folded forward even a
                                              or sudden stop, you can slide under       small degree may not lock properly
                                              the lap belt and suffer serious inter-    in the event of a sudden stop or
                                              nal injuries. For maximum protec-         collision. Do not allow packages or
                                              tion, sit well back and upright.          other objects to interfere with the
                                                                                        normal positions of the seatback
                                                                                        or the seat recline lever. This may
                                                                                        prevent the seatback from locking
                                                                                        in the event of a sudden stop or
                                                                                        collision and could cause personal
                                                                                        injury.




                                                                                                                         2-3
Essential Safety Equipment

                                                                                   Rear Seats
J Lumbar Support Adjustment*
Turn the lumbar support control knob
                                                      WARNING
counterclockwise to increase firmness.    Seatback Lock:
Turn the lumbar support control knob      If the driver’s seatback is unlocked
clockwise to increase softness.           while the vehicle is moving, it could
                                          cause the driver to lose control. To
The control knob is located on the out-   prevent this, and to prevent injury to
board side of the driver’s seat.          a passenger, unlock a seatback only
                                          when the vehicle is stopped.


                                                                                   J Jump Seats*
                                                                                   2-Door Cab Plus
                                                                                   To open, pull inboard and down on the
                                                                                   seat handle.
                                                                                   To stow the seat, pull seat bottom back to
                                                                                   the fully upright position.
*Some models.

2-4
                                                                                           Essential Safety Equipment

                                                                                    Seat Belt System
                                                                                    Seat belts help decrease the possibility or
                                                       WARNING                      severity of injury during accidents and
                                                                                    sudden stops. Mazda recommends that
                                            Installing a Child Seat in the          the driver and passengers wear seat belts
                                            Jump Seat:                              at all times.
                                            Do not install a child seat in a cen-
                                            ter facing jump seat. They are not      J Energy Management Feature
                                            intended for this purpose.              This vehicle has a seat belt system with
                                                                                    an energy management feature at the
                                                                                    front outboard seating positions to help
                                                                                    further reduce the risk of injury in the
4-Door Cab Plus                                                                     event of a head-on collision.

To open, pull seat assembly down, then                                              This seat belt system has a retractor
raise seatback.                                                                     assembly that is designed to pay out
                                                                                    webbing in a controlled manner. This
To stow the seat, fold seat back down and                                           feature is designed to help reduce the
raise seat assembly to the fully upright                                            belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
position.



                                                                                                                         2-5
Essential Safety Equipment



                                                                                    J Emergency Locking Mode
 NOTE                                                   WARNING                     The emergency locking mode is the
 After any vehicle collision, the seat                                              normal retractor mode, allowing free
                                             Belt and retractor assembly must
 belt system at all outboard seating                                                shoulder belt length adjustment to your
                                             be replaced if the seat belt system
 positions (except driver, which has                                                movements and locking in response to
                                             “automatic locking retractor” fea-
 no “automatic locking retractor”                                                   vehicle movement. For example, if the
                                             ture or any other seat belt function
 feature) must be checked by a quali-                                               driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
                                             is not operating properly when
 fied technician to verify the no                                                   sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact
                                             checked according to procedures in
 “automatic locking retractor” fea-                                                 of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more the combina-
                                             the workshop manual. Failure to
 ture for child seats is still functioning                                          tion seat belts will lock to help reduce
                                             replace the belt and retractor
 properly in addition to other checks                                               forward movement of the driver and
                                             assembly could increase the risk of
 for proper seat belt system function.                                              passengers.
                                             injury in collisions.




2-6
                                                                                                  Essential Safety Equipment



J Automatic Locking Mode                    t How to use the automatic locking             t How to disengage the automatic
                                               mode                                          locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
                                            1. Buckle the combination lap and              Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder
matically pre-locked. The belt will still
                                               shoulder belt.                              belt and allow it to retract completely
retract to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt.                              2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull         to disengage the automatic locking mode
                                               downward until the entire belt is           and activate the emergency locking
The automatic locking mode is not              extracted.                                  mode.
available on the driver seat belt.          3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt      S This vehicle has a seat belt system
t When to use the automatic                    retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.       with an energy management feature
  locking mode                                 This indicates the safety belt is now in        at the front seating positions to help
                                               the automatic locking mode.                     further reduce the risk of injury in the
S When a tight lap/shoulder fit is
                                                                                               event of head-on collision.
  desired.
                                                                                           S This seat belt system has a retractor
S Any time a child safety seat is
                                                                                               assembly that is designed to pay out
  installed in a passenger front seating
                                                                                               webbing in a controlled manner. This
  position. Children 12 years old and
                                                                                               feature is designed to help reduce the
  under should be properly restrained
                                                                                               belt force acting on an occupant’s
  in the rear seat (if equipped) when-
                                                                                               chest.
  ever possible. Refer to ‘‘Child
  Restraint’’ in this section.

                                                                                                                                 2-7
Essential Safety Equipment




             WARNING                                 WARNING                                 WARNING
 Seat Belts:                              Always drive and ride with your         Damaged Seat Belts:
 Make sure that you and your pas-         seatback upright and the lap belt       An accident can damage a seat belt
 sengers, including pregnant women,       portion of your seat belt snug and      in use. The belt webbing can be
 wear seat belts. Be sure that the        low across the hips. This will reduce   weakened and retractors and anchors
 lap belt portion of your seat belt       the risk of serious injury to the       can be bent or broken. Therefore, a
 fits snugly and as low as possible       abdomen or neck that could be           damaged seat belt may not provide
 around the hips. If seat belts are not   caused by sliding under the seat
                                          belts in a collision.                   adequate protection in a collision.
 used properly, the risk of you or                                                Have a professional inspect all seat
 your passengers being injured in a                                               belt systems in use during an acci-
 collision greatly increases. In a                                                dent before they are used again.
 rollover crash, an unbelted person
 is significantly more likely to die
 than a person wearing a seat belt.
                          (Continued)




2-8
                                                                                     Essential Safety Equipment



NOTE                                               WARNING                      NOTE
When the lap/shoulder belt is un-                                               Refer to page 2-15 for more informa-
                                        Twisted Seat Belts:
buckled and allowed to retract com-                                             tion on how to untwist a seat belt.
pletely, the retractor will switch to   Twisted seat belts can cause injury.
the emergency locking mode.             In a collision, the full width of the
                                        belt isn’t available to absorb the
                                        impact. This puts more force on the                WARNING
                                        bones beneath the belt, which could
                                                                                One Belt, One Passenger:
           WARNING                      break them or cause other serious
                                        injury. If you cannot untwist or        Using one seat belt for more than
No Passengers in Cargo Area:            unjam the seat belt, see your nearest   one person at a time is dangerous.
                                        qualified technician immediately.       A seat belt used in this way can’t
Do not allow any people to ride in
                                        Never drive or ride with twisted seat   spread the impact force properly
the cargo area of your vehicle.
                                        belts.                                  and the two passengers could be
People who are not riding in seats
                                                                                crushed together and seriously
with their seat belts fastened are
                                                                                injured. Never use one belt for more
much more likely to be injured in a
                                                                                than one person at a time.
collision.



                                                                                                                 2-9
Essential Safety Equipment


                                            If the seat belt is not buckled before the
                                            ignition is turned to ON, the light comes
                                            on for one to two minutes and the chime
                                            sounds for 4 to 8 seconds.
                                            If the seat belt is buckled while the light
                                            is on and the chime is sounding, both the
                                            light and chime turn off.
                                            If the seat belt is buckled before the igni-
                                            tion is turned to ON, both the light and
                                            chime will not turn on.

J Seat Belt Warning Light/Chime                                                            J Front Seat Belts
The seat belt warning light/chime                                                          To fasten:
reminds you to fasten your seat belt. One                                                  1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.
of the following will take place:
                                                                                           2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.




2-10
                                                  Essential Safety Equipment


3. Insert the tongue into the buckle clos-
   est to the direction the tongue is com-
   ing from until you hear a click.
                                                        WARNING
4. Pull slightly to ensure a proper con-     Positioning the Lap Portion of the
   nection.                                  Seat Belt:
                                             The lap portion of the seat belt worn
              WARNING                        too high can be dangerous. In a col-
                                             lision, this would concentrate the
  Positioning the Shoulder Portion of        impact force directly on the abdom-
  the Seat Belt:                             inal area, causing serious injury.
  Improper positioning of the shoulder       Wear the lap belt snugly and as low
  portion of the seat belt is dangerous.     as possible.
  An improperly positioned belt will
  provide little or no protection in
  a collision. Always make sure the
  shoulder portion of the seat belt is
  positioned across your shoulder and
  near your neck, but never under
  your arm, on your neck, or on your
  upper arm.

                                                                             2-11
Essential Safety Equipment




                                                                   Regular Cab


To unfasten:                             J Shoulder Belt Adjuster                    To lower the shoulder belt height, push
Push the red release button and remove                                               the button and slide the height adjuster
                                         Your vehicle has seat belt height adjust-   down. To raise the height of the shoulder
the tongue from the buckle.              ments for the driver and front passenger.   belt, slide the height adjuster up. Pull
                                         Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so   down on the height adjuster assembly to
                                         the belt rests across the middle of your    make sure it is locked in place.
                                         shoulder.



2-12
                                                                                           Essential Safety Equipment



                                                         WARNING                                 WARNING
                                             Positioning the Shoulder Portion of      If the shoulder belt is off your
                                             the Seat Belt:                           shoulder, under your arm or against
                                             Improper positioning of the shoulder     your neck, there is a greater risk of
                                             portion of the seat belt is dangerous.   severe injury in a collision.
                                             An improperly positioned belt will
                                             provide little or no protection in
                                             a collision. Always make sure the
                                             shoulder portion of the seat belt is
                                             positioned across your shoulder and
Be sure the belt is properly positioned on   near your neck, but never under
your shoulder each time you use the belt.    your arm, on your neck, or on your
                                             upper arm.




                                                                                                                      2-13
Essential Safety Equipment


J Front Center Seat Belt                     4. Adjust belt so that it fits snugly and as   tongue to retract fully before trying to
   (No Retractor)                               low as possible around the hips.            pull it out again. The lap belts should fit
                                             To unfasten:                                   snugly and as low as possible around the
The lap belt does not adjust automati-                                                      hips, not around the waist.
cally.                                       Depress the button on the buckle. Shorten
                                             and fasten the belt when not in use.           If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten
To fasten:
                                                                                            it and repeat the procedure above.
1. Grasp the tongue plate and pull it to     J Rear Lap Belts With
    the desired length. To lengthen the         Retractors                                  To unfasten:
    belt, hold the tongue at a right angle                                                  Push in the release button prior to open-
                                             The lap belt will adjust automatically.
    to the webbing and pull; to shorten,                                                    ing the rear door.
    pull the loose end of the webbing.       To fasten:
2. Insert the tongue into the correct                                                         NOTE
                                             Grasp the tongue, and with a continuous
    buckle (the buckle closest to the
                                             motion, pull out enough webbing to               On 4-door cab plus vehicles, do not
    direction the tongue is coming from).
                                             buckle the tongue into the correct               open the rear door when the rear seat
3. Pull slightly to ensure a proper con-     buckle. If you did not pull out enough
    nection.                                                                                  belt is still buckled.
                                             webbing to reach the buckle, allow the




2-14
                                                                                               Essential Safety Equipment


                                        J How to Untwist or Unjam a
           WARNING                         Seat Belt Retractor
Wearing the Lap Belt:                   If you should jam the lap belt retractor by
A lap belt worn too high can be dan-    allowing the belt to retract when it is
gerous. In a collision, this would      twisted, you can free the webbing with
concentrate the impact force directly   this procedure:
on the abdominal area, causing seri-    1. Pull on the belt with both hands to
ous injury. Wear the lap belt snugly       tighten it on the retractor spool.
and as low as possible.
                                        2. Feed the belt back into the retractor
                                           until it is completely retracted. Repeat
                                           previous step if necessary.                  J Procedure to Correct a Twisted
                                        3. Pull the belt out of its holder as far as       Seat Belt at the D-Ring
                                           it will go and untwist the belt or
                                           remove the object that is jamming the        1. Grasp the belt webbing at the D-ring.
                                           belt. Let the belt retract.                     (Wire type shown—vehicles with
                                                                                           other types of D-rings also affected.)
                                        4. Then, pull the belt out and let it retract
                                           several times to make sure that the
                                           belt works properly.

                                                                                                                          2-15
Essential Safety Equipment




2. Rotate and fold the belt webbing over     4. When completed, the seat belt should   J Procedure to Correct a Rotated
   itself as required to remove the twist.      look like the above figure.               Tongue on the Seat Belt
3. Feed the folded portion of the belt                                                 1. Grasp the belt tongue and pull down
   through the D-ring.                                                                    on the belt webbing closest to you to
                                                                                          form a loop through the upper (nar-
                                                                                          row and longer) slot in the tongue.



2-16
                                                                                              Essential Safety Equipment


                                                                                       J Seat Belt Extender
                                                                                       If your seat belt is not long enough, even
                                                                                       when fully extended, your Authorized
                                                                                       Mazda Dealer can provide you with a
                                                                                       seat belt extender. It is free. The extender
                                                                                       will be only for you and for the particular
                                                                                       vehicle and seat that you choose. When
                                                                                       ordering an extender, only order one that
                                                                                       provides the necessary additional length
                                                                                       to fasten the seat belt properly. Please
                                                                                       contact your Authorized Mazda Dealer
2. Working within the upper slot, rotate   4. Repeat the above steps to complete       for more information.
   and fold the belt webbing over itself      the removal of the twist at the lower
   as required to remove the twist.           (wider and larger) slot in the tongue.
3. Pull the excess belt webbing back       5. When completed, the seat belt should
   through the upper slot in the tongue.      look like the second figure on page
                                              2-16.



                                                                                                                           2-17
Essential Safety Equipment




            WARNING                                WARNING                                   WARNING
 Using an Improper Extender:           Unnecessary Use of an Extender:           Using an Extender That is Too
 Using a seat belt extender that is    Using a seat belt extender when not       Long:
 for another person or a different     necessary is dangerous. The seat          Using an extender that is too long is
 vehicle or seat is dangerous. The     belt will be too long and not fit prop-   dangerous. The seat belt will not fit
 seat belt will not provide adequate   erly. In an accident, the seat belt       properly. In an accident, the seat
 protection and the user could be      will not provide adequate protec-         belt will not provide adequate
 seriously injured in an accident.     tion and you could be seriously           protection and you could be seri-
 Only use the extender provided for    injured. Only use the extender            ously injured. Don’t use the
 you and for the particular vehicle    when it is required to fasten the seat    extender or choose one shorter in
 and seat. NEVER use the extender      belt properly.                            length if the distance between the
 in a different vehicle or seat.                                                 extender’s buckle and the center of
                                                                                 the user’s body is less than 6 inches.




2-18
                                                                                           Essential Safety Equipment


J Pregnant Women                       J Seat Belt Maintenance                      a collision be replaced. However, if the
                                                                                    collision was minor and a qualified tech-
Pregnant women should wear seat belt   Inspect the seat belt systems periodically   nician finds that the belts do not show
assemblies as recommended by their     to make sure they work properly and are      damage and continue to operate prop-
doctors. The lap belt should be worn   not damaged. Inspect the seat belts to       erly, they do not need to be replaced. Seat
SNUGLY AND AS LOW AS POS-              make sure there are no nicks, wears or       belt assemblies not in use during a colli-
SIBLE.                                 cuts, replacing if necessary. All seat       sion should also be inspected and
                                       belt assemblies, including retractors,       replaced if either damage or improper
                                       buckles, front seat belt buckle assem-       operation is noted.
                                       blies (slide bar) (if equipped), shoulder
                                       belt height adjusters (if equipped), child
                                       safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if
                                       equipped), and attaching hardware,
                                       should be inspected after a collision.
                                       Mazda recommends that all seat belt
                                       assemblies used in vehicles involved in




                                                                                                                       2-19
Essential Safety Equipment



                                                                                     that the belts do not show damage
                                                        WARNING                      and continue to operate properly,
                                            Inspecting Seat Belts After a            they do not need to be replaced. Seat
                                            Collision:                               belt assemblies not in use during a
                                                                                     collision should also be inspected
                                            All seat belt assemblies, including      and replaced if either damage or
                                            retractors, buckles, front seat buckle   improper operation is noted.
                                            support assemblies (slide bar, if so
                                            equipped), shoulder belt height
                                            adjusters (if equipped), child safety
                                            seat tether bracket assemblies (if                  WARNING
                                            equipped) and attaching hardware
The short plastic boot on the front seat                                             Replace Belt Label:
                                            should be inspected after any colli-
belt at the outboard anchor location                                                 If any part of the colored label is
                                            sion. Mazda recommends that all
(Regular Cab, driver; Cab Plus, driver                                               exposed, the belt must be replaced.
                                            seat belt assemblies used in vehicles
and passenger) covers an energy absorb-                                              Failure to do so could result in
                                            involved in a collision be replaced.
ing sew pattern on the seat belt. In the                                             severe personal injuries in a colli-
                                            However, if the collision was minor
event of an accident, the sew pattern may                                            sion.
                                            and a qualified technician finds
release and a colored label (REPLACE
BELT) may become visible. If this                                    (Continued)
occurs, the seat belt must be replaced.

2-20
                                                                                             Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint
You are required by law to use safety        restrained in the rear seating positions
restraints for children in the U.S. and      than in the front seating positions.                   WARNING
Canada. If small children ride in your
vehicle (generally children who are four                                                Installing Child Restraint Seats:
years old or younger and who weigh 40                     WARNING                       When installing a child safety seat,
lbs [18 kg] or less), you must put them in                                              be sure to use the correct seat belt
safety seats made especially for chil-        Child Restraint Instructions:             buckle for that seating position, and
dren. Check your local and state or pro-      When using any infant or child            make sure the tongue is securely
vincial laws for specific requirements        restraint system, it is important that    fastened in the buckle. All child
regarding the safety of children in your      you follow the instructions and           restraint systems are designed to
vehicle.                                      warnings provided by the manufac-         be secured in vehicle seats by the
                                              turer concerning its installation and     lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. If
Always follow the instructions and            use. Failure to follow each of the        you do not properly secure the
warnings that come with any infant or         restraint manufacturer’s instructions     safety seat to the vehicle, the risk is
child restraint you might use.                could increase the risk or severity of    greater that a child, occupying the
When possible, always place children          an injury in the event of a collision     seat during a collision or sudden
under age 12 in the rear seat of your         or sudden stop.                           stop, will be injured. An un-secured
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that                                               safety seat could also injure other
children are safer when properly                                                        passengers in the vehicle.


                                                                                                                          2-21
Essential Safety Equipment



             WARNING                                 WARNING                                WARNING
 Unsecured Restraint System:              Holding a Child:                       Unattended Children:
 A child-restraint system that is not     A child should never be held on the    Leaving children unattended in a
 securely fastened down can be dan-       lap or in the arms of a passenger in   vehicle can be dangerous. In hot
 gerous. In a sudden stop or collision,   a moving vehicle. No matter how        weather, temperatures inside a
 it can become a projectile and hit       strong a person may be, he or she      parked vehicle can become high
 someone, causing serious injury.         cannot hold a child during an acci-    enough to cause brain damage or
 When not in use, remove it from the      dent. The child may thus be injured    even death. Never leave children or
 vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt.   by hitting parts of the vehicle, by    animals unattended in the vehicle.
                                          being crushed by an unrestrained
                                          passenger or even being ejected
                                          from the vehicle.




2-22
                                                                                        Essential Safety Equipment


J Installing a Child-Restraint
   System                                             WARNING                                  WARNING
The front passenger seat lap/shoulder     Improperly Secured System:               Keep Seatbacks Upright:
belt retractor operates in two modes,     Carefully follow all of the manufac-     Children should always ride with
emergency locking mode and automatic      turer’s instructions that come with      the seatback in the fully upright
locking mode. Automatic locking mode      the safety seat that you put in your     position. When the seatback is not
must be used when installing a child      vehicle. Make sure that the shoulder     fully upright, there is a greater risk
safety seat on the passenger side seat.   belt (if provided at the seating posi-   that the child will slide under the
(Refer to ‘‘Passenger Air Bag’’ Warning   tion where the safety seat is being      seat belt and be seriously injured
on page 2-24.)                            used) does not cross or rest in front    in a collision. Seatbacks should be
                                          of the child’s face or neck. If you do   upright for use with child safety
                                          not install and use the safety seat      seats.
                                          properly, the child may be injured
                                          in a sudden stop or collision.
                                                                                               WARNING
                                                                                   Center Facing Jump Seats:
                                                                                   Safety seats for children are not
                                                                                   intended for use in center facing
                                                                                   seats.

                                                                                                                    2-23
Essential Safety Equipment



            WARNING                                                                             WARNING
 Passenger Air Bag:                                                                 Buckle Release Button:
 REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS                                                           Always keep the buckle release
 SHOULD NEVER BE USED IN                                                            button pointing upward and away
 THE FRONT SEAT UNLESS THE                                                          from the child seat, with the tongue
 PASSENGER AIR BAG SWITCH                                                           between the child seat and the
 IS TURNED TO OFF. When using                                                       release button. Failure to follow
 forward-facing child seats in the                                                  these instructions could result in
 front seat, always move the passen-                                                accidental unbuckling of the seat
 ger seat as far back from the instru-                                              belt if the child safety seat hits the
 ment panel as possible. Failure to      When installing a child safety seat, be    release button. Release of the seat
 follow these warnings could result      sure to use the correct belt buckle for    belt could result in serious injuries.
 in injury to the child.                 that seating position. Insert the belt
                                         tongue into the proper buckle until you
                                         hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure
                                         the tongue is securely fastened in the
                                         buckle.



2-24
                                                                                                  Essential Safety Equipment


                                             4. While holding the shoulder and lap          7. Allow the belt to retract. The belt
                                                belt portions together, route the tongue       will click as it retracts to indicate it
                                                through the child seat according to            is in the automatic locking mode.
                                                the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-      8. Pull the lap belt portion across the
                                                tions. Be sure the belt webbing is not         child seat toward the buckle and
                                                twisted.                                       pull up on the shoulder belt while
                                             5. Insert the belt tongue into the proper         pushing down on the seat.
                                                buckle (the buckle closest to the           9. Allow the seat belt to retract to
                                                direction the tongue is coming from)           remove any slack in the belt.
                                                for that seating position until you        10. Before placing the child in the seat,
                                                hear and feel the latch engage. Make           forcibly tilt the seat forward and back
                                                sure the tongue is latched securely by         to make sure the seat is securely held
t Front seat passenger position                 pulling on it.                                 in place.
1. Slide the seat as far back as possible.   6. To put the retractor in the automatic      11. Try to pull the belt out of the retrac-
2. Secure the system with the lap por-          locking mode, grasp the shoulder               tor to make sure the retractor is in
   tion of the lap/shoulder belt.               portion of the belt and pull downward          the automatic locking mode. (You
                                                until all of the belt is retracted and a       should not be able to pull more belt
3. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
                                                click is heard.                                out.) If the retractor is not locked,
   then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
   belt together.                                                                              unbuckle the belt and repeat steps 3
                                                                                               through 10.

                                                                                                                               2-25
Essential Safety Equipment



J Attaching Safety Seats With                An anchor bracket can be installed on the
   Tether Straps                             rear edge of the front seat cushion. The                WARNING
                                             attaching hole is provided in the rear
t General instructions                       edge of the front passenger seat cushion     Tether Attachment:
Some manufacturers make safety seats         frame.                                       Use only the tether attachment hole
that include a tether strap that goes over                                                locations. The tether anchorage may
                                             Read and carefully follow the instruc-       not perform properly if the wrong
the back of the vehicle seat and attaches    tions provided with the kit for installa-
to an anchoring point. Contact the child                                                  mounting location is used.
                                             tion of the child tether strap anchor.
seat manufacturer for information about
ordering a tether strap.                     Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
                                             instructions to attach the tether strap to
You can attach a tether strap anchor         the tether bracket.
bracket to the cab inner back panel by                                                               WARNING
using a tether anchor kit available at                                                    Follow Precautions:
no charge from any Authorized Mazda
                                                                                          Failure to follow these precautions
Dealer.
                                                                                          could increase the chance and/or
A tethered seat can be installed in the                                                   severity of injury in an accident.
front seat. Put the tether strap over the
seatback and attach it to an anchor
bracket.

2-26
                                                                                     Essential Safety Equipment



                                        the webbing of the buckled right
           WARNING                      rear lap belt. Do not install a child               WARNING
Center Facing Jump Seats:               seat in a center facing jump seat.      Test Child Restraints:
                                        Safety seats for children are not
In Cab Plus vehicles equipped with      intended for use in center facing       Once you have attached the safety
center facing jump seats, the tether    seats.                                  seat, test the seat before you place
strap anchor bracket should be                                                  the child in it. Tilt the seat from side
installed only at the center of the                                             to side. Also try to tug the seat for-
cab’s back panel with the child seat                                            ward. Check to see if the belt holds
in the front center seating position.                                           the seat firmly in place.
Installing an anchor bracket at the                                             If the safety seat is not anchored
right rear of the cab may increase                                              properly, the risk of a child being
risk of injury to an occupant of the                                            injured in a collision or sudden stop
right rear center facing jump seat                                              greatly increases. Reclining seat-
in the event of a collision or sudden                                           backs should be in the most upright
stop. If a tethered child seat is                                               position for use with child safety
installed in the right front seating                                            seats.
position, secure the tether strap to
                          (Continued)


                                                                                                                  2-27
Essential Safety Equipment


To improve the fit of lap and shoulder           J Older Children
belts on children who have outgrown
                                                 A child who has outgrown child restraint
                                                                                                          WARNING
child safety seats, Mazda recommends
use of a belt-positioning booster seat that      systems should use seat belts, both lap      Shoulder Belt Positioning:
is labeled as conforming to all Federal          and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses   The child should wear the lap and
motor vehicle safety standards. Belt-            the neck or face, use the adjustable         shoulder belt only if the shoulder
positioning booster seats raise the child        shoulder belt and/or move the child          belt portion can be positioned so that
and provide a shorter, firmer seating            closer to the center of the vehicle.         it does not cross or rest in front of
cushion that encourages safer seating                                                         the child’s face or neck. Moving the
posture and better fit of lap and shoulder                                                    child closer to the center of the
belts on the child. A belt-positioning                         WARNING                        vehicle may help provide proper
booster should be used if the shoulder belt        Proper Belt Adjustment:                    shoulder belt fit.
rests in front of the child’s face or neck, or                                                If the shoulder belt cannot be prop-
if the lap belt does not fit snugly on both        If seat belts are not properly worn
                                                   and adjusted as described, the risk        erly positioned, the child should be
thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let                                                 protected by a child restraint system.
the child sit all the way back on the seat         of serious injury to the child in a
                                                   collision will be much greater.            If you do not have a child restraint
cushion when the lower legs hang over                                                         system, obtain one immediately. In
the edge of the seat cushion. You may              Make sure the seat belt is worn
                                                   properly as described in this section.     the meantime, move the child to a
wish to discuss the specific needs of your                                                    lap belt-only seat position if the
child with your pediatrician.                                                                 vehicle is so equipped.

2-28
                                                                                               Essential Safety Equipment

                                          Supplemental Air Bag
                                          Restraint System                              S Reduce the possibility of injuries in a
            WARNING                       In a front-end accident, the supplemental       frontal collision that is not severe
                                          restraint system is designed to provide         enough to activate the air bag.
Lap Belt Position:                        protection in addition to the three-point     S Reduce the possibility of being
Lap belts and the lap belt portion        seat belt system. Without seat belt usage,      thrown from your vehicle.
of lap and shoulder belts should          the air bags cannot provide adequate
always be worn snugly and below           protection during an accident. Seat belt      S Reduce the possibility of injuries to
the hips, touching the child’s thighs.    usage is necessary to:                          lower body and legs during an acci-
                                                                                          dent because the air bag provides no
                                          S Keep the passenger away from an               protection to these parts.
                                            inflating air bag.
            CAUTION                                                                     S Hold the driver in a position which
                                          S Reduce the possibility of injuries dur-       allows better control of the vehicle.
                                            ing an accident that is not designed for
A seat belt or child restraint can
                                            air bag inflation, such as rollover, side
become very hot in a closed vehicle
                                            or rear collisions.
during warm weather. To avoid
burning yourself or a child, inspect
the seat belt or child restraint before
using.



                                                                                                                          2-29
Essential Safety Equipment


The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends                      WARNING                                WARNING
a minimum of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the air    Air Bags without Seat Belts:             The driver and passenger air bags
bag module.                                Depending only on the air bags           are not designed to restrain occu-
                                           for protection during an accident        pants in the center front seating
To properly position yourself away from    is dangerous. Alone, air bags            position on bench seats. Please
the air bag:                               may not prevent serious injuries.        wear your seat belts.
S Move your seat to the rear as far as     The appropriate air bags can be
  you can while still reaching the ped-    expected to inflate only during a
                                           frontal or near-frontal collision of
  als comfortably.
                                           at least moderate force. Vehicle
S Recline the seat one or two notches      occupants should always wear seat
  from the upright position.               belts.

                                          Small children, those under 40 lbs (18
                                          kg), should be protected by a child-re-
                                          straint system (page 2-21).




2-30
                                                                                       Essential Safety Equipment



                                                                                 S One or more impact and safing sen-
           WARNING                                                                 sors, passenger air bag deactivation
                                                                                   (PAD) switch and diagnostic monitor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint:
When a rear-facing child restraint                                               S Readiness light and tone
is installed on the passenger seat                                               S Electrical wiring which connects the
and the passenger side air bag de-                                                 components
activation switch is not in the OFF
position, it is extremely dangerous.
In an accident, the air bag could
inflate and cause serious injuries or
even death to the child in the
rear-facing child restraint. When       J System Description
first installing a rear-facing child
                                        The air bag system consists of:
restraint until it is removed, always
set and leave the passenger side air    S Driver and passenger air bag modules
bag deactivation switch in the OFF        (which include the inflators and air
position.                                 bags)



                                                                                                                2-31
Essential Safety Equipment


                                                                                         J Passenger Air Bag
                                                                                         It is important for front seat passengers’
                                                                                         safety that they remain properly seated
                                                                                         whenever the vehicle is moving. This
                                                                                         means that small children should be
                                                                                         secured in appropriate child safety seats.
                                                                                         All other occupants should sit upright,
                                                                                         with their backs against the seatback, and
                                                                                         restrained by lap and shoulder belts. No
                                                                                         passenger should sit toward the front
                                                                                         edge of the seat, or stand or lean near the
                                                                                         air bag cover (which is near the glove
The driver air bag is mounted in the       The passenger air bag is mounted in the       box).
center of the steering wheel and remains   upper right hand section of the instru-
out of sight until activated.              ment panel and remains out of sight
                                           until activated. It is not intended to pro-
                                           vide protection to the center occupant’s
                                           position.




2-32
                                                                                          Essential Safety Equipment


J Passenger Air Bag
   Deactivation Switch                                  WARNING                                 WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with a front pas-   Air Bags and Seat Belts                 Rear-Facing Child Restraint:
senger side air bag deactivation switch.
                                             The seat belts for the driver and       When a rear-facing child restraint
The switch is located at the lower center
                                             right front passenger seating posi-     is installed on the passenger seat
of the instrument panel next to the ash-
                                             tions have been specifically de-        and the passenger side air bag de-
tray.
                                             signed to function together with the    activation switch is not in the OFF
The passenger side air bag should            air bags in certain types of crashes.   position, it is extremely dangerous.
always be ON (the air bag OFF light          When you turn OFF your air bag,         In an accident, the air bag could
should NOT be illuminated) unless the        you not only lose the protection of     inflate and cause serious injuries or
passenger is a person who meets the          the air bag, you also may reduce the    even death to the child in the
requirements stated either in Category 1,    effectiveness of your seat belt sys-    rear-facing child restraint. When
2 or 3 of the NHTSA deactivation crite-      tem which was designed to work          first installing a rear-facing child
ria which follows.                           with your air bag. If you are not a
                                             person who meets the requirements       restraint until it is removed, always
                                             stated in the NHTSA deactivation        set and leave the passenger side air
                                             criteria turning OFF the air bag        bag deactivation switch in the OFF
                                             can increase the risk of serious        position.
                                             injury or death in a collision.


                                                                                                                     2-33
Essential Safety Equipment


The vast majority of drivers and passen-      in modern vehicles are designed to work      NHTSA deactivation criteria
gers are much safer with an air bag than      as a safety system with the air bags.
without. To do their job and reduce the                                                    1. Infant – An infant (less than 1 year
                                              Read all air bag warning labels in the          old) must ride in the front seat
risk of life threatening injuries, air bags   vehicle as well as the other important air
must open with great force, and this                                                          because:
                                              bag instructions and warnings in this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk      owner’s manual.                              S the vehicle has no rear seat;
in some situations, particularly when a
front seat occupant is not properly                                                        S the vehicle has a rear seat too small to
buckled up. The most effective way to                                                        accommodate a rear-facing infant
reduce the risk of unnecessary air bag                                                       seat; or
injuries without reducing the overall
safety of the vehicle is to make sure all                                                  S the infant has a medical condition
occupants are properly restrained in the                                                     which, according to the infant’s phy-
vehicle, especially in the front seat. This                                                  sician, makes it necessary for the
provides the protection of seat belts and                                                    infant to ride in the front so that the
permits the air bags to provide the addi-                                                    driver can constantly monitor the
tional protection they were designed to                                                      child’s condition.
provide. If you choose to deactivate your
air bag, you are losing the very signifi-
cant risk reducing benefits of the air bag
and you are also reducing the effective-
ness of the seat belts, because seat belts
2-34
                                                                                               Essential Safety Equipment


2. Child age 1 to 12 – A child age 1 to      3. Medical condition – A passenger
   12 must ride in the front seat because:      has a medical condition which,                       WARNING
S the vehicle has no rear seat;                 according to his or her physician:
                                                                                          Energy Management Seat Belts
S although children ages 1 to 12 ride in     S causes the passenger air bag to pose       This vehicle has special energy
  the rear seat(s) whenever possible,          a special risk for the passenger; and      management seat belts for the
  children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must       S makes the potential harm from the          driver and/or right front passenger.
  ride in the front because no space is        passenger air bag in a crash greater       These particular belts are specifi-
  available in the rear seat(s) of the         than the potential harm from turning       cally designed to work with air bags
  vehicle; or                                  OFF the air bag and allowing the pas-      to help reduce the risk of injury in
S the child has a medical condition            senger, even if belted, to hit the dash-   a collision. The energy manage-
  which, according to the child’s physi-       board or windshield in a crash.            ment seat belt is designed to give or
  cian, makes it necessary for the child                                                  release additional belt webbing in
  to ride in the front seat so that the                                                   some accidents to reduce con-
  driver can constantly monitor the                                                       centration of force on an occupant
  child’s condition.                                                                      and reduce the risk of injuries to
                                                                                          underlying organs.
                                                                                                                  (Continued)



                                                                                                                          2-35
Essential Safety Equipment



 In a crash, if the air bag is turned                                              t To deactivate the passenger
 OFF, this energy management seat                                                    air bag
 belt might permit the person wear-                                                1. Insert the ignition key, turn the
 ing the belt to move forward enough                                                  switch to OFF position and hold in
 to incur a serious or fatal injury.                                                  OFF position while removing the
 The more severe the crash, and the                                                   key.
 heavier the occupant, the greater
 the risk is. Be sure the air bag is                                               2. When the ignition is turned on, the
 turned ON for any person who does                                                    OFF light illuminates briefly,
 not qualify under the NHTSA deac-                                                    momentarily shuts off and then turns
 tivation criteria.                                                                   back on. This indicates that the pas-
                                                                                      senger air bag is deactivated.
                                        NOTE
                                        If the yellow peel-off label is still on
                                        the switch, pull the tab to remove it,
                                        and discard it.




2-36
                                                                                         Essential Safety Equipment


                                                                                  t To activate the passenger air bag
           WARNING                                   WARNING                      1. Insert the ignition key and turn the
                                                                                     switch to ON.
Light Malfunction:                       In order to avoid inadvertent
If the light fails to illuminate when    activation of the deactivation           2. The OFF light will briefly illuminate
the passenger air bag deactivation       switch and the passenger air bag,           when the ignition is turned to ON.
switch is in the OFF position and        always remove the ignition key              This indicates the passenger air bag is
the ignition switch is in ON, have       from the passenger air bag deac-            operational.
the passenger air bag switch serv-       tivation switch.
iced at your Mazda dealer immedi-
ately.                                  The passenger air bag remains OFF until
                                        you turn it back ON.




                                                                                                                     2-37
Essential Safety Equipment


                                        The amber OFF light warns the driver
            WARNING                     and any passengers that the passenger air                 WARNING
                                        bag is turned off. The passenger air bag
 Light Malfunction:                     should be turned off ONLY when a rear-         Keep Switch On:
 If the light is illuminated when the   facing infant seat is installed at the right   Keep the passenger air bag turned
 passenger air bag deactivation         front passenger seat.                          ON unless there is an infant seat
 switch is in the ON position and the                                                  installed in the front seat. When the
 ignition switch is in ON, have the                                                    passenger air bag switch is turned
 passenger air bag deactivation                                                        OFF, the passenger air bag will not
 switch serviced at your Mazda                                                         inflate in a collision.
 dealer immediately.




2-38
                                                                                       Essential Safety Equipment



                                                                                J How the Air Bag Works
           WARNING                                 WARNING                      When air bag crash sensors detect a
Passenger Seated and Restrained:        Rear-Facing Child Restraint:            greater than moderate frontal impact
If a passenger is not properly seated   When a rear-facing child restraint      (more severe than hitting a parked vehi-
and restrained, an inflating air        is installed on the passenger seat      cle of similar size and weight head-on
bag could cause a serious injury or     and the passenger side air bag de-      at about 28 mph [45 km/h]), an electrical
death.                                  activation switch is not in the OFF     current is sent to the inflator and nitrogen
                                        position, it is extremely dangerous.    gas is produced to inflate the air bag.
                                        In an accident, the air bag could       After the inflation, the bag quickly
                                        inflate and cause serious injuries or   deflates.
                                        even death to the child in the
                                        rear-facing child restraint. When
                                        first installing a rear-facing child
                                        restraint until it is removed, always
                                        set and leave the passenger side air
                                        bag deactivation switch in the OFF
                                        position.



                                                                                                                    2-39
Essential Safety Equipment




            WARNING                      NOTE                                            WARNING
                                         When an air bag deploys, a loud
 Seating Position:                                                           Hot Air Bag Inflators:
                                         inflation noise can be heard and
 Sitting too close to an air bag stor-   some smoke will be released. Nei-   Hot air bag inflators are danger-
 age compartment or placing hands        ther is likely to cause injury.     ous. Immediately after inflation,
 on it is extremely dangerous. Air                                           the inflators in the steering wheel or
 bags inflate with great force and                                           the dashboard are very hot. You
 speed. Serious injuries could occur                                         could get burned. Don’t touch the
 if someone is sitting too close. The                                        internal components of the air bag
 driver should always hold onto only                                         storage areas after the bags have
 the rim of the steering wheel. The                                          inflated.
 front seat passenger should keep
 both feet on the floor. Front seat
 occupants should adjust their seats
 as far back as possible, always sit
 upright against the seat backs and
 wear their seat belts properly.



2-40
                                                                                    Essential Safety Equipment




           WARNING                                WARNING                                 WARNING
Modification of the Supplemental       Front Air Bag Storage Areas:            Air Bag Inspection After a
Restraint System:                      Attaching an object to a front air      Collision:
Modifying the components or wir-       bag storage area or placing some-       If your Mazda was in a collision
ing of the supplemental restraint      thing in front of it is dangerous. In   not strong enough to inflate the air
system is dangerous. You could         an accident, the object could inter-    bag, parts on which the sensors are
accidentally activate it or make       fere with front air bag inflation and   mounted may be distorted, and
it inoperable. Don’t make any mod-     injure the occupants. Always keep       without repairs the system may not
ifications to the supplemental         the front air bag storage areas free    operate when necessary.
restraint system. This includes        of objects.                             Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
installing trim, badges or anything                                            make a very careful inspection of
else over the air bag storage areas.                                           the system.
It also includes installing extra
electric equipment on or near sys-
tem components or wiring.




                                                                                                              2-41
Essential Safety Equipment


                             J Front Air Bag Activation
                             A greater than moderate impact will
                             cause the front air bags to inflate in the
                             following cases:
                             1. Hitting a solid wall straight on
                                 at greater than about 14 mph (22
                                 km/h).
                             2. Frontal impact within about a 30
                                 degree range from head on to the
                                 vehicle.
                             3. Hitting a curb, pavement edge or
                                 hard material.
                             4. Driving into a big hole or hitting the
                                 far side of a hole.
                             5. Landing hard or vehicle falling.




2-42
       Essential Safety Equipment


J Limitations to Front Air Bag
   Activation
Depending on the severity of impact,
the front air bags may not inflate in the
following cases:
1. Impacts involving trees or poles
    cause severe cosmetic damage but
    may not have enough impact to acti-
    vate the air bag.
2. Rear-ending or running under a
    truck’s tail gate may not provide the
    stopping force necessary for air bag
    deployment.
3. Frontal offset impact to the vehicle
    may not provide the stopping force
    necessary for air bag deployment.




                                   2-43
Essential Safety Equipment


                             J Non-Activation of Front
                                Air Bags
                             Front air bags will not normally inflate
                             in the following cases:
                             1. Collision from the rear.
                             2. Vehicle rollover.
                             3. Impact to the side.




2-44
                                                                                              Essential Safety Equipment


J Constant Monitoring
These components are monitored by the
                                                                                                     WARNING
air bag system warning light or beeper:                                                 System Problems:
S SRS units                                                                             A problem with the system is indi-
                                                                                        cated by one or more of the follow-
S Air bag modules                                                                       ing: the readiness light will either
                                                                                        flash or stay lit, or it will not light, or
S Related wiring
                                                                                        a group of five beeps will be heard.
S Warning lights                                                                        If any of these things happen, the
A diagnostic monitor continuously mon-                                                  system may not work in an accident
itors the system’s readiness. This begins                                               and you will lose the enhanced bene-
                                            t Warning light                             fits of your air bag. Have the air bag
when the ignition is turned on and con-
tinues while the vehicle is being driven.   If the air bag system is OK, the warning    system serviced at your Authorized
                                            light comes on when the ignition is         Mazda dealer immediately.
                                            turned on or after the engine is cranked.   Because hidden damage may dis-
                                            After about 6 seconds it goes out.          able an air bag system, always have
                                                                                        your air bag system checked after
                                                                                        an accident.


                                                                                                                             2-45
Essential Safety Equipment


t Warning beeper
A warning light is the basic method of
                                                         WARNING                                WARNING
reporting the system’s condition.             Self-Servicing the Supplemental        Removing Interior Parts:
But if the light is out and a malfunction     Restraint Systems:                     Removing the front dashboard, or
occurs, a series of five sets of five beeps   Self-servicing or tampering with       the steering wheel or parts contain-
will be heard.                                the supplemental restraint systems     ing air bag sensors is dangerous.
                                              is dangerous. An air bag could acci-   These parts contain air bags. The
This also signals need for servicing.         dentally activate or become dis-       air bag could accidently activate
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer at         abled. This could cause serious        and cause injuries. Always have an
your first opportunity.                       injuries. Never tamper with the sup-   Authorized Mazda Dealer remove
                                              plemental restraint systems and        these parts.
These beeps will continue periodically        always have an Authorized Mazda
until the reason for the light being out is   Dealer perform all servicing and
taken care of.                                repairs.
Again: If this happens, the system may
not work in an accident.




2-46
                                                                                      Essential Safety Equipment



                                      J Maintenance
           WARNING                                                               NOTE
                                      This air bag system is maintenance-free.
                                      But if any of the following occurs, take   Should you sell your Mazda, we urge
Air Bag Disposal:
                                      your vehicle to an Authorized Mazda        you to tell the new owner it has an air
Improper disposal of an air bag or                                               bag system and that he or she should
a vehicle with live air bags in       Dealer as soon as possible.
                                                                                 become familiar with all instructions
it can be extremely dangerous.        S Warning light flashes                    about it in the Owner’s Manual.
Unless all safety procedures are
followed, injury can result. Ask an   S Warning light stays on
Authorized Mazda Dealer how to
safely dispose of an air bag or how   S Warning light stays off when the igni-
to scrap an air bag equipped            tion is turned on and warning beeps
vehicle.                                sound
                                      S Air bag inflates




                                                                                                                   2-47
Memo




2-48
    Knowing Your Mazda
3   Security takes many forms and is highly necessary to owner and occupants. Section 3 describes the safe
    way to use your Mazda: key, locks, windows, and interior lighting.




                                   Key        3- 2                             Fuel-Filler Lid      3-23
                           Door Locks         3- 3                             Fuel-Filler Cap      3-24
                     Power Door Locks         3- 6             Service and Information Labels       3-26
                  Keyless Entry System        3- 6                                Tilt Steering     3-30
              Illuminated Entry System        3-11                                        Horn      3-30
                          Battery Saver       3-11                                     Mirrors      3-31
                  SecuriLockT Passive                                            Interior Light     3-33
                     Anti-Theft System        3-12                                Cargo Shade       3-34
                              Windows         3-16                                 Rope Holes       3-35
                       Power Windows          3-16                           Tie-Down Hooks         3-35
                 Rear Quarter Windows         3-18                 Rear Storage Compartment
                               Tailgate       3-19                                    With Net      3-36
                         Hood Release         3-22


                                                                                                             3-1
Knowing Your Mazda

Key
                                             Also write down the code number and
                                             keep it in another safe and handy place,   NOTE
                                             but not in the vehicle.                    Your Authorized Mazda Dealer can
                                             If your key is lost, consult your Autho-   use the code to make new keys if the
                                             rized Mazda Dealer.                        originals are lost or stolen.


                                                                                                   WARNING
                                                                                        Keys and Children:
                                                                                        Leaving small children in a vehicle
Your vehicle has one key that starts your                                               with the ignition key is dangerous.
vehicle, unlocks the doors, and opens the                                               This could result in someone being
glove box.                                                                              badly injured or even killed. They
                                                                                        could play with power windows or
A code number is stamped on the plate                                                   other controls, or even make the
attached to the key set; detach this plate                                              vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys
and store it in a safe place—not in the                                                 in your vehicle with small children.
vehicle—for use if you need to make a
replacement key.

3-2
                                                                                                Knowing Your Mazda

                                           Door Locks
                                                                                   S For the passenger’s door, turn the key
                                                                                     clockwise to unlock, counterclock-
                                                                                     wise to lock.
                                                                                   S For optional rear doors, open the
                                                                                     front driver’s or passenger’s door and
                                                                                     then pull the rear door handle toward
                                                                                     you.
                                                                                   S Lift the handle to open an unlocked
                                                                                     door.


If you have an optional spare tire lock,   J Outside Door Lock
use this key to remove the lock from the
access hole in the rear bumper.            t Locking, unlocking, with key
                                           S Either door can be locked or un-
                                             locked with the key.
                                           S For the driver’s door, turn the key
                                             counterclockwise to unlock, clock-
                                             wise to lock.

                                                                                                                      3-3
Knowing Your Mazda



                                           NOTE
                                           Always remove the ignition key, close
                                           all windows, and lock all doors when
                                           leaving your vehicle unattended. This
                                           discourages intruders and thieves.




t Locking without key                                                              J Inside Door Lock
To lock a door without the key, push the
inside lock button down and close the                                              S To lock any door, push down the lock
door.                                                                                button.
                                                                                   S To unlock, pull on the inside door
                                                                                     handle.




3-4
                                                                                                   Knowing Your Mazda



                                                          WARNING                                  WARNING
                                             Unlocked Doors:                            Unattended Children and Pets:
                                             Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle         Leaving a child or an animal un-
                                             can be dangerous. Passengers can fall      attended in a parked vehicle can be
                                             out if a door is accidentally opened and   dangerous. In hot weather, temper-
                                             can more easily be thrown out in an        atures inside a vehicle can become
                                             accident. So keep all doors locked         high enough to cause brain damage
                                             when driving.                              or even death. Always take all chil-
                                                                                        dren and animals with you or leave
                                                                                        a responsible person with them.
S To open, pull on the inside door handle.




                                                                                                                         3-5
Knowing Your Mazda

Power Door Locks*                                                            Keyless Entry System*
                                                                             S To lock all doors, push the side of the
  Power door locks                   NOTE                                      switch button marked ‘‘LOCK’’.
                                     Always remove the ignition key, close   S To unlock all doors, push the side
                                     all windows, and lock all doors when      of the switch button marked “UN-
                                     leaving your vehicle unattended. This     LOCK”.
                                     discourages intruders and thieves.
                                                                             This system locks and unlocks the vehicle
                                                                             doors without using a key. This system
                                                                             also has a personal alarm feature. The
                                                                             buttons for the system are located on the
                                                                             hand-held transmitter that came with
                                                                             your vehicle. The system can also help
S The power door lock switches are                                           you signal for attention.
  located on both doors.




*Some models.


3-6
                                                                                           Knowing Your Mazda



                                                                             J Unlocking the Doors with the
NOTE
                                                                                Keyless Entry System
S The keyless entry system is                                                To unlock the driver’s door, press   . The
  designed to operate up to 33 feet                                          interior lamps will illuminate.
  (10 meters) from the receiver, but
  this may vary because of local                                             To unlock the other door, press         a
  conditions.                                                                second time within five seconds.
S This system operates only when
  the ignition switch is in the OFF
  position.
S If there is any potential keyless
  entry problem with your vehicle,
  ensure ALL key fobs (keyless
  entry transmitters) are brought to
                                                  CAUTION
  the dealership, to aid in trouble-   Pressing the transmitter buttons
  shooting.                            excessively beyond the range of the
                                       system will cause the keyless entry
                                       system to malfunction.


                                                                                                                  3-7
Knowing Your Mazda



J Locking the Doors with the                   J Keyless Entry Personal Alarm
                                                                                             NOTE
   Keyless Entry System                        Press      to activate the personal alarm.
To lock all the doors, press . This will       This will honk the horn and flash the         This device complies with Part 15
                                               lights for approximately 2 minutes and        of the FCC Rules and with RS-210
also arm the factory-installed Anti-Theft
                                               45 seconds.                                   of Industry Canada. Operation is
system.                                                                                      subject to the following two condi-
To confirm that all doors have been            To deactivate the alarm press    again        tions: (1) This device may not cause
locked, press     again within 5 seconds.      or turn the ignition to ACC or ON.            harmful interference, and (2) This
If all doors are completely closed the                                                       device must accept any interference
                                               When you press         or     , the illumi-   received, including interference that
doors will lock again, the horn will chirp     nated entry system turns on the vehicle’s     may cause undesired operation.
and the parking lights will flash. If a door   interior lights for 25 seconds. You can
is open or ajar, the horn will give two        turn these lights off by pressing or by
short chirps warning you that a door is        turning the ignition to the ON or ACC
open.                                          position.
                                                                                             NOTE
                                                                                             Changes or modifications not expres-
                                                                                             sively approved by the party respon-
                                                                                             sible for compliance could void the
                                                                                             user’s authority to operate the equip-
                                                                                             ment.

3-8
                                                                                                      Knowing Your Mazda



J Arming and Disarming the                   J Replacing the Batteries                  If you notice a significant decrease in
   Alarm System with Keyless                                                            operating range, the battery should be
                                             The keyless entry transmitter is powered   replaced. Replacement batteries can be
   Entry                                     by one coin type three-volt lithium        purchased at most pharmacies, watch
Your keyless entry system will automati-     battery CR2032 or equivalent. Typical      stores or at your authorized Mazda
cally arm the factory installed anti-theft   operating range will allow you to be up    dealer.
system when the doors are locked, and        to 33 feet (10 meters) away from your
automatically disarm it when the doors       vehicle. A decrease in operating range     1. Twist a thin coin between the two
are unlocked. The remote will also reset     can be caused by:                             halves of the transmitter near the key
the anti-theft alarm (when the driver’s                                                    ring. DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT
                                             S weather conditions                          PART OF THE TRANSMITTER
door is unlocked, or when      is pressed)
if it was triggered.                         S nearby radio towers                         APART.

The keyless entry system may not arm         S structures around the vehicle            2. Remove the battery.
and disarm non-factory installed anti-
                                             S other vehicles parked next to the
theft systems.
                                               vehicle.




                                                                                                                            3-9
Knowing Your Mazda


                                            J Replacing Lost Transmitters               J Programming Transmitters
                                            If a remote transmitter has been lost and   To reprogram the transmitters yourself,
                                            you would like to remove it from the        place the key in the ignition and turn
                                            vehicle’s memory, or you would like to      from OFF to ON eight times in rapid
                                            purchase additional remote transmitters     succession (within 10 seconds) ending
                                            and have them programmed to your            in ON. After doors lock/unlock, press
                                            vehicle:                                    any control on all transmitters (up to four
                                                                                        possible) within 20 seconds. The doors
                                            S take all your vehicle’s transmitters to   will lock/unlock one last time to confirm
                                              your dealer for programming, or           completion of program mode. When
                                                                                        completed, switch the ignition to OFF.
                                            S perform the programming procedure         Again the doors will lock/unlock one last
3. Install the new battery with the posi-     yourself.                                 time to confirm completion of program-
   tive (+) side up as marked.                                                          ming.
4. Snap the two halves back together.                                                   All transmitters must be programmed at
                                                                                        the same time.




3-10
                                                                                                Knowing Your Mazda

Illuminated Entry System                                                         Battery Saver
This system will provide illumination of                                         When the ignition is turned off, the
the vehicle’s interior courtesy lights     NOTE                                  vehicle will turn off battery voltage to all
when the keyless entry system is used to   The inside lights will not turn off   courtesy and interior (including cargo)
unlock the door or sound the personal      if:                                   lights after 40 minutes.
alarm. The system automatically turns
off after approximately 25 seconds or      S they have been turned on with the   This will prevent draining of the battery
when the ignition is turned to the START       dimmer control or                 if these lights have been left on inadver-
or ACC positions. On some models, the      S any door is open.                   tently or if a door is not completely
light will turn immediately off when the   The battery saver will shut off the   closed. Battery voltage to these lights
passenger door is closed. The dome         interior lamps 40 minutes after the   will be restored when the keyless entry
lamp control (if equipped) must not be     ignition has been turned to the OFF   transmitter is used, any door is opened,
set to the OFF position for the illumi-    position.                             or the ignition key is turned on again.
nated entry system to operate.




                                                                                                                      3-11
Knowing Your Mazda

SecuriLockT Passive
Anti-Theft System*                             detected (vehicle theft situation), the     momentary problem if they are too close
The SecuriLockT passive anti-theft             vehicle’s engine will not operate.          to the key when starting the engine. If a
system provides an advanced level of                                                       problem occurs, turn ignition off and
                                               If there is any potential SecuriLockT       restart the engine with all other objects
vehicle theft protection. Your vehicle’s       anti-theft problem with your vehicle,       on the key ring held away from the Secu-
engine can only be started with the two        ensure ALL SecuriLockT keys for that        riLockT ignition key.
special SecuriLockT electronically             vehicle are brought to the dealership, to
coded keys provided with your vehicle.         aid in troubleshooting.                     Spare SecuriLockT keys can be pur-
Each time you start your vehicle, the                                                      chased from your dealership and
SecuriLockT key is read by the Securi-         The SecuriLockT passive anti-theft sys-     programmed to your SecuriLockT
LockT passive anti-theft system. If the        tem is not compatible with aftermarket      passive anti-theft system. Refer to ‘‘Pro-
SecuriLockT key identification code            remote start systems. Use of these sys-     gramming spare SecuriLockT keys’’
matches the code stored in the Securi-         tems may result in vehicle starting prob-   for more information.
LockT passive anti-theft system, the           lems and a loss of security protection.
vehicle’s engine is allowed to start. If the   Large metallic objects or devices such as   If one or both of your SecuriLockT keys
SecuriLockT key identification code            the Mobil SpeedpassT on the same key        are lost or stolen and you want to ensure
does not match the code stored in the          ring as your SecuriLockT key may            the lost or stolen key will not operate
system or if a SecuriLockT key is not          cause vehicle starting problems. These      your vehicle, bring your vehicle and all
                                               objects and devices cannot damage           available SecuriLockT keys to your
                                               the SecuriLockT key, but can cause a        dealership for reinitialization.
*Some models.


3-12
                                                                                                       Knowing Your Mazda



J THEFT indicator                           The THEFT indicator is controlled by         previously programmed SecuriLockT
                                            the SecuriLockT system. During the 30        keys are not available (one or both
The THEFT indicator on the instrument       second prearm state, it is normal to see     of your original keys were lost or
cluster will operate as follows:            the THEFT indicator pulse brighter           stolen), you must bring your vehicle to
S When the ignition is OFF, the theft       behind the constant glow.                    your dealership to have the spare Securi-
  indicator will flash briefly every 2                                                   LockT key(s) programmed.
                                            J Programming spare
  seconds to indicate the SecuriLockT
  system is protecting your vehicle.           SecuriLockT keys
S When the ignition is turned to ON or      Spare SecuriLockT keys can be pur-
  START, the THEFT indicator will           chased from your dealership and
  light for 3 seconds and then go out. If   programmed to your SecuriLockT pas-
  the THEFT indicator stays on for an       sive anti-theft system (up to a total of 8
  extended period of time or flashes        keys). Your dealership can program your
  rapidly, have the system serviced         new SecuriLockT key(s) to your vehicle
  by your dealership or a qualified         or you can do it yourself using the fol-
  technician.                               lowing simple procedure. To program a
                                            new SecuriLockT key yourself, you
                                            will need two previously programmed
                                            SecuriLockT keys (keys that already
                                            operate your vehicle’s engine). If two

                                                                                                                           3-13
Knowing Your Mazda



J Procedure to program spare            new unprogrammed SecuriLockT key         2. Turn ignition to OFF and remove the
   SecuriLockT keys to your             readily accessible for the procedure.       first SecuriLockT key from the
   vehicle                              Please read and understand the entire       ignition.
                                        procedure before you begin.
New SecuriLockT keys must have the                                               3. Within five seconds of turning the
correct mechanical key cut for your     1. Insert the first previously pro-         ignition to OFF, insert the second
vehicle.                                   grammed SecuriLockT key into the         previously programmed Securi-
                                           ignition and turn the ignition from      LockT key into the ignition and turn
Conventional (non-SecuriLockT) keys        OFF to ON (maintain ignition in ON       the ignition from OFF to ON (main-
cannot be programmed to your vehicle.      for at least one second).                tain ignition in ON for at least one
                                                                                    second but no more than 5 seconds).
You will need to have two previously
programmed SecuriLockT keys and the




3-14
                                                                                                     Knowing Your Mazda


4. Turn the ignition to OFF and remove     6. To program additional SecuriLockT         If the programming procedure was not
   the second SecuriLockT key from            key(s), repeat this procedure from        successful, the new SecuriLockT key(s)
   the ignition.                              step 1.                                   will not operate the vehicle’s engine.
                                                                                        The THEFT indicator will flash on
5. Within 10 seconds of turning the        If the programming procedure was suc-        and off. Wait at least one minute and
   ignition to OFF, insert the unpro-      cessful, the new SecuriLockT key(s)          then repeat the procedure from step 1.
   grammed SecuriLockT key (new            will start the vehicle’s engine. The         If failure repeats, bring your vehicle
   key/valet key) into the ignition and    THEFT indicator (located on the instru-      to your dealership to have the spare
   turn the ignition from OFF to ON        ment cluster) will light for three seconds   SecuriLockT key(s) programmed.
   (maintain ignition in ON for at least   and then go out.
   one second). This step will program
   your new SecuriLockT key.




                                                                                                                       3-15
Knowing Your Mazda

Windows                               Power Windows*
                                                                                  S To open a window, press down on the
                                                                                    lower portion of the switch.
                                                                                  S To close a window, press down on the
                                                                                    upper portion of the switch.




The door windows can be opened and    Each door has a power control that opens
closed by turning the handle crank.   and closes the window on that door. The
                                      control switch on the driver’s door oper-
                                      ates both front door windows. The igni-
                                      tion switch must be in ON or ACC to use
                                      the power windows.


*Some models.


3-16
                                                                                                  Knowing Your Mazda



J One-Touch Power Window*                   J Accessory Delay*
When the lower part of the switch is        With accessory delay, the window                     WARNING
pressed completely down and released        switches may be used for up to 10 min-     Children Playing with Power
quickly, the window will move to its        utes after the ignition switch is turned   Windows:
fully open position (driver’s side only).   to OFF or until either door is opened.
                                                                                       Playing with power windows is dan-
To stop the window before the fully open
                                                                                       gerous. Someone’s hands, head, or
position, press the lower part of the
                                                         WARNING                       neck could get caught in a closing
switch again.
                                                                                       window. They would be seriously
                                             Unintentional Window Operation:           injured or even killed. Don’t let
                                             Unintentional window operation can        children play with power windows.
                                             be dangerous. A person’s hands, head,
                                             or neck could be caught by the win-
                                             dow and result in serious injury. Un-
                                             less a passenger needs to operate a
                                             window, keep the power window main
                                             switch in the locked position.


                                                                                                               *Some models.

                                                                                                                    3-17
Knowing Your Mazda

Rear Quarter Windows*
                                           S To open a window, pull the latch
                                             inward and then push the window
                                             outward.
                                           S To close it, pull the latch inward and
                                             then push it backward until it snaps
                                             shut. Make sure the window is
                                             securely closed.




Open or close the swing-out rear quarter                                              The sliding rear window has only one
windows by releasing the latch and                                                    sliding portion.
moving the window.




*Some models.

3-18
                                                                                                        Knowing Your Mazda

                                             Tailgate
To open the window, push the center                                                       When the tailgate is open, the tailgate
portion of the latch handle toward the                                                    load should not exceed 500 lbs (227 kgs).
glass and slide the window to the right.                                                  If you want to load heavy items on your
To close the window, slide the window                                                     vehicle, you should load them one at a
to the left and push the latch handle back                                                time, directly on the bed floor, to avoid
to the left. Check for proper latching by                                                 damage to the tailgate or its supports.
gently tugging the latch handle to the
right without pressing the release portion
of the latch.


                                             To open the tailgate, pull the handle
                                             toward you. The connecting cables will
                                             hold the gate in a straight-open position.
                                             When closing the gate, make sure the
                                             lock is secure.




                                                                                                                            3-19
Knowing Your Mazda



                                                                                        1. Lower the tailgate partially.
            WARNING                                                                     2. Support it to allow slack in both
 Riding in the Truck Bed:                                                                  cables.
 Riding in the truck bed, on the bum-                                                   3. Use a coin or similar object to pry the
 per, or on the tailgate, whether it’s                                                     spring clip (on each upper cable con-
 open or closed, is dangerous. Some-                                                       nector) past the head of the support
 one doing this could be injured or                                                        screw. This will allow you to discon-
 killed during a sudden stop or acci-                                                      nect the loop of the connector cable
 dent. Camper type covers of any                                                           from the support screw.
 kind offer no real protection from
 these dangers and may trap poison-                                                     4. Do the same on the other side.
 ous exhaust fumes. They should          If there is no rear step-bumper and you
                                                                                        5. Lower the tailgate carefully.
 only be occupied when the vehicle is    want to let the tailgate hang freely, here’s
 parked without the engine running.      what to do:
 Never allow anyone to ride outside
 the passenger compartment.




3-20
                                                                                                           Knowing Your Mazda



                                                                                            illustration) and lift the right side of the
 NOTE                                                                                       tailgate off its hinge. You can now pull
 Step-bumpers or hitches may damage                                                         the left side of the tailgate away from the
 the tailgate if it is lowered completely.                                                  left hinge.
                                                                                            J Tailgate Installation
Reattach the cables in the reverse order
of removal.                                                                                 1. First, insert the left side of the tailgate
                                                                                               into the left hinge and raise it to a
                                                                                               45 degree angle; next, insert the right
                                                                                               side into the right hinge.
                                                                                            2. Support the tailgate to allow slack in
                                             J Tailgate Removal                                the cables and reattach the cables one
                                                                                               at a time.
                                             First, release the tailgate as described
                                             previously. Be sure to support the left
                                             side to prevent it from falling. Then,
                                             raise the tailgate to a 45 degree angle (see




                                                                                                                                  3-21
Knowing Your Mazda

                                        Hood Release

            WARNING
 Tailgate Open While Driving:
 Do not drive your truck with the
 tailgate open unless there is a load
 holding it in place. Without a load,
 a bump in the road or rough terrain
 could make the tailgate bounce and
 disconnect from your truck. The
 loose tailgate could be damaged and
 could endanger other motorists.
                                        1. Pull down the release handle located   2. Slide the safety catch to the left and
                                           below the steering column.                lift the hood.




3-22
                                                                                                   Knowing Your Mazda

                                                                                     Fuel-Filler Lid
                                          To close the hood:
                                          S Check out the underhood area to make
                                            certain all filler caps are in place
                                            and that all loose items have been
                                            removed.
                                          S Close the hood so that it locks
                                            securely.
                                          S Attempt to lift the hood after closing
                                            it to be sure it is securely latched.

3. Use the support rod to hold the hood                                              To open the fuel-filler lid, pull it open
   open.                                                                             with your finger.
Before closing the hood, secure the rod
in its clip.




                                                                                                                       3-23
Knowing Your Mazda

Fuel-Filler Cap
             WARNING                                 WARNING
 Fuel Tank Pressure:                      Fuel Vapor:
 Pressure sometimes builds up in the      Fuel vapor can be hazardous. Before
 fuel tank. If this happens and the       refueling, stop the engine. Always
 fuel cap is removed quickly, fuel        keep sparks and flames away from
 can spray out. Fuel can burn skin        the filler neck.
 and eyes and cause illness when
 ingested. The fuel system may be
 under pressure. If the fuel filler cap
 is venting vapor or if you hear a
 hissing sound, wait until it stops                                             Your fuel filler cap has an indexed
 before completely removing the                                                 design with a one-eighth turn on/off fea-
 fuel filler cap.                                                               ture.
                                                                                When fueling your vehicle:
                                                                                1. Turn the engine off.
                                                                                2. Carefully turn the filler cap counter-
                                                                                   clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops.

3-24
                                                                                       Knowing Your Mazda


3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel
   filler pipe.                                           CAUTION
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the   Use only a designated Mazda fuel
   cap with the notches on the filler          cap or an approved equivalent, avail-
   pipe.                                       able at Authorized Mazda Dealers.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a      The wrong cap can result in a serious
   turn until it stops.                        malfunction of the fuel system and
                                               the emission control system and may
   If the CHECK ENGINE indicator               void the customer warranty for any
   comes on and stays on when you start        damage to the fuel tank and/or fuel
   the engine, the fuel filler cap may not     system.
   be properly installed. Turn off the
   engine, remove the fuel filler cap and
   reinstall it being careful to align the
   cap properly.




                                                                                                    3-25
Knowing Your Mazda

Service and Information
Labels
Service and information labels are
attached to the sunvisors, passenger
seat belt and the radiator support in the
engine compartment.
This label appears on the driver sun-
visor in the stowed position.




3-26
             Knowing Your Mazda


This label appears on the driver sun-
visor in the stowed position. For the
passenger air bag, this label appears on
the passenger side sunvisor in the
stowed position.




This label appears on the passenger side
seat belt ends.




                                 3-27
Knowing Your Mazda


                     This label will be on the driver’s and
                     passenger’s sunvisor.




3-28
             Knowing Your Mazda


This label is located on the radiator sup-
port shield in the engine compartment.




                                   3-29
Knowing Your Mazda

Tilt Steering*                                                                         Horn
                                           3. Tilt the wheel up or down.
                                           4. Release the lever to lock the wheel in
                                              place.
                                           Be sure the steering wheel locks in a
                                           notch. It is not infinitely adjustable.
                                           Do not adjust the steering wheel while
                                           the vehicle is in motion.



The tilt steering feature allows you to                                                To sound the horn, firmly press the cen-
adjust the steering wheel up or down.                                                  ter of the horn pad in the center of the
To change the position of your vehicle’s                                               steering wheel.
steering wheel:                                                                        Inspect the horn’s operation regularly.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Pull the release lever toward you.

*Some models.

3-30
                                                                                                    Knowing Your Mazda

Mirrors
                                                                                       To adjust your mirrors:
                                                                                       1. Select A to adjust the left mirror
                                                                                          or " to adjust the right mirror.
                                                                                       2. Move the control in the direction you
                                                                                          wish to tilt the mirror.
                                                                                       3. Return to the center position to lock
                                                                                          mirrors in place.
                                                                                       If you have a folding outside mirror,
                                                                                       it will fold flat against the vehicle
                                                                                       when pushed toward it. Mirrors should
J Outside Mirrors                           t Power outside mirrors*
                                                                                       be folded rearward into the body posi-
Check the mirrors’ angles before driving.   This switch controls the adjustments for   tion before entering automatic car wash
                                            both right and left outside mirrors.       systems.
t Manual outside mirrors
Adjust the mirrors by hand.


                                                                                                                  *Some models.


                                                                                                                        3-31
Knowing Your Mazda



             CAUTION                                  WARNING
 Do not clean the plastic housing         Convex Mirror:
 of any electric mirror with gasoline     What you see in the convex mirror
 or other petroleum-based cleaning        (passenger’s side) will be closer than
 products.                                it appears. If you don’t remember
                                          this when changing lanes, you could
                                          hit a vehicle. Be sure to look over
             CAUTION                      your shoulder or to check your
                                          inside mirror before changing lanes.
 The mirrors stop moving when they
 reach the maximum adjusting angle.                                                J Day/Night Mirror
 But the motor continues rotating
 while the switch is on. Do not leave                                              Adjust the inside mirror to center on the
 the switch on. Do not leave the switch                                            scene through the rear window. Do this
 on unnecessarily.                                                                 with the day/night lever in the day posi-
                                                                                   tion.




3-32
                                                                                                       Knowing Your Mazda

                                             Interior Light
Push the lever away from you for day                                                     S To turn off the interior light, turn the
driving. Pull it back to reduce glare from                                                 thumbwheel down until you hear a
headlights at night.                                                                       click.
                                                                                         S When the driver’s or passenger’s door
              WARNING                                                                      is open, the interior light also comes
                                                                                           on.
  Blocked View:
                                                                                         The interior lights will shut off after
  Cargo stacked higher than the                                                          25 seconds with all the doors closed, or
  seatbacks can be dangerous. It can                                                     immediately when the ignition switch is
  block your view in the rearview                                                        turned to the START position, or if the
  mirror, which might cause you to                                                       vehicle speed is above five mph (8 km/h).
  hit another car when changing              J Without Map Light*                        The interior lights will turn off after
  lanes. Don’t stack things higher                                                       40 minutes if any of the doors are left
  than the seatbacks.                        S To turn on the interior light, turn the
                                               thumbwheel to the right of the head-      open. Refer to the Battery Saver earlier
                                               light switch up until you hear a click.   in this section for more details.



                                                                                                                      *Some models.

                                                                                                                            3-33
Knowing Your Mazda

                                                                                      Cargo Shade*
                                          S To turn on the interior light, turn the
                                            thumbwheel to the right of the head-
                                            lamp switch up until you hear a click.
                                          S To turn off the interior light, turn
                                            the thumbwheel down until you hear
                                            a click.
                                          S When the driver’s or passenger’s door
                                            is open, the interior light also comes
                                            on.


J With Map Light*                                                                     The shade is for added security—hiding
                                                                                      objects when the vehicle is parked. It will
S To turn on the right-hand side map                                                  keep some things from flying around the
  light, slide the switch to the right.                                               cab when in an accident, but it is best to
                                                                                      secure heavy items in the cargo bed rather
S To turn on the left-hand side map                                                   than leaving them in the cab itself.
  light, slide the switch to the left.

*Some models.

3-34
                                                                                                      Knowing Your Mazda

                                            Rope Holes                                   Tie-Down Hooks*
To extend the shade:
1. Grasp the end of the shade and pull it
   toward you.
2. Hook the sides of the outstretched
   shade to latch in the side trim panel
   notches behind the front seat.


             WARNING
 Cargo Shade:
 The cargo shade will keep some light
 items from flying forward and strik-       There are four holes inside the bed.         Your vehicle may have tie-down hooks
 ing the occupants in some collisions,                                                   inside the bed. To prevent damage to
                                            Use them to help secure a load with ropes.   your vehicle, secure a load with ropes
 so it is better to attach it. The cargo
 net is an even better way to secure                                                     and the tie-down hooks.
 smaller items. Heavy items should
 be secured in the cargo box rather
 than in the cab at all while driving.
                                                                                                                   *Some models.


                                                                                                                        3-35
Knowing Your Mazda

Rear Storage Compartment
With Net*




Your vehicle may have a small storage
compartment which is located on the
back panel. This compartment has a net
which will secure small objects.



*Some models.

3-36
    Protecting Your Mazda
4   Most people like to save money. With a vehicle, that can be done in several ways from its first day of
    operation. Probably tops on the list of cost-efficiency is using the right kind of fuel and using that fuel
    conservatively.
    Section 4 explains how to do this. Further, it discusses proper loading and how to respond to unusual
    driving conditions. It also illustrates where important vehicle information labels may be found.




                                                                               Fuel Requirements         4- 2
                                                                        Emission Control System          4- 7
                                                                                   Engine Exhaust        4- 8
                                                                                   Before Driving        4- 9
                                                                                  Break-In Period        4-10
                                                                      Money-Saving Suggestions           4-11
                                                                      Special Driving Conditions         4-12
                                                                          Trailer Towing Loading         4-24
                                                                      Trailer Towing Load Tables         4-28
                                                                      Vehicle Information Labels         4-36
                                                                                                                  4-1
Protecting Your Mazda

Fuel Requirements
Vehicles with catalytic converters must      Your vehicle was not designed to use        rating (anti-knock index) of at least 87
use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL, which                fuel or fuel additives with metallic com-   [(R+M)/2 method].
will reduce exhaust emissions and keep       pounds, including manganese-based
spark plug fouling to a minimum.             compounds containing MMT.                   Fuel with a lower rating could cause the
                                                                                         emission control system to lose effective-
If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle   Repairs to correct the effects of using a   ness. It could also cause engine knocking
(FFV), use only UNLEADED FUEL                fuel for which your vehicle was not         and serious engine damage.
and ETHANOL (E-85). The use of               designed may not be covered by your
leaded fuel and methanol is prohibited       warranty.                                   U.S. federal law requires that octane
by law and could damage your vehicle.                                                    ratings be posted on gasoline station
                                             Your Mazda will perform best with           pumps.
Do not use fuel containing methanol.         regular unleaded fuel having an octane
It can damage critical fuel systems com-
ponents.




4-2
                                                                                                Protecting Your Mazda



                                                                                     alcohol blended at no more than 10%
           WARNING                                    CAUTION                        ethanol.

Misusing Automotive Fuels:                NEVER USE LEADED FUEL.                     Gasoline containing alcohol, such as
Automotive fuels can cause serious        It is harmful to the catalytic con-        ethanol or methanol, may be marketed
injury or death if misused or mis-        verter. The lead will accumulate on        under the name ‘‘Gasohol’’.
handled. To minimize the risk that        the oxygen sensor and the catalyst
you will be injured please read the       inside the converter.
following information carefully and       This will result in a malfunction of
                                                                                                 CAUTION
observe the recommended precau-           the emission control system, causing        Your vehicle can only use oxygen-
tions.                                    poor performance.                           ated fuels containing no more than
                                                                                      10% ethanol by volume. Damage to
                                        Gasoline blended with oxygenates such         your vehicle may occur when ethanol
           WARNING                      as alcohol or an ether compound are gen-      exceeds this recommendation, or if
                                                                                      the gasoline contains any methanol.
                                        erally referred to as oxygenated fuels.
Overfilling Tank:                       The common gasoline blend that can be         Stop using any kind of gasohol at a
Do not overfill the fuel tank. If you   used with your vehicle is ethanol or grain    sign of driving problems.
do, the pressure may cause leakage
which can lead to spray and fire.


                                                                                                                      4-3
Protecting Your Mazda



                                          J Cleaner Air
                CAUTION                   Mazda approves the use of reformulated
                                                                                                  CAUTION
  Add only fuel system cleaning           “cleaner-burning“ gasolines to improve      U.S. government regulations require
  agents that Mazda has specified, or     air quality. These gasolines may contain    fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to
  the equivalent. Others may damage       oxygenates up to 10% ethanol or 15%         have a small, square, orange and
  the system. Consult an Authorized       MTBE.                                       black label with the common
  Mazda Dealer.                                                                       abbreviation E85 or the appropriate
                                          J FFV engine*                               percentage for that region. Use of
Vehicle damage and driveability prob-     Your vehicle is designed to use Fuel        other fuels such as Fuel Methanol
lems resulting from using the following   Ethanol (E85), “Regular” unleaded gas-      may cause powertrain damage, a
may not be covered by the manufac-        oline or any percentage of the two fuels    loss of vehicle performance, and
turer’s warranty:                         combined.                                   your warranty may be invalidated.
S Gasohol containing more than 10%
   ethanol                                                                           FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85
                                                                                     percent or more of ethanol. Any fuel
S Gasoline or gasohol containing meth-
                                                                                     blends containing gasoline and ethanol
   anol
                                                                                     should be treated the same as fuel etha-
S Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol                                                      nol (E85).
*Some models.

4-4
                                                                                                  Protecting Your Mazda


Your FFV will operate well on ordinary                                                J Running Out of Fuel
“Regular” unleaded gasoline, but only                    CAUTION                      Avoid running out of fuel because this
the highest quality fuel ethanol will pro-
vide the same level of protection and        Flexible fuel components and stan-       situation may have an adverse affect on
performance.                                 dard unleaded gasoline fuel compo-       modern powertrain components.
                                             nents are not interchangeable. If
If you are experiencing a rough or rolling                                            If you have run out of fuel:
                                             your vehicle is not serviced in accor-
idle after start-up with the outside tem-    dance with flexible fuel vehicles        S You may need to crank the engine
perature above 27_C (80_F), the idle         procedures, damage may occur and           several times after refueling before
should improve within 10 to 30 seconds.      your warranty may be invalidated.          the system starts to pump the fuel
If the problems persist below this tem-                                                 from the tank to the engine.
perature, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician.                                                                   S Your Check Engine light may
                                                                                        come on. For more information on
                                                                                        the Check Engine light, refer to
              WARNING                                                                   “Malfunction Indicator Light (page
                                                                                        5-62).”
  Fuel ethanol may contain benzene,
  which is a cancer-causing agent.



                                                                                                                        4-5
Protecting Your Mazda




             WARNING                                 CAUTION                                 CAUTION
 Replacement Fuel Caps:                   When refueling always shut the         The flow of fuel through a fuel pump
 If you lose the fuel cap, replace it     engine off and never allow sparks or   nozzle can produce static electricity,
 with one that is an authorized           open flames near the filler neck.      which can cause a fire if fuel is
 Mazda service part or an equivalent      Never smoke while refueling. Fuel      pumped into an ungrounded fuel
 part. If you do not use the proper       vapor is extremely hazardous under     container.
 fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or   certain conditions. Care should be
 vacuum in the fuel tank may dam-         taken to avoid inhaling excess
 age the fuel system or cause the fuel    fumes.
 system to work improperly in a col-
 lision, which may result in possible
 personal injury.




4-6
                                                                                                   Protecting Your Mazda


                                           Emission Control System
Use the following guidelines to avoid      Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
static build-up when filling an un-        sion control system (the catalytic con-                  WARNING
grounded fuel container:                   verter is part of this system) that enables
                                           your vehicle to comply with the U.S.          Parking Over Things That Burn:
S Place approved fuel container on the     exhaust emissions requirements.               Parking over or near anything in-
  ground.                                                                                flammable, such as dry grass, is dan-
                                           Under U.S. federal law, any modifica-
S DO NOT fill a fuel container while it    tion to the original-equipment emission
                                                                                         gerous. Even with the engine turned
  is in the vehicle.                                                                     off, the exhaust system could ignite
                                           control system before the first sale and      it because the exhaust system gets
S Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact     registration of a vehicle is subject to       very hot in normal use. A resulting
  with the fuel container while filling.   penalties. In some states, such modifi-       fire could cause serious injury
                                           cation made on a used vehicle is also         or death. Don’t park over or near
S DO NOT use a device that would           subject to penalties.
  hold the fuel pump handle in the fill                                                  anything inflammable.
  position.




                                                                                                                           4-7
Protecting Your Mazda

                                                                                    Engine Exhaust
                                         S Don’t operate the engine at high
            CAUTION                        idle for more than 5 minutes.                        WARNING
 Ignoring the following precautions      S Don’t tamper with the emission            Engine exhaust, some of its constit-
 could cause lead to accumulate on         control system. All inspection            uents, and certain vehicle compo-
 the catalyst inside the converter or      and adjustments must be made by           nents contain or emit chemicals
 cause the converter to get very hot.      a qualified technician.                   known to the State of California to
 Either condition will damage the        S Don’t try to push-start or pull-          cause cancer, and birth defects or
 converter and cause poor perfor-          start your vehicle.                       other reproductive harm.
 mance.
 S USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.              Lumination of the charging system
 S Don’t drive your Mazda with any      warning light or CHECK ENGINE light,
    sign of engine malfunction.         fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss
 S Don’t coast with the ignition        of oil pressure could indicate that the
    switch turned off.                  emission control system is not working
                                        properly.
 S Don’t descend steep grades in
    gear with the ignition switch
    turned off.
                         (Continued)


4-8
                                                                                            Protecting Your Mazda

                                                                                Before Driving
                                        S If the engine is run in a closed      J Before Getting In
           WARNING                        area, such as a garage, exhaust       S Be sure the windows, outside mir-
Engine Exhaust:                           gas can easily enter the passen-        ror(s) and outside lights are clean.
                                          ger compartment. Don’t run the
Engine exhaust contains carbon                                                  S Inspect inflation pressures and con-
                                          engine in closed areas.
monoxide, which is dangerous to                                                   dition of tires.
inhale. It can even kill.               S When the vehicle is stopped for
                                          long in an open area with the         S Look under the vehicle for any sign
S Carbon monoxide is colorless and        engine running, adjust the heat-        of a leak.
   odorless. If you smell exhaust         ing or cooling system to draw air     S If you plan to back up, make sure
   fumes of any kind inside your          inside.                                 nothing will be in your way.
   Mazda, immediately consult an
   Authorized Mazda Dealer.             S Snow under a vehicle that is
                                          stopped with the engine running        NOTE
   If you must drive even though          can trap exhaust gas. This gas
   you smell fumes, keep all win-         has fumes containing CO (car-          Engine oil, engine coolant, brake
   dows fully open, no matter how         bon monoxide) that can enter           fluid, clutch fluid, washer fluid, and
   cold the weather is.                   the passenger compartment and          other fluid levels should be inspected
                          (Continued)     kill anyone in it. Be sure to clear    daily, weekly, or at refueling, depend-
                                          away snow from beneath and             ing on the fluid. See Maintenance,
                                          around your vehicle.                   Section 8.


                                                                                                                    4-9
Protecting Your Mazda

                                           Break-In Period
J After Getting In                         No special break-in is necessary, but a      S Avoid full-throttle starts.
                                           few precautions in the first 1,000 miles
S Are all doors closed and locked?         (1,600 km) may add to the performance,       S Don’t tow a trailer during the vehicle’s
                                           economy, and life of your Mazda.               first 500 miles (800 km) (page 4-19).
S Are the inside and outside mirrors
  adjusted?                                S Don’t race the engine.                     S Wheel lug nuts must be retightened
                                                                                          to proper torque specifications at
S Is everyone’s seat belt fastened?        S Avoid unnecessary hard stops.                500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle
S Do all the lights work?                  The break-in period for new brake linings      operation.
                                           lasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driv-
S Check all gauges.                        ing or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway     S Use only the type of engine oil
                                           driving.                                       recommended in this guide.
S Check all warning lights when the
                                                                                           — Do not use special “break-in”
  ignition switch is in the ON position.
                                                                                             oils.
S Release the parking brake and make
  sure the brake warning light goes off.
Always be thoroughly familiar with your
Mazda.




4-10
                                                                                              Protecting Your Mazda

Money-Saving Suggestions
How you operate your Mazda deter-           S Use the air conditioning only when    S Slow down when driving in cross-
mines how far it will travel on a tank of     necessary.                              winds and headwinds.
fuel. Use these suggestions to help save
money on fuel and repairs.                  S Slow down on rough roads.             S (4x4)
                                                                                      Four-wheel drive operation is not
S Avoid long warm-ups. Once the             S Keeps the tires properly inflated.      recommended on dry pavement.
  engine runs smoothly, begin driving.      S Don’t carry unnecessary weight.         Driving in 4WD HIGH or 4WD
                                                                                      LOW will cause:
S Avoid fast starts.                        S Don’t rest your foot on the brake
                                              pedal while driving.                    — Unnecessary noise;
S Keep the engine tuned. Follow the
                                                                                      — Unnecessary tire and component
  maintenance schedule (page 8-4) and       S Keep the wheels in correct align-         wear;
  have an Authorized Mazda Dealer             ment.
  perform inspections and servicing.                                                  — Higher fuel consumption.
                                            S Keep windows closed at high speeds.




                                                                                                                   4-11
Protecting Your Mazda

                                        Special Driving Conditions
                                        J Hazardous Driving                       S Consider using one of the lower
            WARNING                     When driving on ice or in water, snow,
                                                                                    gears.

 Coasting:                              mud, sand, or similar hazards:            S If you get stuck, use 1 (First) or 2
 Turning off the engine to coast                                                    (Second) gear and accelerate slowly.
                                        S Be cautious and allow extra distance      Don’t spin the rear wheels.
 down a hill can be dangerous. This       for braking.
 causes the loss of power steering                                                S For more traction when starting, use
 and power brake control. Any loss      S Avoid sudden braking and quick            sand, rock salt, chains, carpeting, or
 of steering or braking control could     steering.                                 other non-slip material under the rear
 cause an accident. Never turn off                                                  wheels.
                                        S Brake with the pedal by using a light
 the engine and coast down a hill.
                                          up-down motion. Don’t constantly
                                                                                  (4x4)
                                          hold the pedal down.
                                                                                  Besides these instructions, starting in
                                        S To stop on ice, shift to N (Neutral)
                                                                                  4-wheel drive may be best.
                                          when the vehicle is moving below
                                          10 mph (16 km/h) and gently pump
                                          the brakes.




4-12
                                                                                        Protecting Your Mazda


                                                                             t Limited slip differential rear axle*
           WARNING                               WARNING                     This axle provides added drive away
Downshifting on Slippery              Rear Antilock Brake System:            traction on slippery surfaces, particu-
Surfaces:                                                                    larly when one or more wheels is on a
                                      The rear antilock brake system         surface with poor traction.
Downshifting into 1 (First) gear      may not prevent brake lock-up on
with a manual transmission or into    extremely slippery surfaces. Rear
L (Low) with an automatic trans-      brake lock-up may also occur while                  WARNING
mission while driving on slippery     driving in 4-wheel drive because the
surfaces could be dangerous. The      transfer case couples the front and     Limited Slip Differential Rear Axle:
sudden change in tire speed could     rear axles together.                    To avoid injury from vehicles equip-
cause the tires to skid. This could                                           ped with a limited slip differential
lead to loss of vehicle control and                                           rear axle, never run the engine with
an accident. If it is necessary to                                            one wheel off the ground, such as
downshift on slippery surfaces, be                                            when changing a tire. The wheel
very careful.                                                                 still on the ground could cause the
                                                                              vehicle to move.
                                                                                                        *Some models.




                                                                                                             4-13
Protecting Your Mazda


J Rocking the Vehicle                                                           J Wheel Spin
If you must rock the vehicle to free it
                                                     WARNING                    S Extreme acceleration can cause the
from snow, sand, or mud, depress the      Spinning the Wheels:                    rear wheels to spin, possibly result-
accelerator slightly and . . .            When the vehicle is stuck, spinning     ing in reduced steering control.
With an automatic transmission, pull      the wheels at high speed could be     S If the wheels spin, use 2 (Second) to
the shift lever toward you and gently     dangerous. The spinning tire could      gain traction. Move forward slowly
move the selector back and forth from     overheat and explode. This could        and evenly. If this does not work, try
 f (Drive) to R (Reverse) being careful
  D                                       cause serious injuries. Don’t spin      rocking the vehicle.
not to put it into P (Park).              the wheels at more than 35 mph
                                          (56 km/h), and don’t allow anyone     S For 4x4 vehicles, try engaging
With a manual transmission, shift         to stand behind a wheel when push-      4-wheel drive to drive away.
back and forth from 1 (First) to R        ing the vehicle.
(Reverse) using the clutch.
(4x4)
Besides these instructions, starting in
                                                     CAUTION
4x4 may be best.                          Too much rocking may cause engine
                                          overheating, transmission failure,
                                          and tire damage.

4-14
                                                                                                    Protecting Your Mazda


J High Speed Driving                       result of this limiting device. This is      S Use washer fluid made with anti-
                                           a normal condition that can be avoided         freeze—but don’t use engine coolant
                                           by reducing vehicle/engine speed.              antifreeze for washer fluid. (page
             WARNING                                                                      8-36)
                                           J Winter Driving
 High Speed Driving:                                                                    S Don’t use the parking brake if it might
 Mazda recommends obeying posted           S Carry emergency gear, including tire         freeze. Instead, shift to P (Park) with
 speed limits. Driving too fast for          chains, a window scraper, flares, a          an automatic transmission and to 1
 conditions is dangerous and creates         small shovel, jumper cables, and a           (First) or R (Reverse) with a manual
 the possibility of loss of vehicle con-     small bag of sand or salt.                   transmission. Block the rear wheels.
 trol and resulting personal injury.       S Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in
 Driving at very high speeds for                                                        t Snow tires
                                             the radiator. (page 8-23)
 extended periods of time, under                                                        Don’t go faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)
 some circumstances, may result in         S Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold   or the posted speed limit. Inflate snow
 damage to vehicle components.               reduces battery capacity. (page 8-40)      tires 4 psi (27.5 kPa) more than rec-
                                           S Use only cold-weather engine oil.          ommended on the tire pressure label
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine      (page 8-16)                                (driver’s door frame), but never more
speed (RPM) limiting device. If you                                                     than the maximum cold-tire pressure
                                           S Inspect the ignition system for dam-       shown on the tires.
are experiencing an “Engine Cut-Out”         age and loose connections.
condition at high speed, this may be a

                                                                                                                          4-15
Protecting Your Mazda



                                          t Tire chains
             WARNING                      Check local regulations before using                   CAUTION
 Snow Tires:                              chains.                                     S Chains may scratch or chip alu-
 Snow tires used with regular tires       Use only SAE Class “S” chains, and            minum wheels. Install tire chains
 should be the same size and type as      make sure they fit.                           on steel wheels only.
 the regular tires. If radial tires are   Installing the chains                       S Chains may affect handling.
 mixed with non-radials, or if tires                                                  S Don’t go faster than 30 mph
 of different sizes are installed, the    Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruc-      (50 km/h) or the chain manu-
 safety and handling of your vehicle      tions.                                        facturer’s recommended limit,
 may be adversely affected. Make          Secure the chains on the rear tires as        whichever is lower.
 sure snow tires and regular tires are    tightly as possible; retighten them after   S Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
 all the same size and type.              driving 1/4-1/2 mile (1/2-1 kilometer).       holes, and sharp turns.
                                          Don’t use chains on the front tires.        S Avoid locked-wheel braking.
                                                                                      S Don’t use chains on the tempo-
 NOTE                                                                                   rary tire; it may result in damage
                                                                                        to the vehicle and to the tire.
 Check out local regulations before
 using studded tires.                                                                                         (Continued)



4-16
                                                                                                     Protecting Your Mazda



  S Avoid fully loading your light           J Driving Through Water                     Once through the water, always try the
    truck if possible.                                                                   brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
                                                                                         vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Dry-
  S Remove the chains at the first                        CAUTION                        ing can be improved by moving your
    opportunity after using them on                                                      vehicle slowly while applying light pres-
    snow and ice. Don’t use the chains        Make sure water does not enter the         sure on the brake pedal.
    on dry roads.                             vehicle interior or the engine area.       Driving through deep water where the
                                              The vehicle interior could become          transmission is submerged may allow
J Snowplowing                                 wet or the engine could be damaged.        water into the transmission and cause
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.                                                 internal damage.
                                             Do not drive quickly through standing
J Driving on Sand                            water, especially if the depth is           Replace rear axle lubricant any time the
                                             unknown. Traction or brake capability       axle has been submerged in water. The
When driving over sand, try to keep all      may be limited and if the ignition system   rear axle does not normally require a
four wheels of the vehicle on the most       gets wet, your engine may stall. Water      lubricant change for the life of the
solid area of the trail.                     may also enter your engine’s air intake     vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities
Do not reduce the tire pressures but shift   and severely damage your engine.            are not to be checked or changed unless
to a lower gear and drive steadily through   If driving through deep or standing water   a leak is suspected or repair is required.
the terrain.                                 is unavoidable, proceed very slowly.
Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid       Never drive through water that is higher
spinning the wheels.                         than the bottom of the hubs.
                                                                                                                            4-17
Protecting Your Mazda


J Driving on Hills                          When descending a steep hill avoid            J Trailer Towing
                                            sudden braking. Rapid pumping of the
When driving on a hill, avoid driving                                                     Your Mazda was designed and built pri-
                                            brake pedal will help slow the vehicle
crosswise or turning on steep slopes.                                                     marily to carry passengers and cargo.
                                            and still maintain steering control.
You could lose traction and slip side-
ways. Drive straight up, straight down or   If cruise control cancels after climbing      If you must tow a trailer, read the follow-
avoid the hill completely.                  the hill, reset speed by pressing and hold-   ing instructions and any trailer manufac-
                                            ing the SET ACCEL button to resume            turer instructions because driver and
Know the conditions on the other side of                                                  passenger safety depends on proper
a hill before driving over the crest.       speeds over 50 km/h (30 mph).
                                                                                          equipment and safe driving habits. Tow-
When climbing a steep hill, start in a      Automatic transmissions may shift fre-        ing a trailer will affect handling, braking,
lower gear, rather than downshifting to a   quently while driving up steep grades.        durability, performance, and economy.
lower gear after the ascent has started.    Eliminate frequent shifting by shifting
This reduces strain on the engine and the   out of f (Overdrive) into D (Drive).
                                                    D                                     Never overload vehicle or trailer. Con-
                                                                                          sult an Authorized Mazda Dealer if you
possibility of stalling.                                                                  need further details.




4-18
                                                                                                   Protecting Your Mazda


t No Trailer Towing During Vehicle      t Tires
  Break-in                              When towing a trailer, make sure all tires                  WARNING
                                        are inflated to the recommended cold-            Using a Temporary Spare When
            CAUTION                     tire pressure, as indicated on the tire pres-    Towing:
                                        sure chart on the driver’s door frame.
                                                                                         Using a temporary spare tire on
 Don’t tow a trailer during the first    Trailer tire size, load rating, and inflation   your vehicle when towing a trailer
 500 miles (800 km) of driving your     pressures should conform to tire manu-           could result in tire failure, loss of
 new Mazda. If you do, you may          facturer specifications.                         control, and injury to vehicle occu-
 damage the engine, transmission,                                                        pants. Never use a temporary spare
 differential, wheel bearings, and                                                       when towing.
 other powertrain components.




                                                                                                                         4-19
Protecting Your Mazda


t Safety chains                             t Fuel consumption                          Mazda recommends that you DO NOT
Safety chains must be used as a precau-                                                 make modifications such as adding or
                                            Trailer towing causes higher fuel con-      removing parts (like lowering or lifting
tionary measure in case the trailer         sumption.
becomes unintentionally unhitched.                                                      kits, stabilizer bars or snowplowing
They should cross under the trailer         t Suspension Modifications                  equipment) or by using replacement parts
tongue and attach to the vehicle frame or                                               non-equivalent to the original factory
                                            The suspension and steering systems on      equipment.
hook retainers. Leave enough slack to       your vehicle have been designed and
allow full turns. Consult literature pub-   tested to provide predictable perfor-
lished by your trailer or hitch manufac-    mance (whether loaded or empty) as
turer for more details.                     well as durable load carrying capability.
                                            Any modifications to the suspension
             CAUTION                        or steering systems can reduce your
 Never attach chains to the bumper.         vehicle’s performance capability and
                                            adversely affect driver and passenger
                                            safety.




4-20
                                                                                                Protecting Your Mazda


t Exhaust System Modifications                                                      Overheated Engine
                                                                                    Your vehicle’s engine coolant protects
            WARNING                                                                 the engine from overheating in the sum-
                                                                                    mer and from freezing in the winter.
 Exhaust System Modifications:                                                      Check the level of the engine coolant at
 Modifying your vehicle exhaust                                                     least once a month. Look at the engine
 system is dangerous. Exhaust gas                                                   coolant recovery reservoir located in the
 entering the vehicle could kill you.                                               engine compartment. If the coolant level
 When mounting the trailer hitch,                                                   is low, add a 50/50 mixture to the engine
 make no modifications to the vehi-                                                 coolant recovery reservoir. Only add a
 cle exhaust system. Regularly                                                      mixture specified by Mazda.
 check the exhaust system for any       Temperature Gauge                           For further information, refer to ‘‘Over-
 leaks. Leaks under or near the cab
                                        Constantly monitor the coolant tem-         heating’’ on page 6-3.
 or under a camper-covered bed are
 dangerous. Pay close attention to      perature gauge. The extra weight of the
 possible leaks around the mounting     trailer may strain the engine on hot days
 bolts.                                 and on long or steep upgrades.




                                                                                                                      4-21
Protecting Your Mazda


t Maintenance                                Use a weight carrying hitch and ball for
If you tow a trailer frequently, have your   towing trailers up to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg).                CAUTION
vehicle serviced as shown in Scheduled       Use a frame-mounted weight distributing
                                             hitch for trailers over 2,000 lbs. (907 kg).   S Examine all trailer hitch mount-
Maintenance (Schedule II/Special Operat-                                                      ing bolts regularly and tighten
ing Conditions, page 8-8).                   When not towing a trailer, remove the            any that are loose. If the hitch
t Trailer hitch                              trailer hitch (if detachable).                   is removed, seal any open mount-
                                             The optional step bumper has a built-in          ing holes to prevent exhaust,
Use only a hitch ball recommended by                                                          dust, water, dirt, and other for-
the trailer manufacturer that conforms to    hitch and only requires a ball with a 3/4
                                             inch shank diameter. The step bumper             eign elements from filtering in
the gross trailer weight requirement.                                                         and possibly endangering per-
Make sure the hitch is securely attached     has a Class I capability (2,000 lb/907 kg
                                             trailer weight and 200 lb/91 kg tongue           sonal safety and damaging your
to prevent the danger of trailer sway                                                         vehicle.
from crosswinds, rough roads, or other       weight).
                                                                                            S Don’t install a trailer hitch that
causes.                                                                                       will nullify the function of the
                                                                                              bumper. If it is necessary to
                                                                                              relocate the trailer hitch ball,
                                                                                              a frame-mounted trailer hitch
                                                                                              must be installed.


4-22
                                                                                                    Protecting Your Mazda


t Trailer brakes                                                                       t Trailer lights
The braking system of the tow vehicle is                  WARNING                      Trailer lights must meet all federal, state,
rated for operation at the gross vehicle      Hydraulic Trailer-Brake System:          and local regulations.
weight rating (GVWR), not the gross
combined weight rating (GCWR). For            Connecting a hydraulic trailer-brake
                                              system directly to the vehicle brake
further information, refer to ‘‘Trailer
                                              system will result in inadequate                       CAUTION
Towing Loading’’ on page 4-24.
                                              braking and possible injury. Don’t         Don’t connect a trailer lighting sys-
If the total trailer weight exceeds           connect a hydraulic trailer-brake
                                                                                         tem directly into the lighting system
1,500 lbs. (680 kg), trailer brakes are       system to your vehicle’s brake system.
                                                                                         of your Mazda. This may damage
required.
                                                                                         your vehicle’s electrical system and
If your trailer has brakes, check that they                                              lighting systems. Have a recreational
work and make sure they meet all fed-                                                    vehicle dealer or trailer rental agency
eral, state, and local regulations.                                                      connect the system, and inspect the
                                                                                         brake lights and turn signals before
                                                                                         driving each time this is done.




                                                                                                                           4-23
Protecting Your Mazda

Trailer Towing Loading
                                                                                        hitch, truck passengers, and vehicle
             WARNING                                                                    load. Never allow the total trailer
                                                                                        weight to exceed specifications in the
 Loaded vehicles, with a higher cen-                                                    Trailer Towing Load Table.
 ter of gravity, may handle differ-                                                   S The maximum GCWR is the com-
 ently than unloaded vehicles. Extra
 precautions, such as slower speeds                                                     bined weight of the trailer and load
 and increased stopping distance,                                                       plus the towing vehicle (including
 should be taken when driving a                                                         trailer hitch, truck passengers, and
 heavily loaded vehicle.                                                                load). It must not exceed specifica-
                                                                                        tions in the load table.
Your vehicle has the capability to haul                                               GAWR and GVWR
more cargo and people than most pas-
senger cars. Depending upon the type       TTW and GCWR                               Don’t exceed front and rear GAWR
and placement of the load, hauling                                                    (gross axle weight rating) and GVWR
                                           The total trailer weight (TTW), gross
people and cargo may raise the center of                                              (gross vehicle weight rating). If you do,
                                           combined weight rating (GCWR), gross
gravity of the vehicle.                                                               vehicle handling, braking, and perfor-
                                           axle weight rating (GAWR), trailer load,
                                                                                      mance will be affected.
                                           and trailer tongue load must be within
                                           the prescribed limits.                     These values are listed on your Mazda’s
                                           S The total trailer weight is the sum      Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
                                              of the weights of the trailer load      certification label posted on the driver’s
                                              (trailer weight plus cargo), trailer    door pillar.

4-24
                                                                                                   Protecting Your Mazda


Maximum permissible trailer load            t Tongue load
The maximum permissible trailer load is     Trailer tongue load is part of the passen-
                                                                                                     WARNING
determined by subtracting the towing        ger and cargo load.                          Trailer Loading:
vehicle weight (including trailer hitch,
vehicle passengers, and load) from the      t Weight limits                              Loading the trailer with more
maximum GCWR in the load table.                                                          weight in the rear than in the front
                                                                                         is dangerous. Doing so could cause
High-altitude operation                       NOTE                                       you to lose control. The trailer
In a high-altitude operating environ-         The total trailer weight and tongue        tongue load must be 10%-15% of
ment, a gasoline engine loses power at a      load can be determined by weighing         the trailer load (sum of the weights
rate of 3% to 4% per 1,000 ft; (304 m) of     the trailer on platform scales at a        of the trailer and cargo). Try to load
elevation. In these conditions, a reduc-      highway weigh station or a trucking        the trailer with the weight about
tion in gross vehicle weight and gross        company. Avoiding overloading will         60% toward the front and 40%
combined weight is recommended.               help to prevent the danger of trailer      toward the rear.
                                              sway from crosswinds, rough roads,
 NOTE                                         or other causes.

 For high-altitude operation, reduce
 GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft (304 m) of
 elevation.

                                                                                                                          4-25
Protecting Your Mazda



                                      J Overloading                                  The Certification Label, found on the
           WARNING                    If you don’t overload your vehicle,
                                                                                     inside pillar of the driver’s door, lists
                                                                                     several important vehicle weight rating
 Tow Loads:                           you’ll get better service from it. It’s been   limitations. Before adding any addi-
 Attempting to tow loads greater      designed for loads not to exceed the           tional equipment, refer to these limita-
 than those specified may cause       Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)             tions. If you are adding weight to the
 serious handling and performance     or the maximum Front and Rear Axle             front of your vehicle, (potentially
 problems that could result in per-   Weight Ratings (GAWRs) specified               including weight added to the cab), the
 sonal injury or vehicle damage, or   on the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety            weight added should not exceed the
 both. Always keep tow loads within   Standard label on the left door frame.         Front Axle Reserve Capacity (FARC).
 specified limits.                    Always distribute cargo evenly over the        Additional frontal weight may be added
                                      floor of the cargo area. If you have a         to the front axle reserve capacity pro-
                                      heavy load that’s concentrated, center it      vided you limit your payload in other
                                      in the cargo area.                             ways (i.e. restrict the number of passen-
                                                                                     gers or amount of cargo carried).
                                      Once you reach the weight capacity,
                                      don’t load more, even if you have the
                                      room for it.




4-26
                                                                                                  Protecting Your Mazda


You may add equipment throughout             and Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating lim-
your vehicle if the total weight added is    its. Under no circumstance should these               WARNING
equal to or less than the Total Axle         limitations be exceeded. Exceeding any
Reserve Capacity (TARC) weight. You          vehicle weight rating limitation could    Vehicle Load Weight:
should NEVER exceed the Total Axle           result in serious damage to the vehicle   The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
Reserve Capacity.                            and/or personal injury.                   and the gross vehicle weight rating
                                                                                       (GVWR) of your vehicle are on the
Always ensure that the weight of passen-                                               Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
gers, cargo and equipment being carried                                                dard Label on the driver’s door frame.
is within the weight limitations that have                                             Exceeding these ratings can cause
been established for your vehicle includ-                                              an accident or vehicle damage. You
ing both Gross Vehicle Weight and Front                                                can estimate the weight of your load
                                                                                       by weighing the items (or people)
                                                                                       before putting them in the vehicle. Be
                                                                                       careful not to overload your vehicle.




                                                                                                                        4-27
Protecting Your Mazda

Trailer Towing Load Tables
4x2 Manual Transmission                               4x2 Manual Transmission
Regular Cab                                           Cab Plus

   Model     Rear Axle    Maximum      Maximum           Model      Rear Axle   Maximum      Maximum
               Ratio       GCWR         Trailer                       Ratio      GCWR         Trailer
                                        Weight                                                Weight
                                       (0-Max.)                                              (0-Max.)
2.5L       3.73           4,800 lbs.   0-1,580 lbs.   2.5L         3.73         4,800 lbs.   0-1,380 lbs.
                          (2,177 kg)    (0-717 kg)                              (2,177 kg)    (0-626 kg)
2.5L       4.10           4,800 lbs.   0-1,580 lbs.   2.5L         4.10         4,800 lbs.   0-1,380 lbs.
                          (2,177 kg)    (0-717 kg)                              (2,177 kg)    (0-626 kg)
3.0L       3.73           6,000 lbs.   0-2,660 lbs.   3.0L         3.73         6,000 lbs.   0-2,460 lbs.
                          (2,721 kg)   (0-1,207 kg)                             (2,721 kg)   (0-1,116 kg)
4.0L       3.55           7,000 lbs.   0-3,620 lbs.   3.0L         4.10         6,000 lbs.   0-2,400 lbs.
                          (3,175 kg)   (0-1,642 kg)   (Troy Lee)                (2,721 kg)   (0-1,089 kg)
                                                      4.0L         3.55         7,000 lbs.   0-3,420 lbs.
                                                                                (3,175 kg)   (0-1,551 kg)




4-28
                                                                                    Protecting Your Mazda


4x4 Manual Transmission                               4x4 Manual Transmission
Regular Cab                                           Cab Plus

   Model     Rear Axle    Maximum      Maximum           Model     Rear Axle    Maximum       Maximum
               Ratio       GCWR         Trailer                      Ratio       GCWR          Trailer
                                        Weight                                                 Weight
                                       (0-Max.)                                               (0-Max.)
3.0L       3.73           6,000 lbs.   0-2,400 lbs.   3.0L       3.73           6,000 lbs.    0-2,200 lbs.
                          (2,721 kg)   (0-1,089 kg)                             (2,721 kg)     (0-998 kg)
3.0L       4.10           6,000 lbs.   0-2,400 lbs.   3.0L       4.10           6,000 lbs.    0-2,200 lbs.
                          (2,721 kg)   (0-1,089 kg)                             (2,721 kg)     (0-998 kg)
4.0L       3.73           7,000 lbs.   0-3,320 lbs.   4.0L       3.73           7,000 lbs.    0-3,120 lbs.
                          (3,175 kg)   (0-1,506 kg)                             (3,175 kg)    (0-1,415 kg)
4.0L       4.10           7,000 lbs.   0-3,320 lbs.   4.0L       4.10           7,000 lbs.    0-3,120 lbs.
                          (3,175 kg)   (0-1,506 kg)                             (3,175 kg)    (0-1,415 kg)




                                                                                                       4-29
Protecting Your Mazda


4x2 Automatic Transmission                               4x2 Automatic Transmission
Regular Cab                                              Cab Plus

   Model     Rear Axle       Maximum      Maximum           Model      Rear Axle      Maximum      Maximum
               Ratio          GCWR         Trailer                       Ratio         GCWR         Trailer
                                           Weight                                                   Weight
                                          (0-Max.)                                                 (0-Max.)
2.5L        4.10             5,500 lbs.   0-2,180 lbs.   2.5L         4.10            5,500 lbs.
                                                                                                       —
                             (2,494 kg)    (0-989 kg)                                 (2,494 kg)
3.0L        3.73             7,500 lbs.   0-4,120 lbs.   3.0L         3.73            7,500 lbs.   0-3,920 lbs.
                             (3,401 kg)   (0-1,869 kg)                                (3,401 kg)   (0-1,778 kg)
4.0L        3.55             9,500 lbs.   0-6,080 lbs.   3.0L         4.10            7,500 lbs.   0-3,860 lbs.
                             (4,309 kg)   (0-2,758 kg)   (Troy Lee)                   (3,401 kg)   (0-1,751 kg)
                                                         4.0L         3.55            9,500 lbs.   0-5,880 lbs.
                                                                                      (4,309 kg)   (0-2,667 kg)




4-30
                                                                                          Protecting Your Mazda


4x4 Automatic Transmission                               4x4 Automatic Transmission
Regular Cab                                              Cab Plus

   Model     Rear Axle       Maximum      Maximum           Model     Rear Axle       Maximum       Maximum
               Ratio          GCWR         Trailer                      Ratio          GCWR          Trailer
                                           Weight                                                    Weight
                                          (0-Max.)                                                  (0-Max.)
3.0L        3.73             7,500 lbs.   0-3,860 lbs.   3.0L        3.73             7,500 lbs.    0-3,680 lbs.
                             (3,401 kg)   (0-1,751 kg)                                (3,401 kg)    (0-1,669 kg)
3.0L        4.10             8,000 lbs.   0-4,360 lbs.   3.0L        4.10             8,000 lbs.    0-4,180 lbs.
                             (3,628 kg)   (0-1,978 kg)                                (3,628 kg)    (0-1,896 kg)
4.0L        3.73             9,500 lbs.   0-5,780 lbs.   4.0L        3.73             9,500 lbs.    0-5,580 lbs.
                             (4,309 kg)   (0-2,622 kg)                                (4,309 kg)    (0-2,531 kg)
4.0L        4.10             9,500 lbs.   0-5,780 lbs.   4.0L        4.10             9,500 lbs.    0-5,580 lbs.
                             (4,309 kg)   (0-2,622 kg)                                (4,309 kg)    (0-2,531 kg)




                                                                                                             4-31
Protecting Your Mazda


t Trailer-towing tips                          S Make sure the trailer cargo is secure      Servicing
The three main causes of vehicle-trailer         to prevent it from shifting.
                                                                                            If you tow a trailer for a long distance,
accidents are driver error, excessive speed,   S Make sure the mirrors meet all gov-        your vehicle will need to be serviced
and improper trailer loading.                    ernment regulations. Inspect them          more frequently.
Before driving                                   regularly.

S Verify that your Mazda maintain a            S Before starting out, inspect the
  near-normal attitude when a loaded or          operation of all vehicle and trailer
  unloaded trailer is connected. Don’t           lights and all vehicle-to-trailer lights
  drive if it has an abnormal front-up           and all vehicle-to-trailer connections.
  or front-down position. Inspect for            Stop and reinspect all lights and con-
  incorrect tongue load, worn suspen-            nections after driving a short distance
  sion parts, and trailer overloading.           (about 50 miles [80 km]).
  Have the vehicle inspected by an
  Authorized Mazda Dealer.




4-32
                                                                                                   Protecting Your Mazda


Driving                                   S Avoid sudden braking. It may cause         4x2 models:
                                            loss of control and result in jack-        S Selector in “D” (Drive)
S Your Mazda will handle differently
                                            knifing, especially on wet or slippery
  with a trailer in tow, so practice
                                            roads.                                     4x4 models:
  turning, backing, and stopping in a
  traffic-free area.                      S Avoid abrupt starts and fast accelera-     S Selector in “D” position
                                            tion. Start in 1 (First) gear and gradu-
S Take time to get accustomed to the                                                   S 4x4 indicator light off
                                            ally release the clutch pedal (manual
  extra weight and length.
                                            transmission) at low engine speed to       These positions will allow operating the
S Never drive faster than 45 mph            prevent clutch slippage.                   vehicle without frequent down-and-up-
  (72 km/h) when you tow in hilly                                                      shifting.
                                          S With an automatic transmission, use
  country on hot days.
                                            the following positions when towing        S With a 5-speed overdrive manual
S Allow more room between your              a trailer in hilly terrain or when           transmission don’t use overdrive gear
  vehicle and the one in front because      heavily loaded.                              for trailer towing. Shift as though you
  braking distance increases with a                                                      were driving a vehicle with a 4-speed
  trailer. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of                                                  transmission.
  speed, allow at least one vehicle and
  trailer length behind the vehicle
  ahead.



                                                                                                                         4-33
Protecting Your Mazda


                                            Passing
                                            S Plan well ahead to pass other vehi-
                                              cles, and provide plenty of room
                                              when changing lanes.
                                            S Crosswinds from passing vehicles,
                                              especially larger ones, and the effects
                                              of rough roads will affect handling.
                                            If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steer-
                                            ing wheel and reduce speed immedi-
                                            ately, but gradually.
Lane changes and turning                                                                Backing up
                                            Steer straight ahead. If no extreme cor-
S Avoid quick lane changes, sudden          rection of steering or braking is made,     S Backing a vehicle with a trailer
  turns, and tight turns. Avoid sudden      the combination of less speed and firm        requires practice and patience. Back
  braking.                                  steering will result in stability.            slowly, and have a helper outside at
S A turning trailer will make a tighter                                                   the rear of the trailer.
  arc than the tow vehicle. Compensate
  with turns that are larger than normal.


4-34
                                                                                                     Protecting Your Mazda


S To turn the trailer, place your hand at   Parking                                      S With the chocks in place, release the
  the bottom of the steering wheel and      S Always make sure the tires of the            brake pedal, making sure the chocks
  turn it in the direction you want the       trailer and the tow vehicle are blocked      are holding.
  trailer to go. Make only slight move-
  ments to prevent sharp turns of the
                                              while parked.                              S For automatic transmissions—apply
  trailer.                                  S Apply the parking brake and put the          the parking brake by pressing the
                                              transmission in 1 (First) or R (Reverse)     brake pedal down firmly with your
Ascending a hill                              (manual) or in P (Park) (automatic).         right foot while applying the parking
S Shift into a lower gear to reduce the                                                    brake pedal with your left foot.
                                            Parking on an incline
  possibility of overloading or over-                                                    S For manual transmission—apply the
  heating the engine, or both.              S Avoid parking on an incline, but if          service brake and shift into N (Neu-
Descending a hill                             you must, follow these instructions.         tral) while still maintaining pressure
                                                                                           on the brake pedal. Set the parking
S Shift into a lower gear and use engine    S Apply the brake pedal and hold it.           brake fully.
  compression as a braking effect. Pay      S Have another person place wheel
  constant attention to speed and use                                                    S Shift an automatic transmission into
                                              chocks under the trailer wheels.             P (Park). Put the gearshift of a manual
  the brakes only as needed. Holding
  the brake pedal down for a prolonged                                                     transmission in R (Reverse).
  period may cause the brakes to over-
  heat and lose power.

                                                                                                                           4-35
Protecting Your Mazda

                                                                                     Vehicle Information Labels
To restart after parking on an incline:   3. Shift into gear.                        Vehicle Identification Number
1. Apply the brake pedal and hold it.     4. Release the parking brake (also the
2. With the transmission in P (Park)         foot brake on vehicles with automatic
   (automatic) or with the clutch de-        transmissions) and move the vehicle
   pressed (manual), start the engine.       uphill to free the wheel chocks. Stop
   (With an automatic transmission, be       and apply the foot brake.
   sure to depress and hold the brake     5. Have a helper retrieve the chocks.
   pedal.)



                                                                                     The vehicle identification number
                                                                                     legally identifies your vehicle. It’s on a
                                                                                     plate attached to the left top side of the
                                                                                     dashboard. This plate can easily be seen
                                                                                     through the windshield.




4-36
                                                                   Protecting Your Mazda


Federal Motor Vehicle                   Vehicle Emission Control
Safety Standard                         Information Label*




  NOTE
  Tire inflation pressure information
  is included on the Federal Motor
  Vehicle Safety Standard Label.

*Includes Vacuum Hose Routing
 Diagram for California.


                                                                                   4-37
Memo




4-38
    Driving Your Mazda
5   Operating your vehicle requires a good understanding of the many controls you must know and use.
    Section 5 describes all this in step-by-step information from use of the ignition switch to cruise control
    and braking.
    Also highlighted are the gearshift and shifting modes, use of 4-wheel drive, power steering, instruments
    and gauges, warnings and indicators, windshield wipers, and interior features. You’ll find complete
    details about the advanced audio system too.
                    Ignition Switch Positions     5- 2             Windshield Wipers and Washer          5-68
             Preparing to Drive Your Vehicle      5- 6                                   Lighter         5-70
                          Starting the Engine     5- 7                              Power Point          5-70
              Using the Engine Block Heater       5-12                                  Ashtray          5-71
             The Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch        5-13                                Glove Box          5-71
             Manual Transmission Operation        5-14                           Center Console          5-72
                     Automatic Transmission       5-18                               Cupholders          5-72
                   4-Wheel Drive System –                                              Sunvisors         5-74
                     Electronic Shift Control     5-24                            Vanity Mirror          5-74
                                Brake System      5-36                  Climate Control Systems          5-75
                               Power Steering     5-46                          Radio Reception          5-86
                               Cruise Control     5-47                           AM/FM Radio             5-90
                          Instrument Clusters     5-52          AM/FM Radio with Cassette Player         5-91
                                      Gauges      5-54              AM/FM Radio with Compact
                     Dashboard Illumination       5-58                               Disc Player         5-92
                       Warning Lights/Beeps       5-59           AM/FM Radio with Cassette and
                             Lighting Control     5-65                      Compact Disc Player          5-93
                                                                                                                 5-1
Driving Your Mazda

Ignition Switch Positions
                                         The key returns to the ON position once      J LOCK
                                         the engine is started and remains in this
                                         position while the engine runs.              The steering wheel locks to protect
                                                                                      against theft. Only in this position can
                                         J START                                      the key be removed. If your key is stuck
                                                                                      in the LOCK position, move your steer-
                                         The engine is started in this position. It   ing wheel left or right.
                                         will crank until you release the key; then
                                         it returns to ON. The brake warning light    J OFF
                                         can be checked in the START position.
                                                                                      In the OFF position you can shut off the
                                         J ACC (Accessory)                            engine and all accessories without lock-
                                                                                      ing the steering wheel, or the automatic
J ON                                     The steering wheel unlocks and some          transmission selector lever.
                                         electrical accessories will operate.
The warning lights (except the brake
warning light) can be inspected before
the engine is started.




5-2
                                                                                                  Driving Your Mazda



                                                                                    NOTE
                                                                                    If turning the key is difficult, jiggle
                                                                                    the steering wheel from side to side.


                                                                                                WARNING
                                                                                    Removing the Key:
                                                                                    It’s dangerous to remove the key
                                                                                    from the ignition switch while the
t Manual transmission                     t Automatic transmission                  vehicle is moving. Removing the
                                                                                    key allows the steering wheel to
When turning the ignition switch to the   When turning the ignition switch to the   lock. You will lose steering control
LOCK position, push the key in at ACC.    LOCK position, keep the selector lever    and a serious accident could occur.
In order to turn the key from ON or OFF   at P (Park).                              Remove the key only when the
to the ACCESSORY position, you must                                                 vehicle is parked.
push the key release button since your
vehicle’s manual transmission selector
lever is mounted on the floor.

                                                                                                                       5-3
Driving Your Mazda


                                                                                    J Key Removal
             WARNING                                  WARNING                       Procedures for removing your key from
 Parking Brake:                           Locking the Gearshift Selector Lever:     the ignition will vary, depending on the
 The anti-theft steering column lock      LOCK does not lock the gearshift          type of ignition your vehicle has. Gear-
 is not a substitute for the parking      selector lever on the steering column     shift selector levers may be mounted
 brake. Before leaving the driver’s       or floor-mounted gearshifts. If the       on the steering column or on the floor
 seat, always make sure the gearshift     parking brake is not set and the          console.
 selector lever is at P (Park) with an    gearshift is moved out of P (Park)        If the vehicle’s gearshift selector lever
 automatic transmission or in 1 (First)   (automatic transmission) or out of        is mounted on the column:
 with a manual transmission; set the      gear (manual transmission), your          1. Put the gearshift selector lever in
 parking brake fully AND stop the         vehicle may move unexpectedly and             P (Park).
 engine. Unexpected and possibly          injure someone.
 sudden vehicle movement may occur                                                  2. Set the parking brake fully before
 if these precautions aren’t taken.                                                     removing your foot from the service
                                                                                        brake. (This will avoid ‘‘binding’’ or
                                          NOTE
                                                                                        ‘‘loading’’ the park gear if you park
                                          If a door is open and the key is in the       on a grade.)
                                          ignition switch when the engine is        3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
                                          off, a warning sounds.
                                                                                    4. Remove the key.

5-4
                                                                                                     Driving Your Mazda


If the vehicle’s gearshift selector lever                                                brake fully AND shut off the
is mounted on the floor:                                WARNING                          engine. Unexpected and possibly
1. Put the gearshift selector lever in       Safety Procedures:                          sudden vehicle movement may
   1 (First).                                                                            occur if these precautions are not
                                             S Removing the key from the igni-           taken.
2. Set the parking brake fully by press-        tion switch locks the steering.
                                                If removed while driving, loss         S Never reach for the ignition switch
   ing down with your left foot before                                                   through the steering wheel; it
   removing your right foot from the            of steering control will occur
                                                which could result in an acci-           could suddenly turn, causing
   service brake.                                                                        serious injury.
                                                dent. Remove the key only when
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.                parked.
4. Push in the key release button until it   S The anti-theft steering column        J Testing the Warning Lights
   catches and stays in.                        lock is not a substitute for the     Before you start your vehicle, you should
                                                parking brake. Before leaving the    test the warning lights on the dashboard
5. Turn the key to LOCK.                        driver’s seat, always make sure      to make sure that they work. Turn the key
6. Remove the key.                              the gearshift selector lever is in   to the ON position. All the warning lights
                                                P (Park) with an automatic trans-    except the brake warning light should
                                                mission or 1 (First) with a man-     light up. If any of them do not, have the
                                                ual transmission; set the parking    bulb and circuit checked.
                                                                     (Continued)

                                                                                                                         5-5
Driving Your Mazda

                                             Preparing to Drive
If your brake warning light does light up    Your Vehicle                             at speeds as high as passenger
with the key in the ON position, you may                                              cars any more than low-slung
not have fully released the parking brake                                             sports cars are designed to per-
or the brake fluid may be low.                           WARNING                      form satisfactorily under off-
The key must be in the START position,                                                road conditions. Avoid sharp
                                              S Utility vehicles have a signifi-
which cranks the engine, to test the brake                                            turns, excessive speed and
                                                cantly higher rollover rate than
warning light. If the brake warning light                                             abrupt maneuvers in these
                                                other types of vehicles.
does not light up, have the bulb and cir-                                             vehicles. Failure to drive cau-
                                              S In a rollover crash, an unbelted      tiously could result in an
cuit checked.
                                                person is significantly more          increased risk of vehicle roll-
After starting the engine, check all the        likely to die than a person wear-     over, personal injury and death.
warning lights to make sure that they are       ing a seat belt.
                                                                                    S Loaded vehicles, with a higher
off. When you release the parking brake,      S Vehicles with a higher center of      center of gravity, may handle
the brake warning light should go off.          gravity such as utility and four-     differently than unloaded ve-
                                                wheel drive vehicles handle dif-      hicles. Extra precautions, such
                                                ferently than vehicles with a         as slower speeds and increased
                                                lower center of gravity. Utility      stopping distance, should be
                                                and four-wheel drive vehicles         taken when driving a heavily
                                                are not designed for cornering        loaded vehicle.
                                                                      (Continued)

5-6
                                                                                                       Driving Your Mazda

                                                                                        Starting the Engine
Your vehicle has special design and         Your vehicle has the capability to haul     When starting a fuel-injected engine,
equipment features to make it capable of    more cargo and people than most pas-        avoid pressing the accelerator before or
performing in a wide variety of circum-     senger cars. Depending upon the type        during starting. Only use the accelerator
stances. These special design features,     and placement of the load, hauling          when you have difficulty starting the
such as larger tires and increased ground   people and cargo may raise the center of    engine.
clearance, give the vehicle a higher cen-   gravity of the vehicle.
ter of gravity than a passenger car.                                                    A computer system controls the engine’s
                                            Use extra caution while becoming famil-     idle revolutions per minute (RPM).
                                            iar with your vehicle. Know the capabili-   When the engine starts, the idle RPM
                                            ties and limitations of both you as a       runs faster to warm the engine. If the
                                            driver and your vehicle.                    engine idle speed does not slow down
                                                                                        automatically, have the vehicle checked.
                                                                                        Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more
                                                                                        than ten minutes at high engine RPM.




                                                                                                                            5-7
Driving Your Mazda



                                         J Preparing Your Vehicle                       If there is difficulty in turning the key,
             WARNING                     1. Occupants should fasten their seat
                                                                                        firmly rotate the steering wheel left and
                                                                                        right until the key turns freely. This
 Exhaust Fumes:                             belts.                                      condition may occur when:
 Do not start your vehicle in a closed   2. Make sure your headlights and other
 garage or any other enclosed area.         accessories are turned off when start-      S front wheels are turned
 Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always         ing.                                        S front wheel is against the curb
 open the garage door before you         3. Make sure the parking brake is on.
 start the engine.                                                                      S steering wheel is turned when getting
                                         4. Manual Transmission—Push the                  in or out of the vehicle.
                                            clutch pedal to the floor.
                                            Keep the pedal to the floor while
                                            starting the engine.
                                            Automatic Transmission—Place
                                            the gearshift selector lever in P (Park).
                                         5. Turn the key to ON without turning
                                            the key to START.




5-8
                                                                                                      Driving Your Mazda



J Starting Your Vehicle                      2. Release the key as soon as the engine
                                                starts. Excessive cranking could dam-    NOTE
1. Turn the ignition switch to START
   without pressing the accelerator pedal.      age the starter or flood the engine.     Whether cold or warm, the engine
                                                After starting the engine, let it idle   should be started without use of the
  NOTE                                          for a few seconds.                       accelerator except when noted in this
                                                Keep your foot on the pedal and put      section.
  The starter will not operate . . .            the gearshift lever in gear. Release
  S If the gearshift selector lever is          the parking brake. Slowly release the
    not in P (Park) or N (Neutral)              brake pedal and drive away in the
    (automatic), or                             normal manner.
  S If the clutch pedal is not pushed
    down all the way (manual).




                                                                                                                           5-9
Driving Your Mazda


t If the engine doesn’t start                3. When the engine starts, release the
   S If the temperature is above 10_F           key, then release the accelerator                  WARNING
     (–12_C) and the engine does not            pedal gradually as the engine speeds
                                                up.                                     Engine Idling Speed:
     start within five seconds on the
     first try, turn the key to OFF, wait                                               If the engine idling speed does not
                                             4. After idling for a few seconds, apply   slow down automatically, do not
     ten seconds and try again.                 the brake and release the parking       allow your vehicle to idle for more
   S If the temperature is below 10_F           brake.                                  than ten minutes. Have the vehicle
     (–12_C) and the engine does not         5. If the engine still does not start,     checked. Extended idling at high
     start in fifteen seconds on the first      the fuel pump shut-off switch may       engine speeds can produce very high
     try, turn the key OFF and wait ten         have been triggered and needs to be     temperatures in the engine and
     seconds and try again. If the              reset.                                  exhaust system, creating the risk of
     engine does not start in two                                                       fire or other damage to the vehicle
     attempts, press the accelerator                                                    and possibly resulting in personal
     pedal 1/3 to 1/2 of the way to the                                                 injury.
     floor and hold. Turn the key to
     START.




5-10
                                                                                                         Driving Your Mazda


                                             rience increased cranking times, rough       Cold starting performance can also be
  NOTE                                       idle or hesitation until the engine has      improved with the use of an engine block
  Engine noise (from valve tappets)          warmed up. Consult your fuel distributor     heater. The engine block heater is avail-
  may occur if the engine has not been       for the availability of winter grade         able as a Mazda option and can also be
  operated for an extended period.           (Ed 85) ethanol.                             obtained from your Mazda dealer. Con-
                                                                                          sult the engine block heater section for
  The noise should stop after the            High-quality blends of winter grade          proper use of the engine block heater.
  engine has reached normal operating        (Ed 85) ethanol will produce satisfactory
  temperature. If the noise does not         cold weather starting and driving results.   If you should experience cold weather
  stop, have the vehicle inspected by        However, fuel composition varies, and        starting problems on (Ed 85) ethanol,
  an Authorized Mazda Dealer.                sub-optimal winter grade blends could        and neither an alternative brand of
                                             produce increased cranking times, rough      (Ed 85) ethanol nor an engine block
Cold weather starting (Flexible Fuel         idle or hesitation at temperatures below     heater is available, the addition of
Vehicles Only)*                              0_F (–18_C). If you experience this          unleaded gasoline to your tank will
                                             condition you may find that a different      improve cold starting performance.
As the outside temperature approaches        brand of winter grade (Ed 85) (if avail-     Your vehicle is designed to operate on
freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should   able in your area) improves the perfor-      (Ed 85) ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline
supply winter grade (Ed 85) ethanol          mance of your vehicle.                       alone, or any mixture of the two.
(same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade (Ed 85) ethanol is used in
cold weather conditions, you may expe-                                                                                *Some models.

                                                                                                                            5-11
Driving Your Mazda

                                                Using the Engine Block
If the engine fails to start using the          Heater*
preceding instructions:
                                                Engine block heaters are strongly rec-
                                                                                                           WARNING
1. Press the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2       ommended if you live in a region where        Ungrounded Connections:
   of the way to floor and hold.                temperatures reach –10_F (–23_C) or           Do not use your heater with un-
                                                below consistently during the winter          grounded electrical systems or two-
2. Turn the key to START position.
                                                months. An engine block heater warms          pronged (cheater) adapters. You can
3. When the engine starts, release the          the engine coolant, which improves            be injured by an electrical shock if
   key, then release the accelerator            starting, warms up the engine faster, and     you use an ungrounded connection.
   pedal gradually as the engine speeds         allows the heater-defrost system to
   up.                                          respond quickly.
                                                                                            For best results, plug the heater in at least
4. If the engine still fails to start, repeat   If you have this option, use it whenever    three hours before you start your vehicle.
   steps one through three.                     the temperature is –10_F (–23_C) or
                                                below.
5. After the engine starts, hold your foot
   on the brake pedal, put the gearshift
   lever in gear and release the parking
   brake. Slowly release the brake pedal
   and drive away in a normal manner.

*Some models.

5-12
                                                                                                           Driving Your Mazda

                                                The Fuel Pump Shut-Off
Using the heater for longer than three          Switch
hours will not damage the engine, so you
can plug it in at night to start your vehicle   If the engine cranks but does not start or
the following morning.                          does not start after a collision, the fuel
                                                pump shut-off switch may have been
                                                triggered. The Fuel Reset indicator light
 NOTE                                           will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
                                                The shut-off switch is a device intended
 Be sure to disconnect the engine block         to automatically stop the fuel pump
 heater before driving your vehicle.            when your vehicle has been involved in
                                                a substantial jolt.
                                                Once the shut-off switch is triggered,
                                                you must reset the switch by hand before     The shut-off switch is located behind
                                                you can start your vehicle.                  the lower right trim panel under the
                                                                                             instrument panel.




                                                                                                                           5-13
Driving Your Mazda

                                                                                           Manual Transmission
                                            3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the      Operation
             WARNING                           switch by pushing in the red button on
                                               the switch. If the button is already set,
 Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch:                    you may have a different mechanical
 If you see or smell fuel, do not reset        problem.
 the switch or try to start your vehicle.
 You could injure yourself or others.       4. Turn the ignition key ON for a few
 Have all the passengers get out of            seconds, then turn it OFF.
 the vehicle and call the local fire        5. Make a further check for leaks in the
 department or a towing service.               system. If you see or smell fuel, do
                                               not start your vehicle again. If you
If your engine cranks but does not start       do not see or smell fuel, you can try
after a collision:                             to start your vehicle again.
1. Turn the key in the ignition to OFF.     6. Check all vehicle warning lights            J Manual Transmission Shift
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.            before driving your vehicle.                   Pattern
                                                                                           The gearshift for a manual transmission
                                                                                           is mounted on the floor. The gearshift
                                                                                           pattern consists of seven positions: Neu-
                                                                                           tral, five forward gears and reverse.

5-14
                                                                                                    Driving Your Mazda


Press the clutch pedal all the way down
while shifting; then release it slowly.                 CAUTION                                   WARNING
                                            Keep your foot off the clutch pedal        Do Not Abuse the Clutch:
 NOTE                                       except when shifting gears. Also,          Do not abuse the clutch. Continued
 Make sure the vehicle is stopped           don’t use the clutch to hold the vehicle   use of a damaged or worn clutch,
 before shifting to R (Reverse). Wait       on an upgrade. This will avoid need-       prolonged clutch slippage or down-
 at least 3 seconds before shifting into    less clutch wear and damage.               shifting at excessive speeds can
 R (Reverse) to prevent a ‘‘grinding’’                                                 result in an explosion of the engine,
 noise. Do not release the clutch.         With the 5-speed transmission you can       transmission or clutch components,
                                           engage R (Reverse) only by moving the       resulting in potential serious per-
                                           gearshift from the left of 3 (Third) and    sonal injury.
                                           4 (Fourth) gears before you shift into
                                           R (Reverse). This is a special lockout
                                           feature that protects you from acciden-
                                           tally shifting into R (Reverse) when you
                                           downshift from Overdrive ( f gear.
                                                                          D)




                                                                                                                       5-15
Driving Your Mazda


J Recommendations for Shifting                Upshifts: Normal Accelerating                   Upshifts: Cruising Conditions
                                          (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy)             (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy)
t Upshifting
                                                             Transfer Case Position                          Transfer Case Position
For normal acceleration, we recommend       Upshift                                         Upshift
                                            from:           2H or 4H*                4L     from:           2H or 4H*                4L
these shift points.
                                            First to          10 mph           4 mph        First to          10 mph           4 mph
                                            Second           (16 km/h)        (6 km/h)      Second           (16 km/h)        (6 km/h)
 NOTE
                                            Second to         22 mph            9 mph       Second to         19 mph            8 mph
 Shifting during extremely low rpms         Third            (35 km/h)        (14 km/h)     Third            (30 km/h)        (13 km/h)
 can result in a momentary audible          Third to          33 mph           13 mph       Third to          28 mph           12 mph
 rattle which disappears as vehicle         Fourth           (53 km/h)        (21 km/h)     Fourth           (43 km/h)        (19 km/h)
 rpms are increased. Shifting at higher
 speeds will eliminate this sound.          Fourth to         41 mph           17 mph       Fourth to         40 mph           16 mph
                                            Overdrive        (66 km/h)        (27 km/h)     Overdrive        (64 km/h)        (26 km/h)
                                          *Use the following for 4x2 applications.        *Use the following for 4x2 applications.




5-16
                                                                                                        Driving Your Mazda


t Downshifting                                   Maximum Downshift Speeds                t Parking
                                                     (For Overdrive*)
When you must slow down in heavy                                                         To park your vehicle, apply the service
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift                    Transfer Case Position       brake, shift into N (Neutral) while still
                                            Shift
before the engine starts to overwork.       from:          2H or 4H**            4L      maintaining pressure on the service brake
This reduces the chance of stalling and                                                  pedal. Set the parking brake fully. Shift
gives better acceleration when you need     Overdrive         55 mph          22 mph     into 1 (First) and turn off the ignition.
                                            to Fourth        (88 km/h)       (35 km/h)
more speed.
                                            Fourth to         45 mph          18 mph
On a steep downgrade, downshifting          Third            (72 km/h)       (29 km/h)                WARNING
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs
brake life. When you come to a stop,        Third to          35 mph          14 mph
                                                                                          Parking in Neutral:
do not downshift through each gear.         Second           (56 km/h)       (22 km/h)
                                                                                          Do not park your vehicle in N (Neu-
Disengage the clutch and use as neces-      Second to         20 mph           8 mph      tral). Use 1 (First) gear and set the
sary. Downshifting through the gears        First            (32 km/h)       (13 km/h)    parking brake fully. If you do not
decreases fuel economy.                     *Downshift at lower speeds when driving on    take these precautions, your vehicle
                                             slippery surfaces.                           may move unexpectedly and injure
                                           **Use the following for 4x2 applications.
                                                                                          someone.




                                                                                                                           5-17
Driving Your Mazda

Automatic Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with either         For example, you may notice that the         To help in troubleshooting, the PCM con-
a four-speed overdrive transmission          transmission will upshift to a higher gear   tinually performs self-tests on the elec-
(4R44E) or a five-speed overdrive trans-     more quickly when the vehicle has not        tronic control system and if any faults
mission (5R55E). All 2.5L and 3.0L           reached normal operating temperature.        are detected, will store them in memory.
engines use the 4R44E transmission,                                                       The Transmission Control Indicator Light
while all 4.0L engines use the 5R55E         The PCM also controls the transmission’s     (TCIL), which is located on the instru-
transmission. Both transmission types        torque converter clutch to further raise     ment cluster, may flash steadily if a
have a lock-up torque converter. Trans-      vehicle performance and fuel economy.        mal-function has been detected. If the
mission operation is controlled by the       The torque converter clutch will engage      TCIL is flashing, contact your Autho-
Powertrain Control Module (PCM).             when the transmission operating tem-         rized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
                                             perature and other conditions determined     If this condition persists, damage to your
The PCM will automatically adjust trans-     by the PCM have been met. Engagement         transmission could occur.
mission operation to make up for varying     of the clutch may be noted as a decrease
conditions. Several sensors located on the   in engine speed.
engine and transmission such as throttle
position, engine speed, vehicle speed and
transmission temperature are used by the
PCM to shift the transmission into a
higher to lower gear when required for
the best performance and fuel economy.


5-18
                                                                                                       Driving Your Mazda


                                          J Putting Your Vehicle in Gear               Always come to a complete stop before
                                                                                       you shift into P (Park). This position
                                          Your vehicle’s gearshift selector lever is   locks the transmission and prevents the
                                          on the steering column. The Transmis-        rear wheels from turning. To securely
                                          sion Control Switch is located on the end    latch the gearshift in the P (Park) posi-
                                          of the gearshift selector lever. You can     tion, pull it toward you, push it com-
                                          put the gearshift selector lever in any of   pletely counterclockwise against the stop,
                                          the several positions.                       and then push it toward the instrument
                                          Once you place the gearshift selector        panel.
                                          lever securely into position, gradually      The gearshift is securely latched in P
                                          release the brake pedal and use the accel-   (Park) if you cannot rotate it in a clock-
                                          erator as necessary.                         wise direction without lifting it toward
J Transmission Ranges
                                          t P (Park)                                   you.
The gearshift selector lever must be at
P (Park) or N (Neutral) to operate the    P (Park) locks the transmission and pre-
starter.                                  vents the rear wheels from rotating.




                                                                                                                          5-19
Driving Your Mazda


                                                                                Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-
            WARNING                                WARNING                      shift interlock feature. This feature pre-
                                                                                vents you from shifting from P (Park)
 Moving Selector Lever:                The Parking Brake vs. P (Park):          with the key in the ON position unless
 Hold the brake pedal down while       Using P (Park) instead of the park-      you have the brake pedal depressed. If
 you move the selector lever from      ing brake to hold the vehicle is         you cannot shift from P (Park) with the
 position to position. If you do not   unsafe. If P (Park) fails to hold, the   brake pedal depressed:
 hold the brake pedal down, your       vehicle will move freely and possi-      1 Apply the parking brake.
 vehicle may move unexpectedly and     bly cause an accident. Don’t use
 injure someone.                       P (Park) in place of the parking         2. Remove the key.
                                       brake. Always use both P (Park)          3. Insert the key and rotate one position
                                       and the parking brake.                      clockwise to OFF.
                                                                                4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to
                                                                                   N (Neutral). If the vehicle is shifted
                                                   CAUTION                         to P (Park) you must repeat the pre-
                                                                                   vious steps.
                                       Shifting into P (Park) or R (Reverse)
                                       while the vehicle is moving can          5. Start the vehicle.
                                       damage your transmission.


5-20
                                                                                                    Driving Your Mazda


                                        t R (Reverse)
           WARNING                      In the R (Reverse) position, the vehicle
                                                                                                  WARNING
Shifting From P (Park) with             will move backward. You should always         Shifting From N (Neutral) or
Shift-Lock Override:                    come to a complete stop before shift-         P (Park):
If you need to shift out of P (Park)    ing into or out of R (Reverse), except        It’s dangerous to shift from N (Neu-
by using the alternate procedure        as explained under Rocking the Vehicle        tral) or P (Park) into a driving gear
described here, it is possible that a   (page 4-14).                                  when the engine is running faster
fuse has blown or the vehicle’s         t N (Neutral)                                 than idle. If this is done, the vehicle
brake lamps may not be operating                                                      could move suddenly, causing an
properly. Refer to the In Case of       In N (Neutral), the wheels and transmis-      accident or serious injury. If the
Emergency section for information       sion are not locked. The vehicle will roll    engine is running faster than idle,
on checking and replacing fuses.        freely even on the slightest incline unless   don’t shift from N (Neutral) or P
Do not drive your vehicle until you     the parking brake or brakes are engaged.      (Park) into a driving gear.
verify that the brake lights are
working.




                                                                                                                        5-21
Driving Your Mazda


t   f (Overdrive)
    D                                       t Drive                                      To return the transmission to the nor-
                                                                                         mal f (Overdrive) operation, press the
                                                                                                D
 f (Overdrive) is the normal drive
  D                                         You will note that there is not a drive      transmission control switch again. When
position for the best fuel economy. As      position on your gearshift indicator.        starting your vehicle, the overdrive sys-
the vehicle picks up speed, the 4R44E       However, you will find a transmission        tem will automatically be in the normal
transmission will automatically upshift     control switch labeled ‘‘O/D ON/OFF’’        overdrive mode.
to second, third and fourth gears when      located on the end of the gearshift lever.
 f (Overdrive) is chosen on the selector
  D                                         Press this switch and ‘‘O/D OFF’’ will       t 2 (Second)
and the transmission control switch has     illuminate on the instrument cluster.
not been pressed.                                                                        The 2 (Second) position is helpful when
                                            With overdrive cancelled and the ‘‘O/D       driving in heavy, slow-moving traffic and
The 5R55E transmission will automati-       OFF’’ illuminated, the 4R44E transmis-       climbing hills; for braking assist when
cally upshift to second, third, fourth      sion will operate in gears one through       going down hills; or for starting on slick
and fifth gears, when f (Overdrive) is
                        D                   three and the 5R55E transmission will        surfaces and other situations where gentle
chosen on the selector and the transmis-    operate in gears one through four. Oper-     acceleration may be necessary.
sion control switch has not been pressed.   ating in ‘‘OFF’’ gives more engine braking
                                            than Overdrive and is useful for ascending   t 1 (Low)
The transmission will shift into correct    or descending hills or when towing. Shift    Use the 1 (Low) position in hard-pulling
gear when the right speed is achieved for   back to f (Overdrive) whenever practi-
                                                       D                                 situations, or for climbing and descend-
the accelerator pedal position you have     cal for optimum powertrain cooling.
chosen.                                                                                  ing very steep grades.


5-22
                                                                                                    Driving Your Mazda


Shift patterns with overdrive:          J Driving Tips                               2. Shift to f or 1 (First) depending on
                                                                                                 D
    f 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th (4R44E)
     D=
                                        t Passing
                                                                                        load weight and grade steepness.
    f 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th (5R55E)
     D=                                                                              3. Release all brakes while gradually
    2 = 2nd                             For extra power when passing another            accelerating.
                                        vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress
    1 = 1st                                                                          t Power braking
                                        the accelerator fully. The 4R44E trans-
Shift patterns without overdrive:       mission will automatically downshift
                                                                                     Increasing the engine speed above idle
    D = 1st, 2nd, 3rd (4R44E)           to the appropriate gear; third, second, or
                                                                                     without vehicle movement (such as hold-
                                        first. The 5R55E transmission will auto-
    D = 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th (5R55E)                                                   ing the brake) in a forward gear causes
                                        matically downshift to the appropriate
    2 = 2nd                                                                          transmission stall.
                                        gear; fourth, third, second or first.
    1 = 1st
                                        t Climbing steep grades from a stop
                                                                                      NOTE
                                        To climb a steep grade from a stopped
                                        position:                                     Continued operation in the stall con-
                                                                                      dition can result in transmission over-
                                        1. Depress the brake pedal.                   heat, malfunction or fluid expulsion.




                                                                                                                        5-23
Driving Your Mazda

                                                                                        4-Wheel Drive System –
t Descending steep grades                    But to increase engine braking, don’t      Electronic Shift Control
                                             use Overdrive when going down a steep
When descending a steep grade, shift to      grade.                                     The electronic shift control 4x4 system
2 (Second) or 1 (First), depending on load                                              functions in three modes. In 2-wheel
weight and grade steepness. Descend          And for a smoother ride with less shift-   drive mode, power is delivered only to
slowly, using the brakes only occasion-      ing, don’t use it when:                    the rear axle at normal road speed.
ally to prevent them from overheating.
                                             S Going up a steep grade;                  The 4x4 HIGH position provides 4-wheel
J Overdrive                                  S Driving in stop-and-go traffic;
                                                                                        drive with power delivered to the front
                                                                                        and rear axles for increased traction. The
t Overdrive operation                        S Pulling heavy loads.                     4x4 LOW position provides 4-wheel
In f the transmission automatically
     D,                                                                                 drive with power delivered to the front
shifts to Overdrive, which improves fuel                                                and rear axles when above average power
economy and reduces noise.                                                              is required at reduced speeds.




5-24
                                                                                                        Driving Your Mazda


4-wheel drive operation (4x4 or 4x4                                                      At temperatures below 32_F (0_C),
LOW) on dry pavement is not recom-                                                       shifts from 2-wheel drive to 4x4 HIGH
mended. Operating the vehicle in 4-wheel                                                 should not be performed above 45 mph
drive on dry pavement will increase tire                                                 (72 km/h).
wear, decrease fuel economy, and make
4-wheel drive disengagement difficult                                                    Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear
for the transfer case.                                                                   wheels slipping.

J Electronic Shift Control
   System Indicator Lights
A 4x4 indicator light and a 4x4 LOW
indicator light are located on the instru-    J Shifting From 2-Wheel Drive
ment cluster. If either light flashes, take
your vehicle in for service.
                                                 to 4x4 HIGH
S 2-wheel drive mode—Neither the              To shift into 4x4, turn the knob located
  4x4 nor the 4x4 LOW lights are lit.         on the instrument panel to 4x4 HIGH.
S 4x4 mode—Only the 4x4 light is lit.
S 4x4 LOW mode—Both the 4x4 and
  4x4 LOW lights are lit.

                                                                                                                          5-25
Driving Your Mazda



J Shifting From 4x4 HIGH to                J Shifting From 2-Wheel Drive             J Shifting From 4x4 LOW to
   2-Wheel Drive                              to 4x4 LOW                                2-Wheel Drive
Turn the knob from 4x4 HIGH to 2WD;        1. Bring the vehicle to a stop.           1. Bring the vehicle to a stop.
the 4x4 light on the instrument cluster
will go out indicating the vehicle is in   2. Depress the brake.                     2. Depress the brake.
2-wheel drive. This can be done at any     3. Place the automatic transmission in    3. Place the automatic transmission in
speed.                                        N (Neutral) or depress the brake          N (Neutral) or depress the brake
                                              pedal and clutch pedal fully on           pedal and clutch pedal fully on
                                              vehicles with a manual transmission.      vehicles with a manual transmission.
                                           4. Move the four-wheel drive knob to      4. Move the four-wheel drive knob to
                                              4x4 LOW.                                  2WD.




5-26
                                                                                                      Driving Your Mazda


J Shifting Between 4x4 HIGH                                                            J Off-Road Driving
   and 4x4 LOW                                          CAUTION
Stop the vehicle, depress the brake, and    S If the four-wheel drive knob is                       WARNING
place the automatic transmission in N         moved to 4x4 LOW while the
(Neutral) or depress the brake pedal and      vehicle is moving, the system will        4-Wheel Driving Precautions:
clutch pedal fully on vehicles with           not engage and no damage will             All utility-type and 4-wheel drive
a manual transmission. Move the four-         occur to the system.                      vehicles have a special design and
wheel drive knob to the 4x4 HIGH or         S Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H       equipment features to make them
4x4 LOW position.                             or 4L may cause unnecessary noise         capable of performing in a wide vari-
                                              and tire wear. Drive in 2-wheel           ety of off-road applications. Specific
                                              drive under these conditions.             design characteristics give them
                                                                                        higher centers of gravity than ordi-
                                                                                        nary passenger cars. These vehicles
                                           It is not recommended to operate the         are not designed for cornering at
                                           vehicle in the 4WD modes with a tem-         speeds as high as passenger cars any
                                           porary spare unless absolutely necessary.    more than low-slung sports cars are
                                           If you must use both 4WD and a tempo-        designed to perform satisfactorily
                                           rary spare, don’t operate at speeds above    under off-road conditions. If at all
                                           10 mph (16 km/h) or for distances over
                                           50 miles (80 km).                                                     (Continued)


                                                                                                                         5-27
Driving Your Mazda



  possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt       S Do not use 4-wheel drive on dry, hard-   When using 4-wheel drive, maintain
  maneuvers in these vehicles. As with          surfaced roads, especially with a tem-   steering wheel control at all times, espe-
  other vehicles of this type, failure to       porary spare tire in use. This may       cially in rough terrain. Since sudden
  operate your vehicle correctly may            damage the driveline and axles.          changes in terrain can result in abrupt
  result in loss of control or vehicle        S Drive slower in strong crosswinds        steering wheel motion, make sure you
  rollover resulting in serious injury.         which can affect the normal steering     grip the steering wheel rim from the
                                                characteristics of your vehicle.         outside. Do not grip the spokes.
Most vehicles with 4-wheel drive are          S Be extremely careful when driving        Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle dam-
especially equipped for driving on sand,        on pavement made slippery by loose       age from concealed objects such as rocks
snow, mud, or rough terrain and have            sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.        and stumps. Know the terrain or exam-
operating characteristics that are some-                                                 ine maps of the area in question before
what different from conventional vehi-                                                   driving. Map out your route beforehand.
cles, both off and on the road. The driving                                              To maintain steering and braking control
tips below will help you learn to use                                                    of your vehicle, you must have all four
4-wheel drive.                                                                           tires on the ground, and they must be
                                                                                         rolling, not sliding or spinning.




5-28
                                                                                                            Driving Your Mazda


If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked      t Sand                                        t Water
out by shifting from forward and reverse      When driving over sand, try to keep all       Before driving through water, determine
gears, stopping between shifts, in a          four wheels of the vehicle on the most        the depth. Avoid water higher than the
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accel-   solid area of the trail. Avoid reducing the   bottom of the hubs. Proceed slowly to
erator in each gear.                          tire pressure. Instead, shift to a lower      avoid splashing, if the ignition system
                                              gear and drive steadily through the ter-      gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
  NOTE                                        rain. Apply accelerator slowly and avoid
                                              spinning the wheels.                          Once through water, always try the
  Do not rock the vehicle for more                                                          brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle
  than a few minutes. The transmis-           If you must reduce the tire pressure for      as effectively as dry brakes. You can dry
  sion and tires may be damaged or the        whatever reason in sand, make sure you        the brakes faster by driving the vehicle
  engine can overheat.                        re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.     slowly while applying light pressure on
                                              Avoid excessive speed because vehicle         the brake pedal.
Transmission upshift in 4x4 with trans-       momentum can work against you and
fer case in 4L may be quite firm due to       cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
large total gear reduction. This condition    point that assistance may be required
is normal.                                    from another vehicle. Remember, you
                                              may be able to back out the way you
                                              came if you proceed with caution.


                                                                                                                               5-29
Driving Your Mazda


t Mud                                                                                    t Driving on hill or steep terrain
                                              NOTE
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle                                                 Although natural obstacles may make it
speed or direction when you are driving       If the transmission, transfer case or      necessary to travel diagonally up or
in mud. Even 4x4 vehicles can lose trac-      front axle are submerged in water,         down a hill or steep incline, you should
tion in slick mud. As when you are driv-      their fluids should be checked and         always try to drive straight up or straight
ing over sand, apply the accelerator          changed, if necessary.                     down. Avoid driving crosswise or turn-
slowly and avoid spinning your wheels.                                                   ing on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies
If the vehicle does slide, steer in the     Replace rear axle lubricant any time the     in losing traction, slipping sideways and
direction of the slide until you regain     axle has been submerged in water. The        possibly rolling over. Whenever driving
control of the vehicle.                     rear axle does not normally require a        on a hill, determine beforehand the route
                                            lubricant change for the life of the         you will use. Do not drive over the crest
After driving through mud, clean off        vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities      of a hill without seeing what conditions
residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and   are not to be checked or changed unless      are on the other side. Do not drive in
tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and        a leak is suspected or repair is required.   reverse over a hill without the aid of an
rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance                                                 observer.
which could damage drive components.




5-30
                                                                                                           Driving Your Mazda


When climbing a steep slope or hill, start    When descending a steep hill, avoid sud-     If vehicle speed drops more than 16 km/h
in a lower gear rather than downshifting      den hard braking as you could lose con-      (10 mph), the cruise control will cancel
to a lower gear once the ascent has           trol. When you brake hard, the front         automatically. Resume speed with the
started. This reduces strain on the engine    wheels can’t turn and if they aren’t turn-   accelerator pedal.
and the possibility of stalling.              ing, you won’t be able to steer. The front
                                                                                           If cruise control cancels after climbing
                                              wheels have to be turning in order to
If you do stall out, do not try to turn                                                    the hill, reset speed by pressing and hold-
                                              steer the vehicle. Rapid pumping of the
around because you might roll over. It is                                                  ing the SET ACCEL button to resume
                                              brake will help you slow the vehicle and
better to back down to a safe location.                                                    speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h).
                                              still maintain steering control.
Apply just enough power to the wheels                                                      The automatic transmission may shift
                                              If your vehicle has antilock brakes,         frequently while driving up steep grades.
to climb the hill. Too much power will
                                              apply the brakes steadily. Do not            Eliminate frequent shifting by shifting
cause the tires to slip, spin or lose trac-
tion, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
                                              “pump” the brakes.                           out of fD(Overdrive) into D (Drive).
                                              When cruise control is on and you are
Descend a hill in the same gear you
                                              driving uphill, your vehicle speed may
would use to climb up the hill to avoid
                                              drop considerably, especially if you are
excessive brake application and brake
                                              carrying a heavy load.
overheating. Do not descend in neutral,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to
a lower gear.


                                                                                                                              5-31
Driving Your Mazda


t Driving on snow or ice                      4x4 vehicles are unique in that they can     J Tire Replacement
                                              be driven in deep snow that would stop          Requirements
A 4-wheel drive vehicle has advantages        a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle.
over 2-wheel drive vehicles in snow and       Shift to a low gear and maintain steady      Your 4x4 vehicle is equipped with tires
ice but can skid like any other vehicle. If   pressure on the accelerator. This will       designed to provide for safe ride and
so equipped, keep the vehicle in 4-wheel      help prevent spinning the wheels while       handling capability.
drive if icy or slippery conditions exist.    maintaining sufficient momentum to           Do not use a size and type of tire and
                                              keep from bogging down. Using tire           wheel other than that originally provided
                                              chains will also help.                       by Mazda because it can affect the safety
                                              Never drive with chains on the front tires   and performance of your vehicle, which
                                              of 4x4 vehicles without also putting         could lead to loss of vehicle control or
                                              them on the rear tires. This could cause     rollover and serious injury. Make sure all
                                              the rear to slide and swing around during    tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the
                                              braking.                                     same size, type, tread design, brand and
                                                                                           load-carrying capacity. If you have ques-
                                                                                           tions regarding tire replacement, see an
                                                                                           authorized Mazda dealer.




5-32
                                                                                                           Driving Your Mazda


If you nevertheless decide to equip your      These “aftermarket lift kits” could          You should carefully observe the recom-
4x4 for off-road use with tires larger than   adversely affect the vehicle’s handling      mended tire inflation pressure found on
what Mazda recommends, you should             characteristics, which could lead to loss    the safety compliance certification label
not use these tires for highway driving.      of vehicle control or rollover and serious   attached to the left front door lock facing
If you use any tire/wheel combination         injury.                                      or door latch post pillar. Failure to
not recommended by Mazda, it may                                                           follow tire pressure recommendations
adversely affect vehicle handling and         Tires can be damaged during off-road         can adversely affect the way your
could cause steering, suspension, axle or     use. For your safety, tires that are dam-    vehicle handles. Do not exceed the
transfer case failure.                        aged should not be used for highway          Mazda recommended pressure even if it
                                              driving because they are more likely to      is less than the maximum pressure
Do not use “aftermarket lift kits” or other   blow out or fail.                            allowed for the tire.
suspension modifications, whether or
not they are used with larger tires and                                                    Each day before you drive, check your
wheels.                                                                                    tires. If one looks lower than the others,
                                                                                           use a tire gauge to check pressure of all
                                                                                           tires, and adjust if required. Check tire
                                                                                           pressure with a tire gauge every few
                                                                                           weeks (including spare). Safe operation
                                                                                           requires tires that are neither underin-
                                                                                           flated nor overloaded.


                                                                                                                              5-33
Driving Your Mazda


Periodically inspect the tire treads and    J If Your Vehicle Goes Off the             It may be safer to stay on the apron or
remove stones, nails, glass or other           Edge of the Pavement                    shoulder of the road and slow down
objects that may be wedged in the tread                                                gradually before returning to the pave-
grooves. Check for holes or cuts that       If your vehicle goes off the edge of the   ment. You may lose control if you do not
may permit air leakage from the tire and    pavement, slow down, but avoid severe      slow down or if you turn the steering
make necessary repairs.                     brake application. Ease the vehicle back   wheel too sharply or abruptly.
                                            onto the pavement only after reducing
Inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts,        your speed. Do not turn the steering
bruises and other damage. If internal       wheel too sharply while returning to the
damage to the tire is suspected, have the   road surface.
tire demounted and inspected in case it
needs to be repaired or replaced.




5-34
                                                                                                         Driving Your Mazda


If often may be less risky to strike small   J Emergency Maneuvers                        In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
inanimate objects, such as highway                                                        skidding the tires and do not attempt any
reflectors, with minor damage to your        In an unavoidable emergency situation        sharp steering wheel movements.
vehicle rather than attempt a sudden         where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
return to the pavement which could           remember to avoid “over-driving’’ your       If the vehicle goes from one type of
cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of   vehicle, i.e. turn the steering wheel only   surface to another (i.e., from concrete
control or rollover. Remember, your          as rapidly and as far as required to avoid   to gravel) there will be a change in
safety and the safety of others should be    the emergency. Excessive steering will       the way the vehicle responds to a maneu-
your primary concern.                        result in less vehicle control, not more.    ver (steering, acceleration or braking).
                                             Additionally, smooth variations of the       Again, avoid these abrupt inputs.
                                             accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure
                                             should be utilized if changes in vehicle
                                             speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steer-
                                             ing, acceleration or braking. Use all
                                             available road surface to return the
                                             vehicle to a safe direction of travel.




                                                                                                                            5-35
Driving Your Mazda

Brake System
J Foot Brake                                When the engine is off, the reserve brake
Your Mazda has power-assisted brakes
                                            power is less each time the brake pedal                 WARNING
                                            is applied. Don’t pump the pedal when
that adjust automatically through normal    the power assist has been interrupted,       Driving with the Engine Off:
use.                                        except when necessary to maintain steer-     Continuing to drive when the
Should power assist fail, you can stop by   ing control when sliding on ice or other     engine is stalled or turned off is
applying greater force than normal to the   slippery surfaces.                           dangerous. Braking will require
brake pedal. But the distance required to                                                more effort, and the brake’s power
                                            If the brakes should fail to operate while   assist could be depleted if you pump
stop will be greater than usual.            the vehicle is in motion, you can make an    the brake. This will cause longer
                                            emergency stop with the parking brake.       stopping distances or even an acci-
                                            The stopping distance, however, will be      dent. Don’t continue driving when
                                            much greater than normal.                    the engine is stalled or turned off,
                                                                                         find a safe place to stop.




5-36
                                                                                              Driving Your Mazda



                                                                               J Front Disc Brakes
           WARNING                                 WARNING                     The front disc brakes are self-adjusting.
Riding the Brakes:                      Driving with Wet Brakes:               They do not require service other than
Driving with your foot continuously     Driving with wet brakes is danger-     periodic inspection for pad wear.
on the brake pedal or steadily apply-   ous. Increased stopping distance or
                                                                               J Rear Drum Brakes
ing the brakes for long distances is    the vehicle pulling to one side when
dangerous. This causes overheated       braking could result in a serious      The rear drum brakes are self-adjusting.
brakes, resulting in longer stopping    accident. Light braking will indi-     Automatic adjustment occurs when the
distances or even total brake fail-     cate whether the brakes have been      brakes are applied while ‘‘backing up.’’
ure. This could cause loss of vehicle   affected. Dry the brakes by driving
control and a serious accident.         very slowly and applying the brakes    If normal operation does not include
Avoid continuous application of the     lightly until brake performance is     much backing up, adjust the rear brakes
brakes. Shift to a lower gear when      normal.                                when they seem ‘‘low’’ and do not grip
going down steep hills.                                                        well by using the following procedure.




                                                                                                                 5-37
Driving Your Mazda



J If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or               inspected by your dealer or a qualified     J Stopping Distances
   Pedal is ‘‘Low’’                           service technician.
                                                                                          Stopping distances vary with different
If brakes do not grip well, it may indicate   J If Brakes Pull                            loads and driving conditions. Use cau-
the rear drum brakes need adjustment.                                                     tion when encountering new conditions
                                              S Check tire pressure.                      and acquaint yourself with vehicle per-
Drive the vehicle in reverse at 5 mph         S Perform the self-adjustment proce-        formance. Take full advantage of engine
(8 km/h) on level, dry pavement. Stop the       dure described under If Brakes Do         braking power when slowing down.
vehicle by firmly applying the brakes.          Not Grip Well or Pedal is ‘‘Low.’’
Repeat this procedure four or five times.
                                              If pull occurs during the first 500 miles
If the brakes seem low or do not grip well    (800 km), make 10 moderately fast stops
during normal operation, it may indicate      from 40 mph (64 km/h) and perform
the need for a brake system inspection        the self-adjustment procedure above. It
and/or service. You should have your          may be necessary to repeat this operation
vehicle checked as soon as possible.          to properly seat new brake linings and
It is not an indication of brake problems     pads.
to have an occasional brake squeal dur-
ing light to moderate brake applications.
However, if the squeal becomes louder
or more frequent, have your brakes

5-38
                                                                                                         Driving Your Mazda



J Applying the Brakes                         J Hydraulic Power Brakes
Apply the brake pedal evenly. Use the         The hydraulic brake system is made up
                                                                                                       WARNING
‘‘squeeze’’ technique. Push on the brake      of two independent hydraulic circuits.        Reduced Braking Capability:
pedal with a steadily increasing force.       One hydraulic circuit supplies fluid to       A loss of pressure in one of the
This allows the wheels to continue to roll    the front disc brakes and the other           circuits, indicated by an increase in
while you are slowing down, which lets        hydraulic circuit supplies fluid to the       pedal travel, will result in reduced
you steer properly. If you lock the wheels,   rear drum brakes. These two circuits are      braking capability. The brake sys-
release the brake pedal and repeat the        supplied by a common hydraulic brake          tem should be checked immediately.
‘‘squeeze’’ technique.                        fluid reservoir, with a fluid level sensor.
                                              The brake light in the instrument panel
              WARNING                         will light for low brake fluid in the
                                              common brake fluid reservoir.
  Suspension Modification:
  Modifications to the suspension
  spring rates and/or vehicle ride
  height may adversely affect vehicle
  stopping ability.



                                                                                                                            5-39
Driving Your Mazda


                                         The parking brake pedal is suspended
                                         just below the instrument panel to the                 WARNING
                                         left of the service brake and/or clutch
                                         pedals.                                    Set Parking Brake Fully:
                                         S To set the parking brake, press the      When parking, do not use the gear-
                                           brake pedal with your right foot and     shift in place of the parking brake.
                                           hold it while you depress the parking    Turn off the ignition whenever you
                                           brake pedal fully with your left foot.   leave your vehicle. Always set the
                                                                                    parking brake fully and make sure
                                                                                    that the gearshift is securely latched
                                                      CAUTION                       in P (Park) (automatic transmis-
                                                                                    sion) or in 1 (First) (manual trans-
J Parking Brake                           Driving with the parking brake on         mission). Never leave your vehicle
                                          will cause excessive wear of the          unattended while it is running. If
The parking brake should be used when-
                                          brake linings or pads.                    you do not take these precautions,
ever you park your vehicle.
                                                                                    your vehicle may move unexpectedly
                                                                                    and injure someone.




5-40
                                                                                                        Driving Your Mazda


                                             If the brake warning light stays on after
                                             the parking brake is fully released, the
                                             brake system has a malfunction. Refer
                                             to Warning Lights/Beeps (page 5-59).




J Brake System Warning Light                                                             J 4-Wheel Antilock Brake
Note the brake warning light each time
                                                                                            System (4-Wheel ABS)*
you start the engine. It should be on when                                               This system helps the driver to maintain
the engine is running and the parking                                                    vehicle control by preventing wheel
brake is set.                                                                            lock-up during hard braking.


                                                                                                                    *Some models.


                                                                                                                          5-41
Driving Your Mazda


The 4WABS operates with a computer          t Using antilock brakes                       the vehicle should be inspected by a
that is able to optimize vehicle control                                                  qualified service technician.
during braking on varying tire and road     The operation of a vehicle with 4WABS
conditions by modulating the brake          is very similar to the operation of normal
pressure at each of the front wheels and    brakes. However, some differences exist                 WARNING
the rear axle. This ‘‘pumping action’’      and are listed below:
                                                                                         Antilock System:
is similar to the driver ‘‘pumping’’ the    S Apply the brake steadily. In the event     The antilock system does not
brakes but happens at a much faster rate.     of a panic stop, do NOT ‘‘pump’’ the       decrease the time necessary to
                                              brakes. ‘‘Pumping’’ the brakes dur-        apply the brakes or always reduce
                                              ing an antilock stop will diminish
             WARNING                          braking effectiveness.
                                                                                         stopping distance. Always leave
                                                                                         enough room between your vehicle
 Antilock System:                                                                        and the vehicle in front of you
                                            S During an antilock stop, the driver
 The antilock system will NOT allow           will notice a brake pedal pulsation        to stop.
 the vehicle to stop as quickly on wet        and hear some noise from the engine
 or icy surfaces as it would on a dry         compartment. This is an indication
 surface. Heavy braking on roads              that the 4WABS system is working
 with loose surfaces such as snow or          correctly and is normal. If the vehicle
 gravel, or severe pavement irregu-           has continuous vibration or shudder
 larities could cause you to lose             in the steering wheel while braking,
 control of your vehicle.

5-42
                                                                                                        Driving Your Mazda


t 4WABS warning light                                                                   brake warning light illuminates, have
                                            NOTE                                        your vehicle serviced immediately.)
The 4WABS computer continuously
monitors the system while driving for       After staring the vehicle and upon ini-
any electrical or system malfunctions.      tial drive-off, the driver may notice a      NOTE
                                            single pulse of the brake pedal and a
In addition, the 4WABS computer per-                                                     Mobile phones or radio transmitters
                                            noise from the engine compartment.
forms an initial system check called                                                     not installed by Mazda Motor Corpo-
                                            This is part of the initial system check
bulb proveout when the vehicle ignition                                                  ration may interfere with the antilock
                                            and is normal.
is switched on. During bulb proveout,                                                    brake system. Should the antilock sys-
the amber ‘‘ABS’’ light on the instru-                                                   tem activate unexpectedly or the ABS
ment cluster will momentarily illumi-     The ABS warning light in the instrument        light illuminate after installation of
nate and then go out.                     cluster momentarily illuminates when           such a unit, have the installation of the
                                          the ignition is turned on and the engine       unit checked.
                                          is off. If the light does not illuminate
                                          momentarily at start up, remains on or
                                          continues to flash, the ABS needs to be
                                          serviced. With the ABS light on, the anti-
                                          lock brake system is disabled and normal
                                          braking is still effective unless the brake
                                          warning light also remains illuminated
                                          with parking brake released. (If your

                                                                                                                            5-43
Driving Your Mazda


                                         J Rear-Wheel Antilock Brake               You’ll notice some pulsation in the brake
                WARNING                     System (Rear-Wheel ABS)*               pedal when the ABS system is operating
                                                                                   normally. If the vehicle has continuous
  Antilock Brake System Warning          This system reduces the possibility of    vibration or shudder in the steering
  Light:                                 sustained rear-wheel brake lockup by      wheel while braking, the vehicle should
  If there is a malfunction in the       immediately sensing any lockup and        be inspected by a qualified service tech-
  system, the antilock brake system      modulating the rear brake pressure.       nician.
  warning light will light as the sys-   Even so, you must always be careful in
  tem becomes disabled. The system       all hazardous driving situations, espe-    NOTE
  should receive immediate service.      cially on unusual surfaces, such as ice
                                         and water.                                 If the antilock warning light stays on
                                                                                    while you’re driving, the ABS con-
                WARNING                  Even with ABS, you may lose control of     trol unit has detected a system mal-
                                         the vehicle through heavy braking on       function. If this occurs, your brakes
  Suspension Modification:               loose surfaces such as snow and gravel,    will function normally as if they had
  Modifications to the suspension        on broken pavement, and on alternate       no ABS. Should this happen, consult
  spring rates and/or vehicle ride       patches of slippery and dry surfaces.      an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon
  height may adversely affect vehicle                                               as possible.
  stopping ability.

*Some models.

5-44
                                                                                               Driving Your Mazda



NOTE                                                 WARNING                                 WARNING
Braking distances may be longer on
                                          ABS:                                    Antilock Brake System Light:
loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for
example), which usually have a hard       The ABS cannot compensate for           If the amber antilock brake system
foundation. A vehicle with a normal       unsafe and reckless driving, exces-     warning light remains on or comes
braking system may require less dis-      sive speed, tailgating (following       on while driving, a fault has been
tance to stop under these conditions      another vehicle too closely), and       detected in the antilock brake sys-
because the tires will build up a wedge   hydroplaning (reduced tire friction     tem, and the antilock system has
of surface layer when the wheels skid.    and road contact because of water       been disabled. Have the braking
                                          on the road surface). You can still     system checked by a qualified ser-
                                          have an accident. So don’t rely on      vice technician as soon as possible.
                                          ABS as a substitute for safe driving.




                                                                                                                 5-45
Driving Your Mazda

                                            Power Steering
                                            Your vehicle is equipped with power          If the steering wanders or pulls, the
 NOTE                                       steering.                                    condition could be caused by any of the
 If a fault occurs in the antilock sys-                                                  following:
                                            Power steering uses energy from the
 tem, and the brake warning light is        engine to help steer the vehicle.            S underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)
 not lit, the antilock system is disabled
 but normal brake function remains          To prevent damage to the power steering      S high crown in center of road
 operational. If the light does not illu-   pump:
                                                                                         S high crosswinds
 minate momentarily at start up,            S Never hold the steering wheel to the
 remains on or continues to flash, the        extreme right or the extreme left for      S wheels out of alignment
 ABS needs to be serviced.                    more than a few seconds when the           S loose or worn components in steering
                                              engine is running.                           linkage
             WARNING                        S Do not operate the vehicle with a low
                                              power steering pump fluid level.
 Suspension Modification:
                                            If the power steering system breaks
 Modifications to the suspension            down (or if the engine is turned off), you
 spring rates and/or vehicle ride           can steer the vehicle manually, but it
 height may adversely affect vehicle        takes more effort.
 stopping ability.


5-46
                                                                                               Driving Your Mazda

                                         Cruise Control*
                                         With cruise control, you can set and
NOTE                                     automatically maintain any speed of
After any severe impact such as          more than about 30 mph (48 km/h).
striking potholes, sliding into curbs
on icy roads, or a collision involving
the front end, observe the steering                  WARNING
wheel alignment. If the spokes of the
steering wheel seem to be in a dif-       Cruise Control Use:
ferent position while going straight      Using cruise control in the follow-
down the road, have the front sus-        ing conditions could cause you to
pension and steering checked for          lose control of the vehicle:
possible damage.                          S Heavy or unsteady traffic
                                          S Slippery or winding roads           To activate the system, press the ON
                                                                                switch.
                                          S Similar restrictions that require
                                              inconsistent speed                To deactivate the system:
                                          Don’t use cruise control in these     S Press the OFF switch.
                                          situations.                           S Turn off the vehicle ignition.


                                                                                                           *Some models.

                                                                                                                   5-47
Driving Your Mazda


Once cruise control is switched OFF,   J To Set Speed:
the previously programmed set speed                                                NOTE
will be released.                      1. Press and release the ON switch.
                                                                                   S On a steep grade, the vehicle may
S Touch the brakes.                    2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which     momentarily slow down going up
                                          must be more than 30 mph (48 km/h).        or speed up while going down.
                                       3. Press SET ACCEL and release it           S You may have to temporarily can-
            WARNING                       immediately. This will set your speed      cel cruise control while driving
                                          and the cruise control indicator light     on steep grades.
 Cruise ON Switch:                        will illuminate (refer to page 4-57).
 If the ON switch is left on, cruise      If you keep this button pressed, your
 control may be switched on acci-         speed will continue to increase and
 dentally. This could result in loss      will not be set until the switch is
 of vehicle control. Keep the cruise      released.
 control OFF when cruise control is
 not in use.




5-48
                                                                                                            Driving Your Mazda


                                               If your vehicle comes with a 5-speed         In order to downshift (with a manual
  NOTE                                         manual transmission, you may prefer to       transmission) with the cruise control
  Cruise control cannot reduce the             drive in 4 (Fourth) gear, in mountainous     operating, you must press either the brake
  vehicle speed if it increases above          areas or at high altitudes, to improve       or clutch pedal long enough to disengage
  the set speed on a downhill grade. If        cruise control performance.                  the cruise control. Wait a second before
  your vehicle speed is faster than the                                                     depressing the clutch again and making
                                               To maintain a preset speed with an auto-
  set speed while driving downhill,                                                         the shift so that the cruise control can
                                               matic transmission, under these condi-
  you may want to shift to the next                                                         fully return to the idle position.
                                               tions, push the Overdrive Off button on
  lower gear to reduce vehicle speed.          the end of the gearshift lever. The O/D
                                               OFF light will illuminate on the instru-
In mountainous areas, at higher eleva-         ment cluster. You can select this position
tions, or when pulling a trailer, the cruise   at any speed. For the best fuel economy
control may not be able to maintain the        during normal driving conditions, leave
preset speed with the transmission in          the shift selector in Overdrive.
overdrive.




                                                                                                                               5-49
Driving Your Mazda


t To Cancel:                                The system is off when the ignition is off.   Your vehicle has a ‘‘tap-up’’ feature that
                                                                                          allows you to increase your current
To turn off the system, use one of these                                                  speed in increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
methods:                                      NOTE                                        by a momentary tap of the SET ACCEL
S Press the OFF switch. The cruise            Cruise control will cancel at about         button. Multiple taps of the SET ACCEL
   control is cancelled.                      8 to 14 mph (13-23 km/h) below the          button will increase your vehicle speed
S Press the brake or clutch pedal (if         preset speed.                               1 mph (1.6 km/h) for each tap. For exam-
   equipped) slightly. The cruise control                                                 ple, if you are currently set at 60 mph
   is turned off, but can be reset by                                                     (96 km/h) and tap the SET ACCEL
   pressing SET ACCEL or RSM.               J To Increase Cruising Speed:                 button 5 times, your vehicle speed will
                                                                                          increase and set at 65 mph (104 km/h).
                                            Follow either of these procedures.
             WARNING                        S Press and hold SET ACCEL. Release
                                               the control when the desired speed is
 Avoiding High Engine RPM:                     reached.
 Do not shift the transmission into         S Accelerate with your accelerator
 N (Neutral) with the cruise control           pedal. When the desired vehicle
 on, as high engine RPM run up will            speed is reached, press and release
 occur until the cruise control is             SET ACCEL.
 turned off.

5-50
                                                                                                      Driving Your Mazda



J Accelerating With Cruise                 J To Decrease Cruising Speed:              J To Resume Cruising Speed at
   Control On                              1. Press and hold the COAST button.
                                                                                         More Than 30 mph (48 km/h):
Accelerate if you want to speed up tem-                                               If something besides the OFF button was
                                           2. The vehicle will gradually slow.
porarily when the cruise control is on.                                               used to cancel cruising speed and the
                                              Release the button at the speed you
Greater speed will not interfere with it                                              system is still activated, the most recent
                                              want.
or change the set speed.                                                              set speed will automatically resume
Take your foot off the accelerator to      Your vehicle has a ‘‘tap-down’’ feature    when the RSM button is pressed. It will
return to the set speed.                   that allows you to decrease your current   not resume though, if vehicle speed has
                                           speed in increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h)    dropped below 30 mph (48 km/h).
                                           by a momentary tap of the COAST but-
                                           ton. Multiple taps of the COAST button
                                           will decrease your vehicle speed 1 mph
                                           (1.6 km/h) for each tap. For example,
                                           if you are currently set at 65 mph
                                           (104 km/h) and tap the COAST button 5
                                           times, your vehicle speed will decrease
                                           and set at 60 mph (96 km/h).




                                                                                                                         5-51
Driving Your Mazda

Instrument Clusters




5-52
Driving Your Mazda




             5-53
Driving Your Mazda

Gauges
J Speedometer                                                                          At normal operating temperature, the
                                                                                       needle remains within the normal area
The speedometer shows forward speed                                                    (the area between the H and C). If it
in miles and kilometers per hour.                                                      enters the red section, the engine is over-
                                                                                       heating. Stop the vehicle as soon as pos-
J Odometer
                                                                                       sible, switch off the engine immediately
The odometer records in miles (kilo-                                                   and let the engine cool.
meters) the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
                                                                                                     CAUTION
J Trip Odometer
                                                                                         Driving with an overheated engine
Push in the reset button to reset the trip                                               can cause serious engine damage
odometer at zero. It will then reduce in     J Engine Coolant Temperature
                                                                                         (see page 6-3).
miles (kilometers) the total distance the       Gauge
vehicle is driven until the meter is again   This gauge shows the temperature of the
reset. Use the trip odometer to measure      engine coolant.
trip distances and in computing fuel
consumption.



5-54
                                                                                                         Driving Your Mazda


                                            adequate oil pressure. If the pointer
                                            remains or drops below the center band
                                            while the engine is running, you have
                                            inadequate oil pressure. If this happens,
                                            stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos-
                                            sible, switch off the engine immediately
                                            and refer to page 8-18 for instructions on
                                            checking oil level.




J Engine Oil Pressure Gauge                                                              J Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates whether or not                                                      The fuel gauge shows how much fuel is
there is adequate oil pressure. If the                                                   in the tank when the ignition is in the ON
engine is running, the pointer will be in                                                or START position.
the center band of the gauge, indicating




                                                                                                                            5-55
Driving Your Mazda


For a proper fuel gauge reading, the igni-                                               If the pointer stays outside the center band
tion switch must be in the OFF position                                                  when you are running electrical accesso-
before you add fuel to the fuel tank.                                                    ries with the engine off or idling, have the
                                                                                         system checked as soon as possible.
The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly
while the vehicle is in motion. This is the
result of fuel movement within the tank.
An accurate reading may be obtained with
the vehicle on smooth, level ground.



                                              J Battery Voltage Gauge
                                              This gauge shows you the battery volt-
                                              age when the ignition key is in the ON
                                              position. Normally the pointer will stay
                                              in the center band.




5-56
                                                                                                      Driving Your Mazda


                                          Some vehicles are equipped with an
                                          engine speed (RPM) limiting device            NOTE
                                          contained within the Powertrain Control       The needle may move slightly when
                                          Module (PCM). The purpose of this             the ignition switch is at ACC or ON
                                          device is to maintain peak engine speed       with the engine off. This is normal
                                          (RPM) below a specified limit. This           and will not affect accuracy once the
                                          feature is only evident on automatic trans-   engine is running.
                                          mission vehicles when shifting manually
                                          (1, 2, D) and on all manual transmission
                                          units. (Engine speed limits may vary
                                          based on engine displacement).                NOTE

                                          If you are experiencing an ‘‘engine cut-      If the 4.0L engine exceeds 5200 RPM,
J Tachometer*                                                                           the powertrain control module will
                                          out’’ condition at high speeds, it may be
                                          the result of this limiting device. It is a   restrict fuel flow to maintain engine
The tachometer shows engine speed in
                                          normal condition and can be avoided by        speed at or below 5200 RPM. This
thousands of revolutions per minute
                                          reducing engine/vehicle speed.                function protects the engine and should
(RPM). Use it while selecting shift
                                                                                        be considered normal operation.
points and to prevent lugging and over-
revving.

                                                                                                                   *Some models.


                                                                                                                         5-57
Driving Your Mazda

                                         Dashboard Illumination
             CAUTION
 Don’t run the engine with the tachom-
 eter in the RED ZONE.
 Driving with your tachometer pointer
 continuously in the RED ZONE may
 damage the engine.




                                         Use to adjust the brightness of the     S Rotate up to brighten.
                                         dashboard lights during headlight and
                                         parking light operation.                S Rotate down to dim.
                                                                                 S Rotate to full up position (past det-
                                                                                   ent) to turn on interior lights.




5-58
                                                                                                              Driving Your Mazda

Warning Lights/Beeps
J Warning Lights Inspection                     J Brake System                              2. If this light is still on, drive to the side
                                                   Warning Light                               of the road and park off the right-of-
Inspect the warning lights by turning                                                          way.
on the ignition switch with the engine          This warning has two functions.
off and the parking brake on. Consult an                                                       You may notice that the pedal is
Authorized Mazda Dealer about any light                                                        harder to push or that it may go closer
                                                t Parking brake warning                        to the floor. In either case, it will take
that doesn’t come on.
                                                The light comes on when the parking            longer to stop the vehicle.
If the brake system warning light is off        brake is applied with the ignition in the
when the ignition switch is at START,                                                       3. With the engine stopped, check the
                                                START or ON position. It goes off when         brake fluid level immediately and
have the system inspected by an Autho-          the brake is fully released.
rized Mazda Dealer.                                                                            add fluid as required (page 8-28).
                                                t Low brake fluid level warning             4. After adding fluid, if the light
After starting the engine, make sure all
warning lights are off. If one stays on, it’s   If the light stays on after the parking        remains on, or if the brakes do not
signaling for attention.                        brake is fully released, you may have a        operate properly, do not drive the
                                                brake problem.                                 vehicle. Have it towed to an Autho-
The brake system warning light should                                                          rized Mazda Dealer.
go off when the parking brake is released.      If it stays on:
                                                                                               Even if the light goes off, have your
                                                1. Be sure the parking brake is fully          brake system inspected as soon as
                                                   released.                                   possible.

                                                                                                                                   5-59
Driving Your Mazda


                                             J Antilock Brake System
                WARNING                         (ABS) Warning Light*                                   CAUTION
  Brake Warning Light:                                                                     If the amber antilock brake system
                                             The ABS warning light illuminates
  Driving with the brake system warn-                                                      warning light remains on or comes
                                             momentarily when the ignition switch is
  ing light on is dangerous. It indi-                                                      on while driving, a fault has been
                                             turned to the ON position. If the ABS
  cates that your brakes may not work                                                      detected in the antilock brake system
                                             control unit determines that all compo-
  at all or that they could completely                                                     and the antilock system has been
                                             nents are OK, it turns off the light
  fail at any time. If this light remains                                                  disabled. Have the braking system
                                             (page 5-43).
  on, have the brakes inspected imme-                                                      checked by a qualified service tech-
  diately. Don’t drive with this light on.   If the ABS brake warning light remains        nician as soon as possible. (Note: If
                                             on, continues to flash or fails to illumi-    a fault occurs in the antilock system,
                                             nate, have the system serviced immedi-        the normal brake function remains
                                             ately. With the ABS light on, the anti-       operational.)
                                             lock brake system is disabled and normal
                                             braking is still effective unless the brake
                                             warning light also remains illuminated
                                             with the parking brake released.


*Some models.


5-60
                                                                                                        Driving Your Mazda


J Seat Belt Warning                         J Charging System                           2. Turn off the engine. Inspect the alter-
   Light/Chime                                 Warning Light                               nator drive belt for looseness and
                                                                                           breakage.
For further information refer to Sec-       This light comes on when you turn the
                                                                                        3. If it’s OK, the charging system has
tion 2.                                     ignition switch to the ON or START posi-
                                                                                           a problem. Consult an Authorized
                                            tion. The light should go off when the
                                                                                           Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
J Fuel Reset Light*                         engine starts and the generator begins to
                                            charge.
The fuel reset light will come on when
the ignition is turned to ON and the fuel   This warning shows a malfunction of                       CAUTION
pump shut off switch has been triggered.    the generator or of the electrical wiring     Don’t drive with a loose or broken
Refer to The Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch      system.                                       generator or fan belt. The engine
in this section.                                                                          could overheat because the water
                                            If the light comes on while the vehicle
                                            is moving:                                    pump or the fan would not work.

                                            1. Drive to the side of the road and park
                                               off the right-of-way.



                                                                                                                     *Some models.

                                                                                                                           5-61
Driving Your Mazda


J Check Gauge Light                           J Malfunction                                comes on after the engine is started, one
                                                 Indicator Light                           of the engine’s emission control systems
                                                                                           may be malfunctioning. The light may
This light comes on when the key is in        Your vehicle is equipped with a compu-       illuminate without a driveability concern
the ON position and:                          ter that monitors the engine’s emission      being noted. The vehicle will usually be
                                              control system. This system is commonly      drivable and will not require towing.
1. The engine coolant temperature is
                                              known as the On Board Diagnostics
   high.                                                                                   If the check engine light turns on solid:
                                              System (OBD II). This OBD II system
2. The engine oil pressure is low.            protects the environment by ensuring that    Temporary malfunctions may cause your
3. The fuel level is near empty.              your vehicle continues to meet govern-       malfunction indicator light to illumi-
                                              ment emission standards. The OBD II          nate. Examples are:
This light will also illuminate for several
                                              system also assists the service technician   1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The
seconds after the ignition is turned to the
                                              in properly servicing your vehicle.             engine may misfire or run poorly.)
ON position and serves as a notice that
the system needs your attention and to        The malfunction indicator light illumi-      2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
check the engine coolant temperature          nates when the ignition is first turned to   3. The fuel cap may not have been
gauge, the engine oil pressure gauge,         the ON position to check the bulb. If it        securely tightened.
and the fuel level gauge. Please see the
Engine Temperature Gauge, Engine Oil
Pressure Gauge, or Fuel Gauge in this
section for more information.

5-62
                                                                                                         Driving Your Mazda


These temporary malfunctions can be           If the check engine light is blinking:      J 4x4 Indicator Light*
corrected by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel and/or properly tight-      Engine misfire is occurring which could
ening the gas cap. After three driving        damage your catalytic converter. You        The 4x4 indicator light comes on when
cycles without these or any other tempo-      should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid   4x4 HIGH is activated.
rary malfunctions present, the malfunc-       heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
                                              have your vehicle serviced at the first     If this light flashes, it indicates that
tion indicator light should turn off. (A                                                  there is a malfunction in the 4x4 system
driving cycle consists of a cold engine       available opportunity.
                                                                                          and you should take your vehicle in for
startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving.) No additional vehicle service is    J Headlight High-Beam                       service.
required.                                        Indicator Light                          J 4x4 LOW Indicator
If the malfunction indicator light remains    This light indicates one of two things:        Light*
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first   S The high-beam headlights are on;          The 4x4 LOW indicator light comes on
available opportunity.
                                              S The turn-signal lever is in the flash-    when 4x4 LOW is activated.
                                                to-pass position.                         If this light flashes, it indicates that
                                                                                          there is a malfunction in the 4x4 system
                                                                                          and you should take your vehicle in for
                                                                                          service.
                                                                                                                     *Some models.

                                                                                                                           5-63
Driving Your Mazda


J Anti-Theft Alarm                        The light may also flash steadily if a        J Cruise Control Light*
   Light*                                 transmission malfunction is detected. If
                                          the light does not come on when the
For further information, refer to Sec-    transmission control switch is depressed      The cruise control light will illuminate in
tion 3.                                   or if the light flashes steadily, have your   the instrument cluster when the cruise
                                          vehicle serviced as soon as possible,         control system is engaged. The light will
J Overdrive On/Off*                       damage to the transmission could occur.       turn off when the brake pedal is pressed,
                                                                                        the ignition is in the OFF position, or the
Illuminates when the transmission con-    J Door Ajar Warning                           cruise control OFF button is pressed.
trol switch has been pushed turning the      Light*
transmission overdrive function OFF.                                                    This display does not indicate any prob-
When the light is on, the transmission    If the ignition switch is in the ON           lems with the cruise control, but is simply
does not operate in the overdrive.        position and any door is not completely       a convenient way of knowing when cruise
                                          closed, the DOOR AJAR light illumi-           control is activated.
                                          nates. If the light illuminates, close the
                                          doors securely.

                                          J Air Bag Warning Light

*Some models.
                                          For further information, refer to Sec-
                                          tion 2.
5-64
                                                                                                      Driving Your Mazda

                                              Lighting Control
J Warning Beeps                                                                        Second stop
t Headlights on beep                                                                   Head- and taillights, dashboard, parking,
                                                                                       and license lights are on.
This warning sounds if you open the door
while the parking lights or headlights are
on and the ignition key is removed from                                                 NOTE
the ignition.
                                                                                        S To prevent discharging the battery,
The warning sounds again after 20 sec-                                                    don’t leave the lights on while the
onds if the headlights are on and the doors                                               engine is off.
are closed.                                                                             S If you stop the engine and leave
t Key-in-ignition beep                                                                    the lights on, a chime will sound
                                              J Headlights                                when the driver’s door is opened.
This warning sounds if you open the
driver’s door while the key is in the         First stop
ignition.                                     Taillights and dashboard, parking, and
t Seat belt beep                              license lights are on.
This warning sounds if you turn on the
ignition before you fasten the seat belt.


                                                                                                                         5-65
Driving Your Mazda




t Headlight high-low beam                    t Flashing the headlights                    J Fog Lamps*
Push the lever forward to activate high      To flash the headlights, pull the lever      Press the fog lamp control button to acti-
beams. Pull the lever toward you to deac-    toward you and release it. The headlight     vate the fog lamps. The fog lamp control
tivate high beams.                           switch need not be on, and the lever         button will illuminate when the fog lamps
The high-beam indicator light on the         will return to the normal position when      are on. Press the fog lamps a second time
dashboard is blue. It will remain illumi-    released.                                    to deactivate the fog lamps.
nated until the headlights are returned to   The high-beam indicator light on the dash-   The fog lamp switch is located to the
low beam.                                    board is blue. It will illuminate briefly    right of the audio system on the instru-
                                             when the headlights are flashed.             ment panel.
*Some models.

5-66
                                                                                                          Driving Your Mazda


                                              Green indicators on the dashboard show
                                              which signal is working.
                                              If the indicator light continues to flash
                                              after a turn, manually return the lever to
                                              its original position.
                                              t Lane-change signals
                                              Move the lever slightly toward the direc-
                                              tion of the change—until the indicator
                                              flashes—and hold it there. It will return
                                              to the off position when released.
J Turn and Lane-Change Signals                                                             J Combination Cargo and
t Turn signals
                                                NOTE                                          High-Mount Brake Light*
                                               If an indicator light stays on without      Use the thumbwheel to the right of the
Move the signal lever down (for a left                                                     headlight knob to turn the cargo light on
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop     flashing or if it flashes abnormally,
                                               the turn signal bulb may be burned out.     and off.
position. The signal will self-cancel after
the turn is completed.

                                                                                                                       *Some models.

                                                                                                                             5-67
Driving Your Mazda

                                          Windshield Wipers and Washer
                                                                                 t Variable interval wipers
             WARNING                                                             To set the interval wipers, rotate the knob
 Driving With Interior Lights On:                                                at the end of the turn signal lever toward
 Do not drive your vehicle with the                                              the front of the vehicle to the wiping
 cargo or interior light on. Showing                                             speed you prefer. The shorter lines indi-
 a white light to the rear while driv-                                           cate a slow interval wiper speed and the
 ing on public roads is illegal in some                                          longer lines indicate a fast interval wiper
 places.                                                                         speed.
                                                                                 t Low or high speed wipers
                                                                                 Turn the wipers on by turning the knob
                                          J Windshield Wipers                    on the end of the turn signal lever toward
                                                                                 the front of the vehicle. Turn it to
                                          The ignition switch must be in ON or   either the s (Low) or ss (High) speed
                                          ACC.                                   position.




5-68
                                                                                                    Driving Your Mazda


                                           If the washer doesn’t work, inspect the
                                           fluid level (page 8-36). If it’s OK, con-              WARNING
                                           sult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
                                                                                       Freezing Washer Fluid:
                                           Do not try to clean the windshield when     In freezing temperatures, windshield
                                           the washer fluid container is empty or      washer fluid could freeze on the
                                           activate the washers at any time for        windshield and block your vision,
                                           more than 15 seconds continuously. This     which could easily cause an acci-
                                           could damage the washer pump system.        dent. Don’t use the washer without
                                                                                       first warming the windshield.
                                            NOTE

J Windshield Washer                         The addition of shields to the front
                                            of the vehicle, as used to deflect
The ignition must be in ON or ACC.          bugs, may also adversely affect the
                                            washer system from delivering fluid
Push the end of the lever and hold it to
                                            to the windshield. Devices such as
spray washer fluid. In the OFF position,
                                            bug shields are not recommended for
they will automatically make a few wipes
                                            your Mazda vehicle.
after you release the lever.


                                                                                                                      5-69
Driving Your Mazda

Lighter                                                                           Power Point
                                                       CAUTION
                                            S Don’t hold the lighter in because
                                              it will overheat.
                                            S Don’t use the lighter socket
                                              for plug-in accessories such as
                                              shavers and coffee pots. They
                                              may damage it or cause electri-
                                              cal failure. Use only a genuine
                                              Mazda lighter or the equivalent.
                                            S If the lighter doesn’t pop out
The lighter is located to the left of the                                         The power point outlet should be used in
                                              within 30 seconds, remove it to
audio system on the instrument panel.                                             place of the cigarette lighter for optional
                                              prevent overheating.
To operate the lighter, press it in and                                           electrical accessories.
release it. When ready for use, it auto-                                          The power point outlet is located to the
matically pops out.                                                               right of the audio system on the instru-
                                                                                  ment panel.




5-70
                                                                                                        Driving Your Mazda

                                           Ashtray                                       Glove Box
             WARNING
Optional Electrical Accessories:
Do not use more than 12 volt acces-
sories in the 12 volt power point.
Do not plug optional electrical acces-
sories into the cigarette lighter. Elec-
trical system damage could occur.
Use the power point outlet.

                                           To remove an ashtray, lift it up and out.     To open the glove box, lift up the handle
                                           Push the ashtray into the tray holder until   and pull the door downward.
                                           it locks.

                                                         WARNING
                                             Ashtrays:
                                             Don’t use ashtrays for trash. You
                                             might start a fire.

                                                                                                                           5-71
Driving Your Mazda

Center Console*                                                                           Cupholders*
                                                                                          If your Mazda has a bench seat or split-
                                                                                          bench seat, you may have cupholders in
                                                                                          the floor-mounted consolette.
                                                                                          The inside of the cupholders can be
                                                                                          adjusted to various heights to accommo-
                                                                                          date different size cups. They can also be
                                                                                          removed to allow access and cleaning of
                                                                                          the cupholder.



Lift the lid to open the center console.     The storage armrest that is equipped with
                                             the 60/40 split bench seat also has a coin
The full console has all of the features     tray, utility compartment with cassette/
shown in the illustration above as well as   compact disc storage and a map storage
a removable utility bag.                     pocket.



*Some models.

5-72
                                                                                                      Driving Your Mazda


                                                                                       To remove the automatic consolette:
                                                                                       1. Pull the adjustable portion of each
                                                                                          cupholder from the consolette.
                                                                                       2. Remove the rubber pad at the bottom
                                                                                          of each cupholder.
                                                                                       3. Using a quarter, turn the slotted head
                                                                                          at the bottom of each cupholder 90_
                                                                                          (one quarter turn).
                                                                                       4. Lift the consolette from the floor and
                                                                                          secure it in a safe place.
On a manual transmission, the cupholders     On an automatic transmission, a remov-
are located on the floor on either side of   able consolette may be removed when the
the gearshift lever.                         center seat position is occupied.




                                                                                                                         5-73
Driving Your Mazda

Sunvisors                                Vanity Mirror*




When you need a sunvisor, lower it for   To use the vanity mirror, lower the sun-
use in front or swing it to the side.    visor on the passenger’s side.




*Some models.


5-74
                          Driving Your Mazda

Climate Control Systems




                                       5-75
Driving Your Mazda




J Fan Blower Control Knob                      J Temperature Control Knob                  J Function Selector Control
This knob allows variable fan speeds.          This controls air temperature. Adjust the
                                                                                              Knob
                                               knob to Cool air in the blue range or to    Use this knob to direct airflow from the
There are four fan settings, plus an OFF       Warm air in the red range.                  vents.
position. The larger the dot, the higher the
fan setting.




5-76
                                                                                                      Driving Your Mazda


                                            t A/C position*
                                            Select A/C to get refrigerated outside air
                                                                                                    WARNING
                                            through the instrument panel registers.      Fog Build-Up on Interior Glass:
                                            This position is used for cooling except     Operating with the function selec-
                                            when it is extremely hot or fast cooling     tor in Off or MAX A/C for extended
                                            of the vehicle is needed. In this case,      periods of time in cold weather can
                                            select MAX A/C for fast cooling and          result in fog build-up on interior
                                            return to A/C when you are comfortable.      glass surfaces. This fogging can
                                                                                         make it difficult to see the road for
                                            t MAX A/C position*                          safe driving. To help prevent fog-
                                            The MAX A/C position produces cool           ging, simply draw in outside air
t Off position                                                                           by placing the function selector
                                            air more rapidly to provide faster cooling
The flow of outside air is shut off; how-   of your vehicle. Select MAX A/C to get       control knob in       ,     , or
ever, a small amount of air is directed     recirculated refrigerated air through the    position and adjust the temperature
toward the face.                            instrument panel registers.                  as necessary.




                                                                                                                   *Some models.

                                                                                                                         5-77
Driving Your Mazda


                                          You can heat the air in this position by
                                          rotating the temperature control knob into
                                          the red (WARM) area. The air cannot be
                                          cooled below the outside temperature
                                          regardless of the temperature control knob
                                          setting. Select A/C or MAX A/C to get
                                          cool air through the instrument panel
                                          registers.




t      (VENT) position                                                                 t        (PANEL and FLOOR)
                                                                                           position
Use    to bring outside air through the
instrument panel registers.                                                            Select    for airflow to the floor and
                                                                                       through the instrument panel registers at
                                                                                       the same time.
                                                                                       The air conditioner will operate to cool
                                                                                       the air if the outside temperature is about
                                                                                       50_F (10_C) or warmer.

5-78
                                                                                                          Driving Your Mazda




t      (FLOOR) position                     t       (FLOOR and DEFROST)                   t       (DEFROST) position
                                                position
Air is delivered to the floor vents.                                                      The air is delivered to the windshield. The
                                            The air is delivered to the floor and the     compressor is engaged to dehumidify the
The air cannot be cooled in this position   windshield. The A/C will operate to cool      air if the ambient temperature is above
but can be heated by rotating the temper-   the air if the outside temperature is about   approximately 50_F (10_C).
ature control knob into the red (WARM)      50_F (10_C) or warmer. The air will also
area.                                       be dehumidified to remove moisture.


                                                                                                                             5-79
Driving Your Mazda


                                                                                     S For dehumidified heating, turn the
                                                                                       function selector control knob to the
                                                                                           position and turn on the air condi-
                                                                                       tioner. (If the outside temperature is
                                                                                       about 50_F {10_C} or warmer, the air
                                                                                       will automatically be dehumidified.)




t Ventilation                             t Heating
S Set the function selector knob at the   S Set the function selector control knob
      position.                             at the    position.
S Set the temperature control knob at a   S Set the temperature control knob to
  desirable position.                       the desired position near the red
S Set the fan blower control knob at a      (WARM) area.
  desirable position.                     S Set the fan blower control knob.
S Airflow may be controlled by adjust-
  ing the side vents.

5-80
                                                                                                Driving Your Mazda



NOTE                                                                               NOTE
For maximum heating, turn the func-                                                For maximum defrosting, turn the
tion selector control knob to  , the                                               function selector control knob to the
temperature control knob to the red                                                    (DEFROST) position, the tem-
(WARM) area and turn the fan                                                       perature control knob to the red
blower control knob to the highest                                                 (WARM) range and the fan blower
setting.                                                                           control knob to the highest setting.


NOTE                                                                               NOTE
If the windshield fogs up easily, set   J Windshield Defrosting and                For maximum defogging, set the
the selector at    (DEFROST).              Defogging                               function selector control knob at
                                        S Set the function selector control knob   MAX A/C, the temperature control
                                          at     (DEFROST).                        knob to the red (WARM) range and
                                                                                   the fan blower control knob to the
                                        S Set the temperature control knob to      highest setting.
                                          the desired position.
                                        S Set the fan blower control knob.

                                                                                                                   5-81
Driving Your Mazda



                                          J Dehumidifying
 NOTE                                                                                   NOTE
                                             (With Air Conditioning)
 S If warm air is desired on the floor,   Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold   Since the air conditioner removes
   set the function selector control      weather to help defog the windshield and      considerable moisture from the air
   knob at     or     .                   side windows.                                 during operation, it is normal if
 S If dehumidified heating is desired,                                                  water drips on the pavement under
   turn the function selector control     S Set the temperature control knob at a       the air conditioner drain after you
   knob to A/C or MAX A/C.                  comfortable position.                       have stopped the vehicle.
 S Clear all snow and ice from the        S Start the engine. Turn the function
   hood and the air inlets in the cowl-     selector control knob to A/C or MAX
   ing grille to improve heater and         A/C.
   defroster efficiency and to reduce
   the chance of fogging on the inside    S Select the desired airflow and fan
   of the windshield.                       speed position.




5-82
                                                                                                        Driving Your Mazda


J Heater Controls                            S If the engine overheats, turn the func-
                                               tion control knob to     or      to turn   NOTE
   (Heater-only Vehicles)
                                               the air conditioning OFF and stop the      Whenever service to the air condi-
The fan speed, temperature, and func-          compressor for a short time.
tion controls are essentially the same as                                                 tioning system is required, make sure
the A/C controls with the exception that                                                  the service facility uses a refrigerant
the heater-only control assembly has no                                                   recycling system. These systems will
                                               NOTE                                       capture the refrigerant for reuse.
function control settings for A/C or
MAX A/C.                                       The optional air conditioner is filled     Releasing the refrigerant into the
                                               with R-134a, a refrigerant that will       atmosphere can damage our environ-
J Operating Tips                               not damage the ozone.                      ment.

t Air-conditioning controls                    If the air conditioner is low on refrig-
                                               erant or has some other problem, con-
S If the vehicle has been parked in direct     sult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
  sunlight during hot weather, run the
  air conditioner at its coolest setting
  with the windows open. This will let
  warm air escape.
S Use the air conditioner to clean foggy
  windows on rainy days.

                                                                                                                           5-83
Driving Your Mazda


                                        3. Set the temperature control knob in
                                           the blue (COOL) range.                            CAUTION
                                        4. Set the fan blower control knob.      When using the air conditioner on
                                           For maximum comfort, adjust the fan   long hills or in heavy traffic, watch
                                           blower control knob and temperature   the temperature gauge closely. If it
                                           control knob.                         indicates overheating, turn the air
                                                                                 conditioner off (page 4-47).
                                         NOTE
                                         For maximum cooling, set the tem-                   CAUTION
                                         perature control knob at the extreme
t Cooling* (Air Conditioning)            left and set the function selector      When stopped in traffic for long
                                         knob at the MAX A/C position. Then      periods of time in hot weather, place
1. Start the engine.                                                             the automatic transmission gearshift
                                         turn the fan blower control knob to
2. Turn the function selector control    the far right for the highest speed.    selector in P (Park), or in N (Neutral)
   knob to A/C or MAX A/C.                                                       for manual transmissions, to increase
                                                                                 the engine idle speed.


*Some models.

5-84
                                                                                               Driving Your Mazda



NOTE                                                WARNING                     NOTE
Slight increases and decreases in                                               When your vehicle’s engine is oper-
                                        Foggy Windshield:
engine rpm may be noticed. This                                                 ated at full throttle, the air conditioner
should be considered normal because     Don’t use the        position during    compressor will automatically be
of A/C compressor cycling. The reduc-   cool operation in very humid out-       turned off to allow maximum engine
tion in compressor operation helps      side weather. The difference between    power. This may occur during pass-
improve fuel economy.                   outside air and windshield temper-      ing or when climbing steep grades.
                                        atures could fog up the inside of the   The compressor will return to normal
                                        windshield. Choose one of the other     operation within a few seconds after
                                        positions.                              full throttle is no longer needed.




                                                                                                                    5-85
Driving Your Mazda

Radio Reception




J AM Characteristics                      J FM Characteristics                       FM transmitter signals are similar to
t Station Mixing                          An FM broadcast range usually extends      beams of light because they don’t bend
                                          up to about 25 to 30 miles (40 to 50 km)   around corners, but they do reflect.
AM signals bend around such things as
buildings and mountains and bounce off    from the source. Because of extra coding   Unlike AM signals, they cannot travel
the ionosphere. Therefore, they can       needed to break the sound into two chan-   beyond the horizon. That’s why FM sta-
reach longer distances than FM signals.   nels, stereo FM has even less range than   tions can’t reach the great distances AM
But because of this, two stations may     monaural (nonstereo) FM.                   stations can.
sometimes be picked up at once on the
same frequency.

5-86
                                                                                                      Driving Your Mazda


Atmospheric conditions can also affect                                                 To minimize these conditions, a stereo/
FM reception. High humidity will cause                                                 mono blend circuit has been incorporated
poor reception, but cloudy days may pro-                                               into this system. This feature automati-
vide better reception than clear days.                                                 cally switches a weak stereo signal to a
                                                                                       clear monaural signal, which improves
                                                                                       the quality of reception.




                                           t Multipath noise
                                           Because FM signals can be reflected by
                                           obstructions, the direct signal and the
                                           reflected signal may be received at once.
                                           This slightly delays reception and may be
                                           heard as a broken sound or a distortion.
                                           This problem may also arise when recep-
                                           tion is close to the station transmitter.

                                                                                                                        5-87
Driving Your Mazda


                                                                                          t Strong signal noise
                                                                                          This occurs very close to a transmission
                                                                                          tower. The broadcast signals are
                                                                                          extremely strong, so the result is noise
                                                                                          and sound breakup at the radio receiver.




t Flutter/skip noise                          t Weak signal noise
FM signals move in straight lines and         In some areas, broadcast signals become
weaken in valleys between tall buildings,     weak, because of distance from the trans-
mountains, and other obstacles. Recep-        mitter. Reception in such fringe areas is
tion in these areas may fade out and result   characterized by sound breakup
in annoying noise.




5-88
                                             Driving Your Mazda




t Station drift noise
When a vehicle reaches the area of two
strong stations broadcasting at similar
frequencies, the original station may be
temporarily lost and the second station
picked up. At this time there will be some
noise from the disturbance.


                                                          5-89
Driving Your Mazda

AM/FM Radio




5-90
                                    Driving Your Mazda

AM/FM Radio with Cassette Player*




                                             *Some models.

                                                  5-91
Driving Your Mazda

AM/FM Radio with Compact Disc Player*




*Some models.

5-92
                                                     Driving Your Mazda

AM/FM Radio with Cassette and Compact Disc Player*




                                                              *Some models.

                                                                   5-93
Driving Your Mazda


                                     If you have an AM/FM radio with cas-
                                     sette and CD player, audio power can
                                     also be turned on by pressing the
                                     AM/FM select control or the Tape/CD
                                     select control. Audio power is turned off
                                     by using the VOL/PUSH ON knob.
                                     J How to Adjust the Volume
                                     Turn the VOL/PUSH ON knob to the
                                     right to increase the volume and to the
                                     left to decrease the volume.
J How to Turn the Radio On                                                       J AM/FM Select
  and Off                             NOTE
                                                                                 The AM/FM select control works in radio,
Press the VOL/PUSH ON knob to turn    If the volume level is set above a         tape and CD modes (if equipped).
the audio system on or off.           certain level and the ignition switch
                                      is turned off, the volume will come
                                      back on at a ‘‘nominal’’ listening
                                      level when the ignition switch is
                                      turned back on.

5-94
                                                                                                   Driving Your Mazda


t AM/FM select in radio mode                                                         If you have an AM/FM radio, press the
This control allows you to select AM or                                              TONE control once, then use the volume
FM frequency bands. Press the control to                                             knob to adjust the level.
switch between AM, FM1 or FM2
memory preset stations.
t AM/FM select in tape mode*
Press AM/FM to stop tape play and
begin radio play.
t AM/FM select in CD mode*
Press AM/FM to stop CD play and begin
                                           J Tone Balance and Speaker
radio play.
                                              Output
                                           t Bass adjust
                                           The bass adjust control allows you to
                                           increase or decrease the audio system’s
                                           bass output.
                                                                                                               *Some models.

                                                                                                                    5-95
Driving Your Mazda




If you have an AM/FM radio with cas-         If you have an AM/FM radio with          t Treble adjust
sette or CD player, press s to increase or   cassette and CD player, press the BASS
t to decrease the bass output.               control then press:                      The treble adjust control allows you to
                                                                                      increase or decrease the audio system’s
                                               A to decrease bass output              treble output.
                                               " to increase bass output
                                                                                      If you have an AM/FM radio, press the
                                                                                      TONE control twice, then use the vol-
                                                                                      ume knob to adjust the level.


5-96
                                                                                                    Driving Your Mazda




If you have an AM/FM radio with cas-         If you have an AM/FM radio with          t Speaker balance adjust
sette or CD player, press s to increase or   cassette and CD player, press the TREB
t to decrease the treble output.             control then press:                      Speaker sound distribution can be
                                                                                      adjusted between the right and left
                                               A to decrease treble output            speakers.
                                               " to increase treble output
                                                                                      If you have and AM/FM radio, press the
                                                                                      TONE control three times, then use the
                                                                                      volume knob to adjust the level.

                                                                                                                     5-97
Driving Your Mazda




If you have an AM/FM radio with            If you have an AM/FM radio with         t Speaker fade adjust
cassette or CD player, speaker sound       cassette and CD player, press the BAL
distribution can be adjusted between the   control then press:                     Speaker sound can be adjusted between
right (s) and left (t) speakers.                                                   the front and rear speakers.
                                             A to shift sound to the left
                                             " to shift sound to the right         If you have an AM/FM radio, press the
                                                                                   TONE control four times, then use the
                                                                                   volume knob to adjust the level.



5-98
                                                                                                   Driving Your Mazda




If you have an AM/FM radio with cas-       If you have an AM/FM radio with          J Clock Operation
sette or CD player, speaker sound can be   cassette and CD player, press the FADE
adjusted between the front (s) and rear                                             Press the CLK control button to display
                                           control then press:
(t) speakers.                                                                       the time. The time will continue to be
                                             A to shift sound to the front          displayed until a radio, tape or CD func-
                                             " to shift sound to the rear           tion is chosen.




                                                                                                                      5-99
Driving Your Mazda


After 10 seconds, the time will again        t Setting the clock
appear in the display. To display radio or
tape information only, press the CLK         Press CLK to toggle between listening
control button a second time.                frequencies and clock mode while in
                                             radio mode.
                                             To set the hour, press and hold the CLK
  NOTE                                       control button and press:
  The clock can be displayed whether           SEEK A to decrease hours
  the ignition is on or off.                   SEEK " to increase hours
                                             To set the minute, press and hold the
                                             CLK control button and press:
                                                                                       J TUNE Adjust
                                               TUNE A to decrease minutes
                                               TUNE " to increase minutes              The TUNE control works in the radio
                                                                                       mode.




5-100
                                                                                                       Driving Your Mazda


t TUNE adjust in radio mode                                                             t SEEK function in radio mode
Press A to move to the next frequency                                                   Press A to find the next listenable sta-
down the band (whether or not a listen-                                                 tion down the frequency band.
able station is located there). Hold the
control to move through the frequencies                                                 Press " to find the next listenable sta-
quickly.                                                                                tion up the frequency band.

Press " to move to the next frequency up                                                t SEEK function in tape mode*
the band (whether or not a listenable sta-                                              Press A to listen to the previous selec-
tion is located there). Hold for quick                                                  tion on the tape.
movement.
                                                                                        Press " to listen to the next selection
                                             J SEEK Function                            on the tape.
                                             The SEEK control function works in the
                                             radio mode.
                                             If you have an AM/FM radio with cas-
                                             sette and CD player, the SEEK control
                                             function works in the radio, tape and CD
                                             mode.                                                                 *Some models.

                                                                                                                       5-101
Driving Your Mazda


t SEEK function in CD mode*                                                         t SCAN function in tape mode*
Press A to seek to the previous track on                                            If you have an AM/FM radio with cas-
the disc.                                                                           sette and CD player, press the SCAN
                                                                                    control to hear a short sampling of all
Press " to seek to the next track on the                                            selections on the tape. (The tape scans in
disc. After the last track has been com-                                            a forward direction. At the end of the
pleted, the first track of the disc will                                            tape’s first side, direction automatically
automatically replay.                                                               reverses to the opposite side of the tape.)
                                                                                    To stop on a particular selection, press
                                                                                    the control again.
                                                                                    t SCAN function in CD mode*
                                           t SCAN function in radio mode*
                                                                                    Press the SCAN control to hear a short
                                           The SCAN control function is available   sampling of all selections on the CD.
                                           on all audio systems except the AM/FM    (The CD scans in a forward direction,
                                           radio.                                   wrapping back to the first track at the
                                           Press the SCAN control to hear a brief   end of the CD.) To stop on a particular
                                           sampling of all listenable stations on   selection, press the control again.
                                           the frequency band. Press the control
*Some models.                              again to stop the scan mode.

5-102
                                                                                                         Driving Your Mazda


                                           t Setting memory preset stations             t Starting autoset memory preset
                                           1. Select a frequency band with the          1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM
                                              AM/FM select control.                        select controls.
                                           2. Select a station.                         2. Press the AUTO control.
                                           3. Press and hold a memory preset but-       3. When the first six strong stations are
                                              ton until the sound returns, indicating      filled, the station stored in memory
                                              the station is held in memory on the         preset control 1 will start playing.
                                              control you selected.
                                                                                        If there are less than six strong stations
                                           J Autoset Memory Preset*                     available on the frequency band, the
                                                                                        remaining memory preset controls will
t Radio station memory preset              Autoset allows you to set strong radio
                                           stations without losing your original        all store the last strong station available.
The radio is equipped with four or six
                                           manually set preset stations. This fea-      To deactivate autoset and return to your
station memory preset buttons. These
                                           ture is helpful on trips when you travel     audio system’s manually set memory
buttons can be used to select up to four
                                           between cities with different radio          stations, press the AUTO control again.
or six preset AM stations and eight or
                                           stations.
twelve FM stations (four or six in FM1
and four or six in FM2).
                                                                                                                       *Some models

                                                                                                                          5-103
Driving Your Mazda


                                             To activate the feature, momentarily
                                             depress the TAPE AMS button. Then,
                                             press either REW (for the beginning of
                                             the current selection) or FF (to advance
                                             to the next selection). The tape deck
                                             stops and returns to play mode when the
                                             AMS circuit senses a blank section on
                                             the tape.
                                             In order to ensure proper operation of the
                                             AMS feature, the tape MUST have a
                                             blank section of at least 4 seconds dura-
                                             tion between programs.
J Automatic Music Search*                                                                 J How to Insert a Tape*
The Automatic Music Search feature                                                        Your cassette tape player is equipped with
allows you to quickly locate the begin-                                                   power loading. Once you insert a tape and
                                                                                          push slightly (with the open edge to the
ning of the tape selection being played or                                                right), the loading mechanism draws the
to skip to the next selection.                                                            tape the rest of the way in and play will
                                                                                          begin after a momentary (one second)
                                                                                          tape tightening process. Display indicates
                                                                                          ‘‘TAPE’’ while tape is playing.
*Some models.


5-104
                                                                                                     Driving Your Mazda



J How to Insert a Compact Disc
                                              NOTE                                    NOTE
   and Begin Playing*
Insert a disc, label side up, into the disc   Once a disc is inserted, the disc       The CD player has heat protection
opening. When inserted, the disc auto-        opening is secured to prevent the       circuitry to protect the laser diode. If
matically loads into the unit and play        accidental insertion of another disc.   the temperature of the player reaches
starts at the beginning of the first track                                            167_F (76_C), the heat detection
(selection).                                                                          circuit will shut off the player and
                                                                                      (CD HOT) will scroll in the dis–
                                                                                      play for approximately five seconds
                                                                                      (radio will resume playing). When
                                                                                      the temperature returns to normal
                                                                                      operating range, the CD player will
                                                                                      again be operational.




                                                                                                                  *Some models.


                                                                                                                       5-105
Driving Your Mazda


J Tape/CD Select*                           t Rewind*                                  t Fast forward*
To begin tape play (with a tape loaded in   The rewind control works in tape and       The fast forward control works in tape
the audio system) while in the radio or     CD modes.                                  and CD modes.
CD mode, press the TAPE control.            In tape mode, radio play will continue     In tape mode, tape direction will auto-
Press the button during rewind or fast      until rewind is stopped (with the TAPE     matically reverse when the end of the
forward to stop the rewind or fast for-     control) or the beginning of the tape is   tape is reached.
ward function.                              reached.                                   If you have an AM/FM radio with cas-
                                            If you have an AM/FM radio with cas-       sette and CD player, pressing the FF
To begin CD play (if CDs are loaded),
                                            sette and CD player, pressing the REW      control in the CD mode fast forwards the
press the CD control. The first track of
                                            control rewinds the CD within the cur-     CD within the current track.
the disc will begin playing. After that,
                                            rent track.
CD play will begin where it stopped last.




*Some models.


5-106
                                                                                                       Driving Your Mazda


J Tape Direction Select*                                                                Dolby noise reduction is manufactured
Press SIDE 1-2 to play the alternate side                                               under license from Dolby Laboratories
of a tape.                                                                              Licensing Corporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and the
                                                                                        double-D symbol      are trademarks of
J Eject Function*                                                                       Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpora-
                                                                                        tion.
Press the control to stop and eject a tape
and/or CD.




                                             J Dolbyr Noise Reduction*
                                             Dolbyr noise reduction operates only
                                             in tape mode.
                                             Dolbyr reduces the amount of hiss and
                                             static during tape playback. Press the
                                             control to activate (and deactivate) the
                                             noise reduction.
                                                                                                                   *Some models.

                                                                                                                       5-107
Driving Your Mazda


                                          J Shuffle Feature*
                                          The shuffle feature operates in CD mode
                                          and plays all tracks on the current disc in
                                          random order.
                                          Press the SHUFFLE control to start this
                                          feature. Random order play will continue
                                          until the SHUFFLE control is pressed
                                          again.



J Compression Adjust*                                                                   J Mute*
Compression adjust brings soft and loud                                                 Press this button to mute the sound with-
CD passages together for a more consis-                                                 out turning off the radio. “Audio Mute”
tent listening level.                                                                   will appear on the display. Press again to
                                                                                        return to normal operation.
Press the COMP control to activate and
deactivate compression adjust.
*Some models.

5-108
                                                                                                     Driving Your Mazda


J Tips on Caring for the                     S Only cassettes that are 90 minutes     S If a tape is loose inside the cassette,
   Cassette Player and Tapes*                  long or less should be used. Tapes       tighten it before playing by putting
                                               longer than 90 minutes are thinner       your finger or a pencil into one of the
In order to keep your cassette tape player     and subject to breakage or may jam       holes and turning the hub until the
performing the way it was meant to, read       the tape player’s mechanism.             tape is tight.
and follow these simple precautions:
                                             S Protect cassettes from exposure to     S Loose labels on cassette tapes can
S Using a Mazda Cassette Cleaning              direct sunlight, high humidity and       become lodged in the mechanism.
  Cartridge to clean the tape player           extreme hot or cold. If they are         Remove any loose label material
  head after 10-12 hours of play will          exposed to extreme conditions, allow     before inserting the cassette.
  help maintain the best playback              them to reach a moderate tempera-
  sound and proper tape operation.             ture before playing.                   S Do not leave a tape in the cassette
                                                                                        tape player. High heat in the vehicle
                                                                                        can cause the cassette to warp.




                                                                                                                  * Some models.


                                                                                                                      5-109
Driving Your Mazda



J How to Take Care of and                   S Do not clean discs with solvents such
   Clean Your System and Discs*               as benzine, thinner, commercially                       WARNING
                                              available cleaners or antistatic spray
Your system is designed to give years         intended for analog records.                 Disassembling the Compact Disc
of listening enjoyment. To ensure this                                                     Changer System:
continued performance, carefully read       S Do not expose the disc to direct sun-
                                              light or heat sources such as defroster      The use of optical instruments with
the following precaution:                                                                  this product will increase eye hazard
                                              and floor heating ducts. Do not leave
S Always handle the disc by its edge.         any discs in a parked car in direct          as the laser beam used in this com-
  Never touch the playing surface.            sunlight where there may be a consid-        pact disc changer system is harmful
                                              erable rise in temperature or damage         to the eyes. Do not attempt to dis-
S Before playing, inspect the disc for        may result.                                  assemble the case. Refer servicing to
  any contamination. If needed, clean                                                      qualified personnel only.
  the disc with an approved disc cleaner,   S After playing, store the disc in its case.
  such as the Discwasher Compact Disc       S If a disc has already been inserted, do
  Cleaner or the Allsop 3 Compact Disc        not try to insert another disc. Doing
  Cleaner, by wiping from the center out      so may damage the disc player.
  to the edges. Do not use a circular
  motion to clean.                          S Do not insert anything other than a
                                              disc into the disc player.
*Some models.


5-110
                                                                                                     Driving Your Mazda


J Common Operating                        S Different manufacturers of compact        S Moisture may have condensed on the
   Conditions*                              discs may produce discs with differ-        lenses within the unit. If this occurs,
                                            ent dimensions or tolerances, some          remove the disc and wait approxi-
The following information is designed       of which may not be within industry         mately an hour until the moisture
to help recognize typical situations        standards or in accordance with the         evaporates.
that could be mistakenly interpreted as     CD format. Because of this, a new
mechanical malfunctions of the compact      disc that is free of dust and scratches   If the sound skips:
disc player:                                could be defective and may not play       S Badly scratched discs or extremely
S A disc is already loaded.                 on your disc player.                        rough roads will cause the sound to
                                                                                        skip. Skipping will not damage the
S The disc is inserted with the label     If play does not begin once the disc has      disc player or scratch the disc.
  surface downward.                       been inserted:
                                          S The unit may be in the stop mode.
S The disc is dusty or defective.
S The player temperature is above 167_F
  (76_C). Allow the player to cool off
  before operating.



                                                                                                                  *Some models.

                                                                                                                      5-111
Memo




5-112
    In Case of Emergency
6   Because an emergency can occur any time, we strongly urge you to become familiar with this section
    of your manual. It provides helpful information on what to do if the engine overheats, if you have a flat
    tire, and if the battery is discharged.
    You will also find out what to do if you confront a problem in the electrical system, and there’s some
    guidance on the correct way to tow your Mazda.




                                                                        Hazard Warning Flasher          6- 2
                                                                                    Overheating         6- 3
                                                                             Emergency Starting         6- 4
                                                                      Fuses and Circuit Breakers        6- 8
                                                                                         Towing         6-18
                                                                                        Flat Tire       6-26

                                                                                                                6-1
In Case of Emergency

Hazard Warning Flasher
                                         The hazard warning lights should always         charged and in good condition. They will
                                         be used when you stop on or near a road-        not drain the battery excessively. If the
                                         way.                                            flashers run for longer than two hours or
                                                                                         if your battery is not fully charged, your
                                         Depress the hazard warning button and           battery can be drained.
                                         all four turn signals will flash at once. To
                                         stop the hazard flashers, press the button
                                         again.                                            NOTE
                                         The flashers will flash and the high mount        S The turn signals don’t work when
                                         brake light will stay on steadily (not flash)       the hazard lights are on.
                                         with the brake pedal depressed.                   S Check local regulations about the
                                         The flashers work whether your vehicle              use of hazard warning lights while
The hazard warning lights warn other
                                         is running or not. The flashers work for            the vehicle is being towed. They
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic
                                         up to two hours when the battery is fully           may forbid it.
hazard and that they must take extreme
caution when near it.




6-2
                                                                                                    In Case of Emergency

Overheating
If the temperature gauge indicates over-                                             3. If neither coolant nor steam is
heating, if you experience power loss, or               WARNING                         escaping, open the hood.
if you hear a loud knocking or pinging
noise, the engine is probably too hot.      Overheated Engine:                       4. Visually inspect the alternator/water
                                            Overheated engines are dangerous.           pump drive belt for looseness and
If this happens:                            The escaping steam could seriously          breakage and all cooling hose connec-
                                            burn you.                                   tions for leaks. If the belt is broken or
1. Drive safely to the side of the road                                                 coolant is leaking, call an Authorized
   and park off the right-of-way. Set an    If steam is coming from the engine          Mazda Dealer for assistance.
   automatic transmission in P (Park), a    compartment, don’t go near the
   manual transmission in N (Neutral).      front of the vehicle. Stop the engine.   5. If the drive belt is OK, if the engine
   Apply the parking brake. Turn the        Open the hood ONLY after steam is           is cool, and if no coolant leaks are
   engine off and let it cool.              no longer escaping from the engine.         obvious, inspect the coolant level.
                                                                                        Carefully add coolant as required
2. The air conditioner must be off.                                                     (page 8-22).




                                                                                                                           6-3
In Case of Emergency

                                          Emergency Starting
                                          J Jump-Starting
             WARNING                      Jump-starting is dangerous if done in-
                                                                                                  CAUTION
 Radiator Cap:                            correctly. So follow procedures carefully.   Do not disconnect the battery of the
 When the engine and radiator are         If you feel unsure about jump-starting,      vehicle that needs a jump-start. You
 hot, scalding coolant and steam          we strongly recommend that you have a        could damage the vehicle’s electrical
 may shoot out under pressure and         competent service technician do the          system.
 cause serious injury. Don’t remove       work.
 the radiator cap when the engine
 and radiator are hot.
                                                        CAUTION                                   WARNING
                                                                                       Battery-Related Explosion:
                                            Use only a 12-volt booster system.
             CAUTION                        You can damage a 12-volt starter           Hydrogen gas is produced during
                                            motor, ignition system, and other          normal battery operation. A battery-
 If the engine continues to overheat or     electrical parts beyond repair with        related explosion can cause serious
 frequently overheats, have the cool-       a 24-volt power supply (two 12-volt        injury. Keep all flames (including
 ing system inspected. The engine           batteries in series or a 24-volt motor     cigarettes), heat, and sparks away
 could be seriously damaged unless          generator set).                            from the top and surrounding area
 repairs are made.                                                                     of open battery cells.



6-4
                                                                                                 In Case of Emergency



           WARNING                                                                              CAUTION
Jump-Starting:                                                                      If the booster is in another vehicle,
Jump-starting a frozen battery or                                                   don’t allow the vehicles to touch. A
one with a low fluid level is danger-                                               short could be created.
ous. It may rupture or explode,
causing serious injury. Don’t jump-                                                2. Turn off the engine of the vehicle and
start a frozen battery or one with a                                                  all unnecessary electrical loads.
low fluid level.


                                        1. Make sure the booster battery is
                                           12-volts and that its negative termi-
                                           nal is grounded.




                                                                                                                       6-5
In Case of Emergency


3. Connect the jumper cables in the        4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
   exact sequence as shown in the             and run it a few minutes. Then start                     WARNING
   illustration.                              the engine of the other vehicle.
                                                                                            Handling the Battery:
  (1) Connect one end of a cable to the    5. When finished, carefully disconnect           Applying too much pressure on the
  positive terminal on the discharged         the cables in the reverse order               ends when lifting a battery could
  battery ¬.                                  described in Step 3.                          cause acid to spill. Lift the battery
  (2) Attach the other end to the posi-    After your vehicle is started, let it idle for   with a carrier or with your hands
  tive terminal on the booster ­.          a while to let the engine “relearn” its idle     on the opposite corners. Batteries
                                           conditions and drive it around for a little      contain sulfuric acid which burns
  (3) Connect one end of the other         while with all electrical accessories            skin, eyes and clothing. If acid
  cable to the negative terminal of        turned off to let the battery recharge. You      touches someone’s skin, eyes or
  the booster ®.                           may need to use a battery charger to fully       clothing, immediately flush the area
                                           recharge the battery.                            with water for at least 15 minutes.
  (4) Connect the other end to a solid,
                                                                                            If someone swallows the acid, have
  stationary, metallic point (for exam-
                                                                                            him or her drink lots of milk or
  ple, the engine lifting bracket or the
                                                                                            water first, then Milk of Magnesia,
  strut mounting bolt) away from the
                                                                                            a beaten egg or vegetable oil. Call
  battery ¯.                                                                                a doctor immediately.


6-6
                                                                                             In Case of Emergency



                                                                                J Push-Starting
           WARNING                                 WARNING                      You can’t start a vehicle with an auto-
Connecting to Negative Terminal:        Connecting Jumper Cable to a            matic transmission by pushing it.
Connecting the end of the second        Moving Part:
cable to the negative (–) terminal of   Connecting a jumper cable near or                    CAUTION
the discharged battery is danger-       to a moving part is dangerous. The
ous. A spark could cause the gas        cable could get caught when the          You shouldn’t push-start a vehicle
around the battery to explode and       engine starts and cause serious          that has a manual transmission. It can
injure someone. Connect the cable       injury. Never connect a jumper           damage the emission control system.
to a point away from the battery.       cable to or near any part that moves.




                                                                                                                    6-7
In Case of Emergency

                                         Fuses and Circuit Breakers
                                                                                    If any lights, accessories, or controls
            WARNING                                                                 don’t work, inspect the appropriate cir-
                                                                                    cuit protector. If a fuse has blown, the
 Towing a Vehicle to Start It:                                                      inside element will be melted.
 Towing a vehicle to start it could be
 dangerous. The sudden surge for-                                                   If the same fuse blows again, avoid using
 ward when the engine starts could                                                  that system and consult an Authorized
 cause the two vehicles to collide.                                                 Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
 Therefore, never tow a vehicle to
 start it.


                                         Your vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
                                         tected by fuses and circuit breakers.




6-8
                                                                                                          In Case of Emergency


                                                                                            Some spare fuses have been supplied for
                                                                                            your use: one 10 amp (red), one 15 amp
                                                                                            (blue), one 20 amp (yellow), and one 30
                                                                                            amp (light green). If you use these spare
                                                                                            fuses, replace them with other fuses of
                                                                                            the same rating so you will have them
                                                                                            when you need them.




J Fuse Replacement                            2. Pull the fuse straight out with the
                                                 fuse puller provided on the fuse block
If the electrical system doesn’t work,           cover.
first inspect fuses on the driver’s side of
                                              3. Inspect it and replace it if it’s blown.
the instrument panel.
                                              4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
1. Turn off the ignition and other
                                                 and make sure it fits tightly. If it
   switches.
                                                 doesn’t, have an Authorized Mazda
                                                 Dealer install it.


                                                                                                                                6-9
In Case of Emergency




           CAUTION                               WARNING
 Always replace a fuse with one of    Replacing Fuses:
 the same rating. Otherwise you may   Always disconnect the battery before
 damage the electrical system.        removing the cover to the fuse block
                                      to replace an open (blown) high cur-
                                      rent fuse.
                                      Always replace the cover to the
                                      fuse block before reconnecting the
                                      battery.
                                                                             If the headlights or other electrical com-
                                                                             ponents don’t work and the fuses in the
                                                                             cabin are OK, inspect the fuse block
                                                                             (power distribution box) under the hood.
                                                                             If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.
                                                                             Follows these steps:
                                                                             1. Turn off the ignition and all other
                                                                                switches.

6-10
                                                                                                       In Case of Emergency


2. Open the fuse block cover by squeez-                                                  Always replace a circuit breaker with
   ing the tabs on one end and pulling                                                   one of the same rating.
   the cover upward.
                                                                                         To remove a circuit breaker located in
3. If a fuse is blown, replace it with a                                                 the engine compartment fuse block, grip
   new one of the same rating.                                                           it with your finger and thumb and pull it
                                                                                         straight out of the socket.




                                           J Circuit Breakers
                                           Circuit breakers will reset themselves
                                           and allow the electrical parts to work
                                           again once the overload on the circuit is
                                           removed. If the circuit breakers continue
                                           to cut off electricity, have the electrical
                                           system checked by an Authorized Mazda
                                           Dealer.

                                                                                                                           6-11
In Case of Emergency

J Fuse Panel Description   t Interior fuse panel
 Interior                              FUSE                    PROTECTED
                            NUMBER    RATING                   COMPONENT
 fuse
 panel                         1        5A     Power Mirror
                                               Blower Motor Relay, Air Bag Diagnostic Monitor,
                               2        10A
                                               Passive Deactivation (PAD) Module
                                               Trailer Tow Connector
                               3       7.5A
                                               (LH Stop/Turn)
                               4        —      Not Used
                               5        10A    4x4 Control Module
                               6        —      Not Used
                                               Trailer Tow Connector
                               7       7.5A
                                               (LH Stop/Turn)
                               8        —      Not Used
                               9       7.5A    Stoplamp Switch
                                               Cruise Control Servo/Amplifier Assy., GEM/CTM,
                               10      7.5A    Shift Lock Actuator, Blend Door Actuator, A/C
                                               Heater Control Assy., Turn Signals




6-12
                                                                                                     In Case of Emergency


          FUSE                    PROTECTED                                FUSE                    PROTECTED
NUMBER                                                           NUMBER
         RATING                   COMPONENT                               RATING                   COMPONENT
                  Instrument Cluster, Main Light Switch, RABS      21      20A     Flasher
  11      7.5A
                  Resistor
                                                                   22      20A     Auxiliary Power Point
  12       —                             —
                                                                   23       —                       —
  13      20A     Brake Pedal Position Switch
                                                                                   Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch, Starter
  14      20A     RABS Module                                      24      7.5A
                                                                                   Interrupt Relay
  14      10A     4WABS Mod., 4WABS Main Relay                     25       —      Not Used
  15       —      Not Used                                                         Battery Saver Relay, 4x4 Electronic Shift Relay,
                                                                                   Interior Lamp Relay, 4x4 Elec. Shift Control
                  W/W Motor, Wiper Hi-Lo Relay, Wiper Run/Park     26      10A     Module, Dome/Map Lamp, Instrument
  16      30A
                  Relay, Washer Pump Relay                                         Illumination Dimming Module, Restraint Control
  17      25A     Cigar Lighter, Data Link Connector (DLC)                         Module, GEM/CTM, Instrument Cluster
  18       —      Not Used                                         27       —      Not Used
  19      25A     PCM Power Diode, Ignition, PATS                  28      7.5A    GEM/CTM System, Radio
  20      7.5A    GEM/CTM, Radio                                   29      15A     Radio
                                                                   30       —      Not Used




                                                                                                                              6-13
In Case of Emergency


           FUSE                      PROTECTED
 NUMBER
          RATING                     COMPONENT
   31       —        Not Used
   32       —        Not Used
   33       15A      Headlights, DRL Module, Instrument Cluster
   34       —        Not Used
           15A or    ISA Horn Relay if not Equipped with Truck
   35     Not Used   Security Module
   36       —        Not Used




6-14
                     In Case of Emergency


Engine compartment
fuse block




                                   6-15
In Case of Emergency


           AMP                                                   AMP
 NUMBER                             DESCRIPTION        NUMBER                              DESCRIPTION
          RATING                                                RATING
    1      50A     I/P Fuse Panel                        17       —                    —
    2       —      Not Used                              18       —                    —
    3       —      Not Used                              19       —                    —
    4       —      Not Used                              20       —                    —
    5       —      Not Used                              21      10A     PCM Memory
    6      50A     ABS Pump Motor                        22       —                    —
    7      30A     Powertrain Control Module             23      20A     Fuel Pump Motor
    8      20A     Power Door Locks and Remote Entry     24      30A     Headlights
    9       —                  —                         25      10A     A/C Clurtch
   10       —                  —                         26       —                    —
   11      50A     Starter Relay Ignition Switch         27       —                    —
   12      10A     PCM Memory                            28      30A     4WABS Module
   13      20A     4x4 Motor                             29       —                    —
   14       —                  —                         30      15A     Trailer Tow
   15       —                  —                         31      20A     Fog Lamps, Day Time Running Lamps (DRL)
   16      40A     Blower Motor                          32       —                    —

6-16
                                                                                    In Case of Emergency


          AMP                                              AMP
NUMBER                             DESCRIPTION   NUMBER                           DESCRIPTION
         RATING                                           RATING
  33      15A     Park Lamp                       46B       —      Front Washer Pump
  34       —                  —                   47A       —      Not Used
  35       —                  —                   47B       —      Not Used
  36       —                  —                   48A       —      Fog Lamp
  37       —                  —                   48B       —      Fog Lamp Relay
  38      10A     Left Headlamp Low Beam           49       —      Full Starter
  39       —                  —                   50A       —      Not Used
  40       —                  —                   50B       —      Fuel Pump
  41       —      Heated Oxygen Sensors            51       —      Not Used
  42      10A     Right Headlamp Low Beam          52       —      Not Used
  43       —                  —                    53       —      Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Diode
  44       —                  —                    54       —      Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Diode
 45A       —      Wiper High/Low                   55       —      Blower
 45B       —      Wiper Park/Run                  56A       —      A/C Clutch Solenoid
 46A       —      Not Used                        56B       —      Trailer Tow



                                                                                                           6-17
In Case of Emergency

Towing
We recommend that towing be done only
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing are necessary
to prevent damage to the vehicle. State
and local laws must be followed.
When a vehicle is towed on its front
wheels, lock the steering wheel in a
straight ahead position with a steering
wheel clamp.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow
the vehicle with the front wheels on the
ground and the rear wheels off the
ground.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that
your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift
or flatbed equipment.
Do not tow with slingbelt equipment.

6-18
                                                                                                 In Case of Emergency


                                     J Towing with Front Wheels                    J Towing with Rear Wheels
          WARNING                       on Ground                                     on Ground
Disconnecting Propeller Shaft:       Before your vehicle is towed on its front     Before your vehicle is towed on its rear
When disconnecting/connecting the    wheels, release the parking brake and put     wheels, release the parking brake and put
propeller shaft, the parking brake   the gearshift (both manual and automatic)     the gearshift (both manual and automatic)
must be set and the wheels must be   in N (Neutral). If the transmission is        in N (Neutral). If the transmission is
blocked to ensure the vehicle does   malfunctioning, place the front wheels on     malfunctioning, place the rear wheels on
not roll during this procedure.      dollies or disconnect the front propeller     dollies or disconnect the rear propeller
                                     shaft. If the transfer case is malfunction-   shaft. If the transfer case is malfunction-
                                     ing, disconnect the front propeller shaft     ing, disconnect the rear propeller shaft
                                     from the axle and secure or place the         from the axle and secure or place the rear
                                     front wheels on dollies.                      wheels on dollies.




                                                                                                                      6-19
In Case of Emergency




J Towing 2-Wheel Drive Vehicles             2. Lock the steering wheel straight   t Towing a vehicle with a manual
                                               ahead.                               transmission with front wheels off
t Towing with rear wheels off the                                                   the ground or with all four wheels
  ground                                    3. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).      on the ground:
For manual or automatic transmissions:                                            1. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
1. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).                                         2. There is no limitation on the distance
                                                                                     you can tow with a manual transmis-
                                                                                     sion.

6-20
                                                                                                    In Case of Emergency


3. Do not exceed the maximum speed                                                    t Towing a vehicle with a manual
   limited by the towing equipment           NOTE                                       transmission with all four wheels
   manufacturer’s recommendations.           If you must tow farther than 50 miles      on the ground:
t Towing a vehicle with an                   (80 km) or faster than 35 mph (56        1. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
  automatic transmission with all            km/h), you must disconnect the pro-
  four wheels on the ground or with          peller shaft. Even with the propeller    2. There is no limitation on distance.
  the front wheels off the ground:           shaft disconnected, you should not
                                                                                      3. Maximum speed is limited by the
                                             exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
1. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).                                                towing equipment manufacturer’s
                                                                                         recommendations.
2. Do not drive faster than 35 mph          J Towing 4-Wheel Drive Vehicles
   (56 km/h).                                                                         t Towing with an electronic shift
                                            On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that     control system transfer case
3. Do not tow farther than 50 miles
   (80 km).                                 your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift
                                                                                      For manual or automatic transmissions:
                                            or flatbed equipment.
                                                                                      1. Place the gear selector lever in N
                                                                                         (Neutral).
                                                                                      2. Place the transfer case in 2WD.




                                                                                                                        6-21
In Case of Emergency


                                                                                    S For manual transmissions:
 NOTE                                      NOTE                                       When towing your vehicle with the
 With the ignition in the ON position,     Confirm by observation that the            rear wheels on the ground and the
 both the 4x4 and 4x4 LOW lights in        front propeller shaft is not rotating      driveshafts connected, do not exceed
 the instrument cluster will be off        prior to towing with the rear wheels       55 mph (80 km/h). If a distance of
 when the transfer case is in 2WD.         off the ground.                            50 miles (80 km) is exceeded, dis-
                                                                                      engage the automatic locking hubs.
3. Lock the steering wheel straight       S For automatic transmissions:
   ahead if the vehicle is to be towed      When towing your vehicle with the
   with rear wheels off the ground.         rear wheels on the ground or all four               WARNING
                                            wheels on the ground and the propel-     Towing Your Vehicle:
S If you tow your vehicle with the rear     ler shafts connected, do not exceed
  wheels off the ground, the front axle     35 mph (56 km/h) or transmission         Never use a tow bar that attaches
  automatic locking hubs must first be      damage could result. If a distance of    to the bumper when you tow your
  disengaged by shifting the transfer       50 miles (80 km) is exceeded, disen-     vehicle. You could damage the
  case to 2WD. Do not tow faster than       gage the automatic locking hubs and      bumper and cause an accident.
  55 mph (88 km/h).                         disconnect the rear propeller shaft
                                            from the axle and secure. (Maximum
                                            speed is 55 mph {88 km/h} with pro-
                                            peller shafts disconnected.)

6-22
                                                                                                      In Case of Emergency


If the ignition key is not available to     J Recreational Towing                       4. Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
unlock the steering column, place a dolly
under the rear wheels and tow the vehicle   Towing your vehicle can be successfully
with the front wheels raised.               performed by following the appropriate        NOTE
                                            guidelines for the type of powertrain on
When a vehicle is towed on its front        the vehicle to be towed. The following        Mazda recommends the propeller
wheels, lock the steering wheel in a        guidelines, by powertrain combination,        shaft be removed/installed only by
straight ahead position with a steering     are designed to ensure that the transmis-     a qualified technician. See your
wheel clamp. Do not use the vehicle’s       sion is not damaged due to insufficient       Authorized Mazda Dealer for pro-
steering column lock to secure the wheels   lubrication.                                  peller shaft removal/installation.
in a straight ahead position when pulled
from the rear.                              t Towing 2-wheel drive vehicles             If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or speed
                                            Automatic transmission with all four        of 35 mph (56 km/h) will be exceeded,
                                            wheels on the ground:                       you must:

                                            1. Release the parking brake.
                                            2. Place the transmission gear selector
                                               lever in N (Neutral).
                                            3. Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).


                                                                                                                           6-23
In Case of Emergency


S Disconnect the propeller shaft at the                                             t Towing 4-wheel drive vehicles
  rear differential and properly support                WARNING                     Electronic shift transfer case with all
  it under the vehicle.
                                            Disconnecting the Propeller Shaft:      four wheels on the ground:
S Mark the propeller shaft and axle         When disconnecting/installing the
  flanges to ensure proper position                                                 Regarding recreational towing, 4x4
                                            propeller shaft, the parking brake      vehicles with electronic shift on the fly
  when reconnecting the propeller           must be set and the wheels must be
  shaft.                                                                            cannot be towed with any wheels on the
                                            blocked to ensure the vehicle does      ground (with the exception of moving it
  Refer to the workshop manual for          not roll during this procedure.         as a disabled vehicle off the road out of
  proper propeller shaft fastener torque                                            traffic.
  specifications.                          Manual transmission with all four
S Maximum speed is 55 mph (88 km/h),       wheels on the ground:
  unlimited distance.                      1. Release the parking brake.
                                           2. Place the transmission gearshift in
                                              N (Neutral).
                                           3. Maximum speed is limited by towing
                                              equipment manufacturer’s recommen-
                                              dation.


6-24
                                                                                                     In Case of Emergency


                                           the vehicle in this condition, you must
             WARNING                       follow the following guidelines:              NOTE

 Removing the Propeller Shaft:             S Place the transfer case in 4H by rotat-     Both the 4x4 and 4x4 LOW indicator
                                             ing the electronic shift transfer case      lights in the instrument cluster will
 When removing/installing the pro-           (2WD/4x4) knob to 4WD HIGH.                 be off when the transfer case is in
 peller shaft, the parking brake must                                                    2WD.
 be set and the wheels must be             S Drive the vehicle only on good sur-
 blocked to ensure the vehicle does          face roads to avoid excessive loads
                                             on the front-wheel drive system.          S Confirm the front hubs are unlocked
 not roll during this procedure.
                                                                                         by inspecting the front propeller shaft
                                           S Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/hr).         to verify it does not turn when the
Manual transmission with all four          S Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).       vehicle is towed.
wheels on the ground:
                                           S Avoid quick acceleration and steep        In addition to the above guidelines, it is
S Maximum speed is 55 mph (88 km/h),         grades.                                   recommended that you follow the instruc-
  unlimited distance.
                                                                                       tions provided by the manufacturer of the
                                           To return the vehicle to a towable condi-
Limited vehicle operation, such as                                                     towing apparatus.
                                           tion, you must:
driving the vehicle while at a campsite,
can be accomplished with the rear pro-     S Place the transfer case in 2WD by
peller shaft removed by using the front      rotating the electronic shift transfer
drive to propel the vehicle. To operate      case (2WD/4x4) knob to 2WD.

                                                                                                                          6-25
In Case of Emergency

Flat Tire
J Tire, Jack, and Tool Storage




6-26
                                                                                                    In Case of Emergency


  Regular cab                               Cab plus – 2-Door                           Cab plus – 4-Door




t To remove the jack, jack handles        On 2-door Cab Plus vehicles, the jack,       On 4-door Cab Plus vehicles, the jack,
   and lug wrench:                        jack handles and lug wrench are located      jack handles and lug wrench are located
On regular cab vehicles, the jack, jack   behind the passenger-side jump seat. The     between the jump seats.
handles and lug wrench are located        jack handles are located in a tool bag.
directly behind the passenger seat.       Turn the thumbscrew counterclockwise         To remove the jack cover, turn the cover
                                          to remove the jack, jack handles, tool bag   screw to the left and lift up. Turn the
To remove the jack cover, remove the                                                   yellow knob to the left to remove the
hold down screw and lift up. Loosen the   and lug wrench.
                                                                                       jack, jack handles and lug wrench.
thumbwheel and remove the jack, jack
handles and lug wrench.
                                                                                                                        6-27
In Case of Emergency


                                           3. Insert the straight end of the jack han-   3. Turn the spare handle clockwise until
                                              dle into the rear access hole.                the tire is raised to its original posi-
                                              Forward motion will stop and resis-           tion underneath the vehicle. The spare
                                              tance to turning will be felt when            handle ratchets when the tire is raised
                                              properly engaged.                             to the stowed position. It will not
                                                                                            allow you to overtighten.
                                           4. Turn the handle counterclockwise
                                              until tire is lowered to the ground and    4. If your vehicle is equipped with
                                              the cable is slightly slack.                  P265/75 R15 AT tires, do not stow a
                                                                                            flat or inflated full size spare tire in
                                           5. Remove the retainer from the spare
                                                                                            the spare tire carrier. The flat full size
                                              tire.
                                                                                            tire should be stowed and tied down
t To remove the spare tire:                t Stowing the spare tire:                        in the pickup box bed until it can be
                                                                                            repaired.
1. Assemble the jack handle to the lug     1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
   wrench.                                    outboard side facing up.                   5. If removed, install the spare tire car-
2. If equipped, unlock and remove the                                                       rier lock on the access hole in the
                                           2. Install the retainer through the wheel
   spare tire carrier lock from the rear                                                    bumper.
                                              center and slide the wheel under the
   access hole located just above the         vehicle.
   rear bumper and below the tailgate.



6-28
                                                                                                   In Case of Emergency



              WARNING                                     WARNING                                 WARNING
  Temporary Spare:                             Jacking a Vehicle:                      Temporary Spare Tire:
  Do not engage 4-wheel drive with             Changing a tire can be dangerous.       If you use the temporary spare tire
  the use of a temporary spare. It can         The vehicle can slip off the jack and   continuously or do not follow the
  easily cause loss of control.                seriously injure someone.               proper precautions, the tire could
                                               Be sure to follow the directions for    fail, causing you to lose control of
                                               changing a tire, and never get under    the vehicle and possibly injure your-
J Changing a Flat Tire                                                                 self or others.
                                               a vehicle that is supported only by a
If you have a flat tire, drive slowly to a     jack.
level spot that is well off the road and out   To avoid injury, never run the engine
of the way of traffic to change the tire.      with one wheel off the ground, such
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of      as when changing a tire. The wheel
a busy road is dangerous.                      still on the ground could cause the
                                               vehicle to move.




                                                                                                                       6-29
In Case of Emergency



                                                                                     3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
            WARNING                                                                  4. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug
 Changing a Tire:                                                                       wrench, and spare tire.
 When one of the back wheels is off                                                  5. Block both the front and rear of the
 the ground, the transmission alone                                                     wheel diagonally opposite the tire
 will not prevent the vehicle from                                                      being changed.
 moving or slipping off the jack,
 even if the vehicle is in P (Park) or                                               6. Use the tapered end of the lug nut
 1 (First). To prevent the vehicle                                                      wrench to unscrew wheel ornaments
 from moving when you change a                                                          attached by retaining screws. Remove
 tire, be sure the parking brake is                                                     any wheel trim. Insert the tapered end
 set, then block (both directions) the   1. Park on a level surface off the right-      of the lug nut wrench behind wheel
 wheel that is diagonally opposite          of-way and firmly set the parking           covers or hub caps and twist off.
 (other side and end of the vehicle)        brake. Turn off the engine.
 to the tire being changed. If the
                                         2. Shift an automatic transmission to
 vehicle slips off the jack, someone
                                            P (Park); shift a manual transmission
 could be seriously injured.
                                            to R (Reverse).



6-30
                                                                                               In Case of Emergency



                                        7. Loosen the lug nuts by pulling up on
           CAUTION                         the handle of the lug nut wrench about              WARNING
                                           one-half turn (counterclockwise), but
Only the lug nut wrench provided           don’t remove any until the tire has      Incorrect Jacking Position:
should be used to remove wheel orna-       been raised a maximum of one inch        Attempting to jack the vehicle in
ments. Use of anything other than          off the ground.                          positions other than those recom-
the lug nut wrench provided may                                                     mended in this manual is danger-
damage the finish or your wheels.       8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
                                           and use the handle to slide the jack     ous. The vehicle could slip off the
                                           under the vehicle.                       jack and seriously injure or even
                                                                                    kill someone. Use only the correct
           CAUTION                                                                  front and rear jacking positions.

Not using the tapered end of the lug
nut wrench at the pry-off notches
may result in damage to the finish of
the wheel and ornament.




                                                                                                                  6-31
In Case of Emergency


                       9. To raise a front wheel, place the jack
 Jack points
                          directly under the lower suspension arm.
                          To raise a rear tire, place the jack under
                          the rear axle between the spring shackle
                          bolts.

                                       WARNING
                          Improper Jack:
                          Using a jack that isn’t designed for
                          your Mazda could be dangerous. The
                          vehicle could slip off the jack and
                          seriously injure someone. Use only
                          the jack provided with your Mazda.




6-32
                                                                                             In Case of Emergency




            WARNING                                 WARNING
To lessen the risk of personal injury,   Placing Objects Under the Jack:
do not put any part of the body          Jacking the vehicle with an object
under the vehicle while changing a       under the jack is dangerous. The
tire. Do not start the engine when       jack could slip and someone could
your vehicle is on the jack. The jack    be seriously injured by the jack or
is only meant for changing the tire.     the falling vehicle. Never place
                                         objects under the jack.

            CAUTION                                                            10. Turn the jack handle clockwise
Never use the differential housing as                                              until the tire just clears the ground,
a lift point.                                                                      less than 1 inch (30 mm). Before
                                                                                   removing the lug nuts, make sure
                                                                                   your Mazda is firmly in position
                                                                                   and that it cannot slip or move.



                                                                                                                  6-33
In Case of Emergency


11. Remove the lug nuts by turning them                                                    Also, retighten to the specified torque
    counterclockwise; then remove the                                                      at 500 miles (800 km), after any wheel
    wheel.                                                                                 change, or when the lug nuts are loos-
                                                                                           ened.
12. Mount the spare tire making sure the
    valve stem is facing outward.
13. Install the lug nuts with the beveled                                                            WARNING
    edge inward. Use the lug nut wrench
                                                                                          Loose Lug Nuts:
    to screw the lug nut snug against the
    wheel, but do not tighten.                                                            Improperly or loosely tightened lug
                                                                                          nuts are dangerous. The wheel
                                                                                          could wobble or come off. This
                                            14. Turn the jack handle counterclock-        could result in loss of vehicle con-
                                                wise, lower the vehicle and remove        trol and cause a serious accident.
                                                the jack. Use the lug wrench to tighten   Always securely and correctly
                                                the nuts in the order shown.              tighten the lug nuts.
                                                If you’re unsure of how tight the nuts
                                                should be, have them inspected at a
                                                service station. The specified torque
                                                is 135 NSm (13.8 kgfSm, 100 ft-lb).

6-34
                                                                                              In Case of Emergency



                                                                                15. Store the tools in their proper places.
           WARNING                                 WARNING                          If your vehicle is equipped with a
                                                                                    P265 75R15 AT tire, do not stow the
Metric Studs and Lug Nuts:             Incorrect Tire Air Pressure:                 flat tire (or a fully inflated tire) in
Because the wheel studs and lug nuts   Driving on tires with incorrect air          the spare tire carrier. It may damage
on your Mazda have metric threads,     pressure is dangerous. Tires with            the tire or the vehicle. Stow only
using a nonmetric nut would be dan-    incorrect pressure could affect han-         the temporary spare in the spare tire
gerous. On a metric stud, it would     dling and result in an accident.             carrier. Stow the flat full size tire
not secure the wheel and would         Don’t drive with any tires that have         with ropes in the pickup box bed.
damage the stud, which could cause     incorrect air pressure. When you             Repair the tire as soon as possible.
the wheel to slip off and cause an     check the regular tire’s air pressure,
accident. Be sure to reinstall the     check the spare tire too.
same nuts you removed or replace                                                              WARNING
them with metric nuts of the same                                                 Stow Equipment Properly:
configuration.
                                                                                  To prevent personal injury, make
                                                                                  sure the spare tire and jacking
                                                                                  equipment are stowed and secured
                                                                                  in the proper storage location.



                                                                                                                   6-35
In Case of Emergency


J Temporary Spare Tire                                                              S Do not tow a trailer while using
Your Mazda may have a temporary spare
                                                      CAUTION                         this tire.
tire. It’s lighter and smaller than a     To avoid damage to the temporary          S Don’t load the vehicle beyond
conventional tire, is designed only for   spare or to the vehicle, observe the        maximum vehicle load rating
emergency use, and should be used only    following:                                  listed on the Safety Compliance
for VERY short periods. Temporary         S Don’t exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).            Label.
spares should NEVER be used for long
                                          S Avoid driving over obstacles. Also
drives or extended periods.
                                              don’t drive through an automatic
                                              car wash. This tire’s diameter is
             WARNING                          smaller than a conventional tire’s;
                                              so the ground clearance is reduced
 In Ice and Snow:                             about one inch (25 mm).
 Using a temporary spare on the rear      S Don’t use a tire chain on this tire
 (driving) wheels when driving on ice         because it won’t fit properly.
 or snow is dangerous. It can easily      S Don’t use your temporary spare
 cause loss of control. Put the tempo-        on any other vehicle; it has been
 rary spare on the front axle and             designed only for your Mazda.
 move a conventional tire to the rear.                              (Continued)


6-36
    Appearance Care
7   This section features care, inside and out, of your Mazda . . . how to best keep it clean and looking good.
    Be aware that appearance is not the only reason for cleanliness. Road grime tends to eat away at the
    metal, so keeping your vehicle clean in the way Section 7 prescribes will help prevent its early
    deterioration and rusting.




                                                 How to Minimize Environmental Paint Damage               7- 2
                                                                               Exterior Care              7- 5
                                                                                Interior Care             7-10


                                                                                                                  7-1
Appearance Care

How to Minimize
Environmental Paint Damage
The paintwork on your Mazda represents     J Etching Caused by Acid Rain                 t Prevention
the latest technical developments in          or Industrial Fallout                      It is necessary to wash and wax your
composition and methods of application.                                                  vehicle to preserve its finish according
                                           t Occurrence
Environmental hazards, however, can                                                      to the instructions in this section. These
harm the paint’s protective, properties,   Industrial pollutants and vehicle emis-       steps should be taken immediately after
if proper care is not taken.               sions drift into the air and mix with rain    you suspect that acid rain has settled on
                                           or dew to form acids. These acids can         your vehicle’s finish.
Here are some examples of possible         settle on a vehicle’s finish. As the water
damage, with tips on how to prevent        evaporates, the acid becomes concen-          J Damage Caused by Bird
them.                                      trated and can damage the finish. And the        Droppings, Insects, or Tree Sap
                                           longer the acid remains on the surface, the   t Occurrence
                                           greater the chance is for damage.
                                                                                         Bird droppings contain acids. If these
                                                                                         aren’t removed they can eat away the
                                                                                         clear and color base coat of the vehicle’s
                                                                                         paintwork.




7-2
                                                                                                           Appearance Care


When insects stick to the paint surface      t Prevention                              Insects and tree sap are best removed with
and decompose, corrosive compounds           It is necessary to have your Mazda        a soft sponge and water or a commercially
form. These can erode the clear and color    washed and waxed to preserve its finish   available chemical cleaner.
base coat of the vehicle’s paintwork if      according to the instructions in this
they are not removed.                                                                  Another method is to cover the affected
                                             section. This should be done as soon as   area with dampened newspaper for one
Tree sap will harden and adhere perma-       possible.                                 to two hours. After removing the news-
nently to the paint finish. If you scratch   Bird droppings can be removed with        paper, rinse off the loosened debris with
the sap off while it is hard, some vehicle   a soft sponge and water. If you are       water.
paint could come off with it.                traveling and these are not available,
                                             a moistened tissue may also take care
                                             of the problem. The cleaned area should
                                             be waxed according to the instructions
                                             in this section.




                                                                                                                           7-3
Appearance Care


J Water Marks                                J Paint Chipping
                                                                                        NOTE
t Occurrence                                 t Occurrence
                                                                                        S The paint chipping zone varies
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can       Paint chipping occurs when gravel
                                                                                          with the speed of the vehicle.
contain harmful minerals such as salt        thrown in the air by another vehicle’s
                                                                                          For example, when traveling at
and lime. If moisture containing these       tires hits your vehicle.
                                                                                          56 mph (90 km/h), the paint chip-
minerals settles on the vehicle and evapo-
rates, the minerals will concentrate and     t How to avoid paint chipping                ping zone is 164 feet (50 m).
harden to form white rings. The rings can                                               S In low temperatures a vehicle’s
                                             Keeping a safe distance between you and
damage your vehicle’s finish.                                                             finish hardens. This increases the
                                             the vehicle ahead reduces the chances of
                                                                                          chance of paint chipping.
t Prevention                                 having your paint chipped by flying
                                             gravel.                                    S Chipped paint can lead to rust
It is necessary to wash and wax your                                                      forming on your Mazda. Before
vehicle to preserve its finish according                                                  this happens, repair the damage
to the instructions in this section. These                                                by using Mazda touch-up paint
steps should be taken immediately after                                                   according to the instructions in
you find water marks on your vehicle’s                                                    this section. Failure to repair the
finish.                                                                                   affected area could lead to serious
                                                                                          rusting and expensive repairs.



7-4
                                                                                                             Appearance Care

Exterior Care
Follow all label and container directions   can damage the finish if not removed          that you clean the wiper blades and wind-
when using a chemical cleaner or polish.    immediately. When prompt washing              shield (refer to page 8-37).
Read all warnings and cautions.             with plain water is ineffective, use a
                                            mild soap made for use on vehicles.
J Maintaining the Finish
                                            Thoroughly rinse off all soap with luke-
                                                                                                       WARNING
t Washing                                   warm or cold water. Don’t allow soap to        Driving with Wet Brakes:
To help protect the finish from rust and    dry on the finish.                             Driving with wet brakes is danger-
deterioration, wash your Mazda thor-        Wash chrome and aluminum parts with            ous. Increased stopping distance or
oughly and frequently (at least once a      the same mild soap you used to wash the        the vehicle pulling to one side when
month) with lukewarm or cold water.         vehicle’s body.                                braking could result in a serious
                                                                                           accident. Light braking will indi-
Pay special attention to removing salt,     Take similar precautions if your vehicle       cate whether the brakes have been
dirt, mud, and other foreign materials      is exposed to chemical industrial fallout.     affected. Dry the brakes by driving
from the underside of the fenders, and                                                     very slowly and applying the brakes
make sure the drain holes in the lower      Remove any exterior accessories, such
                                                                                           lightly until brake performance is
edges of the doors and rocker panels are    as antennas, before entering a car wash. If
                                                                                           normal.
kept clear and clean.                       you have wax applied to the vehicle at a
                                            commercial car wash, it is recommended
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial fallout, and similar deposits

                                                                                                                              7-5
Appearance Care


                                                                                    Wax all the metal trim to maintain its
             CAUTION                                   CAUTION                      luster.

 S Do not wash your vehicle with           S To prevent damaging the antenna,       Avoid getting wax on the windshield. If
   hot water. Also, do not wash your         remove it before entering a car        you have wax applied at a commercial car
   vehicle while it sits in direct sun-      wash or passing beneath a low          wash, it is recommended that you clean
   light or while the body is hot.           overhead clearance.                    the wiper blades and windshield (refer to
 S Wiping off dust or dirt with a dry                                               page 8-37).
   cloth will scratch the finish.         t Waxing
 S Don’t use steel wool, abrasive         Wax your Mazda when water no longer        NOTE
   cleaners, or strong detergents con-    beads on the paint.
   taining highly alkaline or caustic                                                A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and
   agents on chrome-plated or anod-       Always wash and dry it before waxing.      similar materials will usually also
   ized aluminum parts. This may                                                     take off the wax. Rewax these areas
   damage the protective coating;         Use a good-quality liquid or paste wax,    even if the rest of the vehicle doesn’t
   also, the cleaners and detergents      and follow the manufacturer’s instruc-     need it.
   may discolor or deteriorate the        tions.
   paint.
                          (Continued)


7-6
                                                                                                              Appearance Care


J Cleaning Plastic Parts                       deteriorated. To remove rustproofing,       J Bright-Metal Maintenance
                                               clean with a hi-flash, naphtha-wetted
Some vehicle trim parts are plastic. These     cloth. Then wipe the area completely dry.   S Use tar remover to remove road tar
may include the outside door handles, the                                                    and insects. Never do this with a knife
side view mirror, exterior nameplates          J Repairing Damage to the                     or similar tool.
and the bumper. Use a mild detergent              Finish
to remove dirt, wax buildup and other                                                      S To prevent corrosion on bright-metal
deposits from these parts. Do not clean        Deep scratches or chips on the finish         surfaces, apply wax or chrome preser-
plastic parts with fuel or other petroleum-    should be repaired promptly. Exposed          vative and rub it to a high luster.
                                               metal quickly rusts and can lead to major
based cleaners.                                                                            S During cold weather or in coastal
                                               repairs.
Because your vehicle’s side moldings are                                                     areas, cover bright-metal parts with a
painted in lacquer, do not use thinners or                                                   coating of wax or preservative heavier
                                                                                             than usual. It would also help to coat
solvents to clean them.                                     CAUTION                          them with noncorrosive petroleum
J Cleaning Rustproofing                         If your Mazda is damaged and needs           jelly or some other protective com-
                                                metal parts repaired or replaced,            pound.
If you rustproof your vehicle after you         make sure the body shop applies anti-
buy it, inspect its plastic and rubber          corrosion materials to all parts, both
parts for overspray, drips, and runs. If the    repaired and new. This will prevent
rustproofing is not removed from these          them from rusting.
parts, the parts may become distorted or

                                                                                                                               7-7
Appearance Care


J Cleaning the Headlights and                  J Cleaning the Mirrors                         S Extreme care must be used if a power
   Taillights                                  Do not clean the mirrors with a dry cloth        washer is used to clean the engine.
                                               or abrasive cleaners. Use a soft cloth and       The high pressure fluid could pene-
Dirty lights reduce your ability to see and                                                     trate sealed parts and assemblies
be seen. Because your headlights and tail-     mild detergent diluted in water or glass
                                               cleaner. Be careful when you remove ice          causing damage or malfunctions.
lights are plastic, clean them with a cloth
and mild detergent that is diluted in water.   from the outside mirror. You can easily        S In order to avoid possible cracking of
Then rinse them with clear water.              damage the reflective surface.                   the engine block or fuel injection
                                                                                                pump, do not spray a hot engine or
Do not clean the lights with abrasive          J Cleaning the Windows                           injection pump with cold water.
cleaners. Such cleaners scratch the lights.    When the windows become dirty, clean
Also, do not wipe the lights when they are     them with glass cleaner. Follow the            S The battery, ignition coil, air intake
dry. This can scratch them as well. Do not     directions on the container of cleaner.          and engine compartment fuse box
use fuel, commercial tar remover, chemi-                                                        must be covered. Covering these
cal solvents, or strong detergents. These      J Engine Compartment                             components will help prevent water
products can crack the lights.                 A clean engine is not only nicer to look at,     damage.
                                               but it is also easier to work on. A clean      S Never wash or rinse the engine while
                                               engine is also more efficient because the        it is running. Water getting into the
                                               engine is able to cool properly. A buildup       engine may cause internal damage.
                                               of grease and dirt acts as an insulator,
                                               keeping the engine warmer than normal.

7-8
                                                                                                         Appearance Care


J Underbody Maintenance                     Pay special attention to these areas
Road chemicals and salt used for ice
                                            because they easily hide mud and dirt.                 WARNING
                                            It will do more harm than good to
and snow removal and solvents used for                                                  Driving with Wet Brakes:
                                            wet down the road grime without
dust control may collect on the under-
                                            removing it.                                Driving with wet brakes is danger-
body. If not removed, they will speed
                                                                                        ous. Increased stopping distance or
up rusting and deterioration of such        The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,    the vehicle pulling to one side when
underbody parts as fuel lines, frame,       and frame members have drain holes          braking could result in a serious
floor pan, and exhaust system, even         that should not be clogged. Water trapped   accident. Light braking will indi-
though these parts may be coated with       there will cause rusting.                   cate whether the brakes have been
anticorrosive material.
                                                                                        affected. Dry the brakes by driving
Thoroughly flush the underbody and                                                      very slowly and applying the brakes
wheel housings with lukewarm or cold                                                    lightly until brake performance is
water at the end of each winter. Try also                                               normal.
to do this every month.




                                                                                                                         7-9
Appearance Care

                                                                                Interior Care
J Cleaning the Wheels                    S Do not use acid-based or alcohol-    J Dashboard Precautions
Your aluminum wheels are coated with a     based wheel cleaners, steel wool,    Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume
clear protective finish.                   fuel or strong detergents. Never     and cosmetic oils from contacting the
                                           use abrasives that will damage the   dashboard. They’ll damage and discolor
                                           finish of special wheel surfaces.    it. If these solutions get on the dashboard,
 NOTE
                                           Use a tar remover to remove          wipe them off immediately.
 S Use only a mild soap or neutral         grease and tar.
   detergent and always use a sponge     S The brushes used in some auto-       J Cleaning the Upholstery and
   or soft cloth to clean the wheels.      matic car washes may damage the         Interior Trim
   Rinse thoroughly with lukewarm          finish on your wheels. Before
   or cold water. Also, be sure to         going to a car wash, find out if     t Vinyl
   clean the wheels after driving on       the brushes are abrasive.            Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
   salted roads. This helps prevent      S If your aluminum wheels lose         with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
   corrosion.                              luster, wax the wheels.              Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl
                         (Continued)                                            cleaner.




7-10
                                                                                                               Appearance Care


Be careful when you apply any cleaner to    t Leather                                     To clean a cloth interior, complete the
the vinyl surfaces. Some cleaners will                                                    following steps:
change the gloss (shine) and should be      Real leather isn’t uniform and may have
                                            scars, scratches, and wrinkles. Clean it      1. Remove any excess staining materials
avoided.                                                                                     from the fabric by scraping or wiping
                                            with a leather cleaner or mild soap.
1. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface                                                    with a clean cloth.
   with a soft, damp cloth.                 Wipe it with a damp soft cloth; then dry
                                            and buff it with a dry soft cloth.            2. Identify the cause of the stain if you
2. For a more thorough cleaning, wipe                                                        can.
   the surface with a soft cloth and mild   t Fabric                                      3. Depending on what type of stain you
   detergent and a vinyl cleaner. Do not    Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric           have, use one of the two procedures
   use solvent-type cleaners such as spot   with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.            that follow.
   remover or powder-type spot lifter on    Remove fresh spots immediately.
   these materials.                                                                       Before using any cleaner, test it on a
                                            To keep the fabric looking clean and          small, hidden area of fabric. If the fabric’s
3. Wipe the surface clean with a damp,                                                    color or texture is adversely affected by a
   soft cloth.                              fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color
                                            will be affected, it can be stained easily,   particular cleaner, do not use the cleaner.
4. Then, dry and buff the surface with a    and its fire-resistance may be reduced.       For water soluble stains, try using a damp
   dry, soft cloth.                                                                       cloth first, followed by a soft cloth with
                                                                                          a mild detergent and water.



                                                                                                                               7-11
Appearance Care


For grease, oil, tar, water spots, crayon,     6. Rub in a circular motion, keeping a       For dirt, dry soil, food, soda, and coffee
and lipstick stains:                              clean portion of the cloth in contact     stains:
1. Apply soil and spot lifter to the soiled       with the fabric.
                                                                                            1. Apply upholstery cleaner to the soiled
   area.                                       7. Gradually widen the area as you rub.         area. Follow the directions that come
2. Brush powder into fabric using more                                                         with the cleaner.
                                              If the stain requires that you use a large
   gentle strokes with more delicate          amount of cleaner, clean the entire seat so   2. Scrub area with a damp cloth or
   fabrics. Use dry terry cloth for very      that a ring does not appear where the stain      sponge.
   delicate fabrics.                          was.
3. Allow cleaner to work at least 20 min-                                                   3. Gradually widen the areas as you rub.
   utes, then vacuum up powder.                8. Repeat steps 5 through 7, as neces-
                                                  sary.                                     If the stain requires that you use a large
4. Repeat, if necessary, or go to step 5.                                                   amount of cleaner, clean the entire seat so
                                               9. Wipe clean with a damp cloth to           that a ring does not appear where the stain
If the stain is still visible:                    remove any remaining cleaner.             was.
5. Blot the stain with a clean, white         10. Allow the material to dry completely.
   cotton cloth that is saturated with
   a stain remover.




7-12
                                                                                                     Appearance Care


4. Wipe immediately with a dry cloth.   J Cleaning the Seat Belt Webbing         J Cleaning the Window Interiors
5. Allow upholstery to dry completely   Clean the webbing with a mild soap       If the windows become covered with an
   before using.                        solution recommended for upholstery      oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them
                                        or carpets. Follow instructions. Don’t   with glass cleaner. Follow the directions
                                        bleach or dye the webbing; this may      on the container.
            CAUTION                     weaken it.
                                                                                 J Cleaning the Instrument Panel
 Use only recommended cleaners
 and procedures. Others may affect                  WARNING                      Any cleaner or polish that increases the
 appearance and fire-resistance.                                                 gloss (shine) of the upper part of the
                                         Damaged Seat Belt:                      instrument panel should be avoided. The
                                         Using damaged seat belts is danger-     dull finish in this area is to help protect
                                         ous. In a collision, damaged seat       the driver from undesirable windshield
                                         belts cannot provide adequate pro-      reflection.
                                         tection. Have your authorized Mazda
                                         dealer replace damaged belts imme-
                                         diately.




                                                                                                                    7-13
Appearance Care


J Cleaning the Instrument Panel            J Cleaning the Interior Plastic
   Lens                                       Lights
Clean the instrument panel lens with a     The interior dome lights and map lights
soft cloth and glass cleaner. Do not use   are plastic and should be cleaned with a
a paper towel or an abrasive cleaner       mild detergent diluted in water. Rinse
to clean the lens as these may cause       them with clear water. Do not clean the
scratches.                                 interior lights with abrasive cleaners that
                                           could scratch the lights. Do not wipe them
                                           when they are dry as this can also scratch
                                           them. Do not use fuel, commercial tar
                                           remover or strong detergents as these
                                           products could crack the lights.




7-14
    Maintenance
8   Because your Mazda is a large piece of intricate machinery, it needs regular care in the form of
    maintenance and servicing. Many owners prefer to do much of this work themselves.
    Section 8 has been prepared as a guide for the operator who wants to self-service such minor jobs as
    changing the engine oil, replacing bulbs and wiper blades, charging the battery, and rotating the tires.
    All maintenance schedules are included, along with instructions on how to make regular inspections
    of such things as fluid levels.




                                                                                 Introduction         8- 2
                                                                      Scheduled Maintenance           8- 3
                                                                          Owner Maintenance           8- 9
                                                                     Bulb Replacement (Front)         8-52
                                                                     Bulb Replacement (Rear)          8-54

                                                                                                               8-1
Maintenance

Introduction
Be extremely careful to prevent injury to   parts that have been designed and made        A claim against a warranty will not qual-
yourself and others and damage to your      especially for your Mazda, inadequate,        ify if it results from lack of maintenance
vehicle when using this manual for          incomplete, and insufficient servicing        and not from defective material or autho-
inspection and maintenance.                 may result in problems. This could lead to    rized Mazda workmanship.
                                            vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
If you’re unsure about any procedure it                                                   Any auto repair shop using parts equiva-
describes, we strongly urge you to have a   For expert advice and quality service,        lent to your Mazda’s original equipment
reliable and qualified service shop per-    consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.           may perform maintenance. But we rec-
form the work, preferably an Authorized                                                   ommend that it always be done by
Mazda Dealer.                               The owner should retain evidence that         an Authorized Mazda Dealer using
                                            proper maintenance has been performed         genuine Mazda parts.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and       as prescribed.
genuine Mazda parts are best for your
vehicle. Without this expertise and the




8-2
                                                                                                         Maintenance

Scheduled Maintenance
Follow Schedule I if the vehicle is oper-   S Operating in hot weather in stop-
ated mainly where none of the following       and-go ‘‘rush hour’’ traffic.        NOTE
conditions apply. If any do apply, follow                                          After 120 months or 120,000 miles
Schedule II.                                S Extended periods of idling or low-
                                              speed operation.                     (193,000 km), continue to follow the
S Repeated short-distance driving.                                                 prescribed maintenance and intervals
                                            S High-speed operation with a fully    periodically.
S Driving in dusty conditions.                loaded vehicle.
S Towing a trailer.                         S Off-road operation.




                                                                                                                    8-3
Maintenance


Schedule I — Normal Driving Conditions/Emission Control Systems
R: Replace. I: Inspect, and, if necessary, repair, clean or replace.
Normal driving service intervals — perform at the months or distances shown, whichever occurs first.
 MAINTENANCE                     Miles (Thousands)   5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60      65   70   75   80   85   90   95 100 105 110 115 120
 OPERATION                 Kilometers (Thousands)    8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 168 176 184 192
 Emission Control Systems
 Change engine oil and replace filter—every
 6 months OR                                         R R R R R R R R R R           R   R     R    R    R    R    R    R    R   R   R   R   R   R
 Replace spark plugs*                                                                                                          R
 Replace green engine coolant initially at
 45,000 miles, then replace every 30,000 miles                               R                         R                           R
 Check engine coolant condition and protection,
 hoses and clamps annually—prior to cold                   I        I        I          I              I              I            I           I
 weather every 12 months
 Replace air cleaner filter                                         R                  R                              R                        R
 Replace PCV valve (2.5L) *2                                                           R*2                                                     R
 Replace PCV valve (3.0L/4.0L)                                                                                                 R
 Inspect steering linkage, ball joints,
 suspension and driveshaft                                 I        I        I          I              I              I            I           I
 Inspect camshaft drive belt tension (2.5L)                                                                                                    I
 Inspect accessory drive belts                                                                                                 I
Refer to footnotes on following page.

8-4
                                                                                                                                                       Maintenance


Schedule I — Normal Driving Conditions (Continued)/Other Systems
  MAINTENANCE                  Miles (Thousands)    5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
  OPERATION              Kilometers (Thousands)     8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 168 176 184 192
 Other Systems
 Inspect tires for wear and rotate
 (X = recommended interval for                      I   X    I   X X      I   X X      I   X    X     I    X    X     I    X     X     I    X    X     I    X     X     I
 optimal tire life)
 Inspect front wheel bearings for end play
 (4x2 only)                                                               I                           I                                I                                I
 Lubricate front wheel bearings (4x2 only)                                                            I                                                                 I
 Inspect disc brake system                                   I            I            I              I               I                I               I                I
 Inspect drum brake systems, lines and hoses                 I            I            I              I               I                I               I                I
 Inspect exhaust system for leaks, damage or
 loose parts                                                              I                           I                                I                                I
* Refer to Vehicle Emission Control Information for Spark Plug and Gap Specifications.
*2 At 60,000 miles (96 000 km), your dealer will replace the PCV valve at no cost, except California vehicles.
*3 If vehicle is registered in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
   warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at
   the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
Rear axles are lubricated for life. These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required, or the axle assembly has
been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed anytime the axle has been submerged in water. For police and taxi applications, replace rear
axle lubricant every 100,000 miles (160,000 km). Rear axle lubricant change may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant. Add
four ounces of additive friction modifier or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear axles.


                                                                                                                                                                      8-5
Maintenance


Schedule I — Normal Driving Conditions (Continued)/Other Systems
  MAINTENANCE                   Miles (Thousands)   5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
  OPERATION               Kilometers (Thousands)    8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 168 176 184 192
 Replace manual transmission fluid                                                                   R                                                                 R
 Inspect automatic transmission fluid                        I            I            I             I                I                I               I               I
 Inspect and lubricate 4x2 ball joints                       I            I            I             I                I                I               I               I
 Inspect and remove any foreign material
 trapped by exhaust system shielding                                      I                           I                                I                                I
 Inspect parking brake system for damage
 and operation                                               I            I            I              I               I                I               I                I
 Replace transfer case fluid (4x4)                                                                   R                                                                 R
 Change fuel filter *3                                             R                                 R                                R                                R
* Refer to Vehicle Emission Control Information for Spark Plug and Gap Specifications.
*2 At 60,000 miles (96 000 km), your dealer will replace the PCV valve at no cost, except California vehicles.
*3 If vehicle is registered in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
   warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at
   the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
Rear axles are lubricated for life. These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required, or the axle assembly has
been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed anytime the axle has been submerged in water. For police and taxi applications, replace rear
axle lubricant every 100,000 miles (160,000 km). Rear axle lubricant change may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant. Add
four ounces of additive friction modifier or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear axles.


8-6
                                                                                                          Maintenance


Schedule II — Special Operating            S High speed operation with a fully     can be often misleading when deter-
Conditions                                   loaded vehicle (max. GVW).            mining the right time to change
If your driving habits FREQUENTLY          S Off-road operation.                   your engine oil and filter. If you are
include one or more of the following                                               using your vehicle in a manner which
                                           Change ENGINE OIL AND OIL               allows it to remain stationary while
conditions:                                FILTER every 3 months or 3,000 miles    the engine is running for long periods
S Short trips of less than 10 miles        (4,800 km) whichever occurs first.      (door-to-door delivery, taxi, police,
  (16 km) when outside temperatures                                                power/utility company trucks, or
  remain below freezing.                    NOTE                                   similar duty), then Mazda recom-
                                                                                   mends you increase the frequency of
S Towing a trailer, or carrying maxi-                                              oil and filter changes to an interval
                                            Idling the engine for extended peri-
  mum loads.                                                                       equivalent to 200 ENGINE HOURS
                                            ods will accumulate more hours of
S Operating in severe dust conditions.      use on your vehicle than is actually   of use. Since most vehicles are not
                                            indicated by the mileage odometer.     equipped with hour-meters, it may
S Operating during hot weather in           Consequently, the odometer reading     be necessary for you to approximate
  stop-and-go ‘‘rush-hour’’ traffic.                                               your idle time and plan oil/filter
                                                                    (Continued)
S Extensive idling, such as police, taxi                                           changes accordingly.
  or door-to-door delivery service.



                                                                                                                      8-7
Maintenance


Schedule II — Special Operating Conditions




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Change Manual Transmission Fluid
                                                                                                                                        Change Automatic Transmission Fluid




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Inspect and Lubricate U-Joints
                                                      Replace Engine Oil and Filter




                                                                                                                                                                                                         Replace Engine Air Filter
                                                                                       Inspect Brake System




                                                                                                                                                                                Replace Spark Plugs




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Change Brake Fluid
 Special Operating Conditions




                                                                                                                Replace Fuel Filter
                                                  3,000 miles                         5,000                   15,000                  30,000                                  60,000                    As                              As                                    As                                 Every
 Suggested Maintenance Interval                   or 3 months                         miles                    miles                   miles                                   miles                  required                       required                              required                            two years
 Towing a trailer or using a camper or
 car top carrier                                    X                                      X                                                                                                                                           X                                      X
 Extensive idling or low-speed driving for
 long distances as in heavy commercial
 use such as delivery, taxi or patrol car           X            X            X            X                                                                                    X
 Operating in dusty conditions such as
 unpaved or dusty roads                             X                         X            X                                                                                                            X
 Off road operation                                                                        X                                                                                                                                                                                  X
For specific recommendations see your authorized Mazda dealer or qualified service professional.

8-8
                                                                                                                  Maintenance

Owner Maintenance
J Owner Maintenance Schedule                 S Check for vibrations in the steering         increased brake pedal travel or ‘‘hard
                                               wheel. Notice any increased steering         to push’’ brake pedal.
The owner or a qualified service techni-       effort or looseness in the steering
cian should make these vehicle inspec-         wheel, or change in its straight ahead    S If any slipping or changes in the
tions at the indicated intervals to ensure     position.                                   operation of your transmission occur,
safe and dependable operation.                                                             check the transmission fluid level.
                                             S Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
Bring any problem to the attention of an       slightly or ‘‘pulls’’ to one side when    S Check automatic transmission Park
Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified           traveling on a smooth, level road.          function.
service technician as soon as possible.
                                             S When stopping, listen and check for       S Check parking brake.
t While operating your vehicle                 strange sounds, pulling to one side,
S Note any changes in the sound of the
  exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
  in the vehicle.




                                                                                                                            8-9
Maintenance


t At least monthly                        t At least twice a year (for example,      S Check lap/shoulder belts and seat
                                            every spring and fall)                     latches for wear and function (page
S Check function of all interior and                                                   2-19).
  exterior lights.                        S Check power steering fluid level
                                            (page 8-31).                             S Check air pressure in spare tire.
S Check tires for wear and proper air
  pressure (page 8-40).                   S Check clutch fluid level (if equipped)   S Check windshield washer spray and
                                            (page 8-30).                               wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
S Check engine oil level (page 8-18).                                                  with clean cloth dampened with
                                          S Check and clean body and door drain
S Check coolant level in the coolant        holes.
                                                                                       washer fluid.
  reservoir (page 8-23).                                                             S Check safety warning lamps (brake,
                                          S Check and lubricate all hinges,
S Check washer fluid level (page 8-36).     latches, and outside locks.
                                                                                       ABS, air bag, safety belt) for opera-
                                                                                       tion.
                                          S Check and lubricate door rubber          S Check cooling system fluid level and
                                            weather strips.                            coolant strength.
                                          S Check parking brake for proper           S Check battery water level (non-main-
                                            operation (page 5-40).                     tenance free).
                                                                                     S Check battery connections and clean
                                                                                       if necessary.

8-10
                                                                                                          Maintenance


J Owner Maintenance                                                               Several procedures may be more easily
   Precautions                                        WARNING                     done by a qualified service technician
                                                                                  with special tools.
Improper or incomplete service may         Maintenance Procedures:
result in problems. This section gives     Performing maintenance work on a       Improper owner maintenance during the
instructions only for items easy to per-   vehicle can be dangerous. You can      warranty period may affect warranty cov-
form.                                      be seriously injured while perform-    erage. For details, read the separate
                                           ing some maintenance procedures.       Mazda Warranty statement provided with
                                           If you lack sufficient knowledge and   the vehicle. If you’re unsure about any
                                           experience or the proper tools and     servicing or maintenance procedure,
                                           equipment to do the work, have it      have it done by an Authorized Mazda
                                           done by a qualified technician.        Dealer.




                                                                                                                   8-11
Maintenance


                                        S Set the parking brake fully, and
            WARNING                       make sure that the gearshift is
 Running the Engine:                      securely latched in P (Park)
                                          (automatic transmission) or N
 S Working under the hood with the        and block the wheels. This will
   engine running is dangerous. It        prevent your vehicle from mov-
   becomes even more dangerous            ing unexpectedly.
   when you wear jewelry or loose
   clothing. Either can become          S Do not start your engine with the
   entangled in moving parts and          air cleaner removed and do not
   result in injury. Therefore, if        remove it while the engine is
   you must run the engine while          running.
   working under the hood, make
   certain that you remove all jew-
   elry (especially rings, bracelets,
   watches, and necklaces) and all
   neckties, scarves, and similar
   loose clothing before getting
   near the engine or cooling fan.
                        (Continued)

8-12
                                Maintenance


J Engine Compartment Overview




                                  *Some models.

                                       8-13
Maintenance




*Some models.

8-14
Maintenance




  *Some models.

       8-15
Maintenance


                                         Look for the American Petroleum Insti-        Do not use supplemental engine oil addi-
                                         tute certification mark on the front of the   tives, oil treatments or engine treatments.
                                         oil container. Motor oil displaying the       They are unnecessary and could, under
                                         API certification trademark will meet all     certain conditions, lead to engine damage
                                         requirements for your vehicle’s engine.       which is not covered by your warranty.
                                         Engine oil viscosity, or thickness, has
                                         an effect on fuel economy and cold-                         CAUTION
                                         weather operation (starting and oil
                                         flow). Low-viscosity engine oils can pro-       Using oils of viscosity besides those
                                         vide improved fuel economy and cold-            recommended for specific tempera-
                                         weather performance.                            ture ranges could result in engine
J Engine Oil                                                                             damage.
                                         High-temperature weather conditions
                                         require higher-viscosity engine oils for
t Recommended oil
                                         satisfactory lubrication.
Oil container labels provide important
                                         Use SAE 5W-30 motor oil certified for
information.
                                         gasoline engines by the American Petro-
                                         leum Institute.



8-16
                                                                                                                     Maintenance


Energy conserving oils are recom-             If this happens, follow this procedure:       3. Add only as much oil as necessary
mended. A chief contribution they make                                                         before you start the engine again.
to fuel economy is reducing the amount        1. Drive safely to the side of the road and      Refer to ‘‘Adding Engine Oil’’ in this
of fuel necessary to overcome engine fric-       park off the right-of-way. Set an auto-       section.
tion.                                            matic transmission in P (Park), a
                                                 manual transmission in N (Neutral).
J Engine Oil Pressure Gauge                      Apply the parking brake. Turn the
                                                 engine off. Allow it to reach normal
This gauge indicates whether or not there        operating temperature.
is adequate oil pressure. If the engine is
running the pointer should be in the cen-     2. Check the engine’s oil level, follow-
ter band, indicating adequate oil pressure.      ing the instructions on inspecting
If the pointer drops below or remains            engine oil level later in this section.
below the center band while the engine           If you do not follow these instruc-
is running, you have inadequate oil pres-        tions, you or others could be injured.
sure.                                            To assure an accurate reading, your
                                                 vehicle should be on level ground.




                                                                                                                              8-17
Maintenance


                                                                                       6. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,
                                                                                          and reinsert it fully. Refer to Engine
                                                                                          Compartment Overview for dipstick
                                                                                          location.
                                                                                       7. Pull it out again and examine the level.
                                                                                          It’s OK if it’s within the crosshatched
                                                                                          area.
                                                                                          But if it’s near or at the bottom of the
                                                                                          crosshatched area, add enough oil to
                                                                                          bring the level to MAX (2.5L) or
                                                                                          FULL (3.0L/4.0L).
t Inspecting engine oil level               4. Set the parking brake fully and make
                                               sure that the gearshift is securely        It may be necessary to add some oil
1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level sur-      latched in P (Park) (automatic trans-      between oil changes. Make sure you
   face.                                       mission) or 1 (First) (manual trans-       use a certified engine oil of the pre-
2. Warm up the engine to normal operat-        mission).                                  ferred viscosity. Your vehicle’s war-
   ing temperature.                                                                       ranty coverage may not apply if
                                            5. Open the hood. Protect yourself from       engine damage is caused by the use of
3. Turn if off and wait a few minutes for      engine heat.                               improper engine oil.
   the oil to return to the oil pan.

8-18
                                                                                                                    Maintenance


t Adding Engine Oil                                                                       t Changing engine oil and filter
1. Check the engine oil.
                                                            CAUTION                       Change engine oil and filter according
                                                To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT        to Scheduled Maintenance, pages 8-4
2. If fluid level is not within the normal                                                through 8-8.
   range, add only certified engine oil of      operate the vehicle with the engine oil
   the preferred viscosity. Add engine oil      level indicator and/or the engine oil     Please act responsibly—protect the envi-
   through the oil filler cap. Remove the       filler cap removed.                       ronment and take used oil to a recycling
   filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil                                                facility. Ask your dealer or a service sta-
   in the opening.                                                                        tion for information.
3. Recheck the oil level. Make sure
                                                            CAUTION
   the oil level is not above the MAX           Overfilling with engine oil will dam-                   WARNING
   (2.5L) mark or the letter F in FULL          age your engine.
   (3.0L/4.0L) on the dipstick.                                                             Used Engine Oil:
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is                                                   Continuous contact with USED
   fully seated.                                                                            engine oil has caused skin cancer
                                                                                            in laboratory mice. Protect your skin
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by                                               by washing with soap and water
   turning the filler cap clockwise until                                                   immediately after this work.
   three clicks can be heard.

                                                                                                                             8-19
Maintenance


                                               2. Protect yourself from engine heat and
                                                  the engine oil being drained.
                                               3. Then remove the drain plug and drain
                                                  the oil into a suitable container.


                                                            WARNING
                                                Checking or Changing Engine Oil:
                                                Hot engine oil could be dangerous.
                                                If the engine has been running, the
                                                engine oil becomes very hot. You
1. Warm up the engine for a few minutes         could be seriously burned. Don’t          4. Remove the engine oil filter with an
   and turn it off after it has reached nor-    check or change the engine oil when          oil-filter wrench.
   mal operating temperature. Set the           the engine is hot.                        5. Use a clean rag to clean the surface
   parking brake fully and latch the gear                                                    where the filter mounts on the engine.
   selector in P (Park) (automatic trans-
   mission), or 1 (First) (manual trans-                                                  6. Apply a small amount of engine oil to
   mission). Block the wheels. Remove                                                        the rubber seal of a new oil filter.
   the oil filler cap.


8-20
                                                                                                                        Maintenance


                                               10. Securely replace the oil filler cap.    Oil capacity
                                               11. Start the engine and inspect around     2.5L
                                                   the oil filter seal for leaks.                               US qt    Imp qt   Liter
                                               12. Turn engine off and wait 5 minutes      with oil filter       4.5      3.8     4.3
                                                   for the oil to return to the oil pan.   without oil filter    4.0      3.4     3.8
                                               Check the oil level and fill to the Full
                                               mark if necessary.                          3.0L
                                                                                                                US qt    Imp qt   Liter
                                                                                           with oil filter       4.5      3.8     4.3

7. Install the new filter and tighten it.                                                  without oil filter    4.0      3.4     3.8
   (Refer to the caution label on the oil
   filter for tightening instructions.)                                                    4.0L
                                                                                                                US qt    Imp qt   Liter
8. Replace the plug(s) tightly after the oil
   has thoroughly drained.                                                                 with oil filter       5.0      4.2     4.7
9. Fill the engine with new oil to the                                                     without oil filter    4.0      3.4     3.8
   MAX (2.5L) or FULL (3.0L/4.0L)
   mark on the dipstick.

                                                                                                                                  8-21
Maintenance



                                          J Engine Coolant
 NOTE
 Use only specified engine oil (page                 WARNING
 8-16).
                                           Hot Engine:
                                           A hot engine is dangerous. If the
                                           engine has been running, parts
             CAUTION                       of the engine compartment can
 S Follow these instructions care-         become very hot. You could be
   fully. An incorrectly installed fil-    burned. Don’t inspect the coolant
   ter can cause leakage and engine        system or add coolant when the
   damage.                                 engine is hot.
 S Although oil filters may look the
   same, they may be very different
   inside. They are not interchange-
   able. To avoid engine damage,
   use only specified filters.




8-22
                                                                                                                         Maintenance


t Inspecting coolant level                    protection and to bring the level to the         t Severe climate
Inspect the antifreeze protection and         appropriate level marks on the coolant
                                              reservoir when the engine is cool.               If you drive in extremely cold climates
coolant level at least once a month, at the                                                    (less than –34_F [–36_C]), it may be nec-
beginning of the winter season and before     When the engine is cool, add a 50/50 mix-        essary to increase the coolant concentra-
traveling where temperatures may drop         ture of engine coolant and water to the          tion above 50%. Refer to the chart on the
below freezing.                               engine coolant reservoir—DO NOT                  coolant container to ensure the coolant
Inspect the condition and connections         ADD DIRECTLY TO THE RADIA-                       concentration in your vehicle is such that
of all cooling system and heater hoses.       TOR. Add straight water only in an emer-         the coolant will not freeze at the tempera-
Replace any that are swollen or deterio-      gency, but you should replace it with a          ture level in which you drive during win-
rated.                                        50/50 mixture of coolant and distilled           ter months. Never increase the engine
                                              water as soon as possible.                       coolant concentration above 60%. If you
The coolant should be at full in the radia-                                                    drive in extremely hot climates, it is
tor and to the appropriate level marks on     Check the coolant level in the coolant res-      necessary to maintain the coolant con-
the coolant reservoir when the engine is      ervoir the next few times you drive the          centration above 40%. Refer to the chart
cool.                                         vehicle. If necessary, add enough of a           on the coolant container to ensure the
                                              50/50 mixture of coolant and water to            coolant concentration in your vehicle will
If coolant level is low, add enough cool-     bring the liquid level to the fill line on the
ant to provide freezing and corrosion         reservoir.



                                                                                                                                  8-23
Maintenance


provide adequate protection at the tem-                                               t Changing coolant at the proper
peratures in which you drive. Never                      WARNING                        intervals
decrease the coolant concentration below
40% to prevent possible engine damage.        The engine coolant must be main-        Change coolant according to Scheduled
Leave a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant       tained at the correct fluid level and   Maintenance, page 8-4.
and water in your vehicle year-round in       concentration to work properly. If
non-extreme climates.                         the engine coolant fluid level and
                                              concentration are not maintained
Do not overfill.                              correctly, damage to the engine and
If new coolant is required frequently, con-   cooling system may result.
sult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Have
your dealer check the engine cooling sys-
tem for leaks if you have to add more than
1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
                                                         CAUTION
month.                                        Radiator coolant will damage paint.
                                              Rinse it off quickly.




8-24
                                                                                                    Maintenance



                                      S Do not use supplemental coolant
           CAUTION                      additives in your vehicle. These                 WARNING
S The use of an improper coolant        additives may harm your engine       Removing the Radiator Cap:
  may void your warranty of your        cooling system.
                                                                             Removing the radiator cap or drain
  vehicle’s engine cooling system.    S Don’t use a solution that contains   plug while the engine is running is
S Do not use an extended life           more than 60 percent or less than    dangerous. This might lead to cool-
  engine coolant (orange in color).     40 percent antifreeze. This would    ing system and engine damage and
                                        reduce effectiveness.
S Do not use a DEX-COOL engine                                               could result in serious injury from
  coolant or an equivalent engine     S Do not add windshield washer         escaping hot coolant or steam.
  coolant.                              fluid to the engine coolant reser-
                                                                             Be careful when adding engine
                                        voir. This could damage your
S DO NOT USE alcohol or metha-          cooling system.
                                                                             coolant. Do not put engine coolant
  nol antifreeze. DO NOT MIX                                                 or antifreeze in the container for the
  alcohol or methanol with the                                               windshield washer fluid. If sprayed
  coolant. This could damage the                                             to clean the glass, engine coolant or
  cooling system.                                                            antifreeze could make it difficult to
                      (Continued)                                            see through the windshield.
                                                                                                      (Continued)



                                                                                                              8-25
Maintenance



 Never remove the radiator cap while     To Change Coolant
 the engine is running or hot.
                                          NOTE
 If you must remove the radiator cap,
 follow these steps to avoid personal     Do not mix conventional green cool-
 injury that can be caused by escap-      ant, orange coolant or recycled cool-
 ing steam or engine coolant.             ants together in your vehicle. Use
 Turn off the engine and wait until       only the type of coolant that your
 it’s cool. Even then, be very careful    vehicle was originally equipped
 when removing the cap. Wrap a thick      with. If you are unsure which type of
 cloth around it and slowly turn it       coolant your vehicle requires, contact
 counterclockwise to the first stop.      your authorized Mazda dealer.
 Step back while the pressure escapes.                                             1. Shut off the engine and allow engine
                                                                                      to cool. Fully depressurize the engine
 When you’re sure all the pressure is                                                 cooling system by covering the radia-
 gone, press down on the cap—still                                                    tor cap with a thick cloth and turning
 using a cloth—turn it, and remove it.                                                it slowly to the first stop. Step back
 Stand away from the radiator open-                                                   while the pressure releases.
 ing. Hot steam may blow out or hot
 engine coolant may even splash out.                                               2. Remove the radiator cap.


8-26
                                                                                                                     Maintenance


3. Only when the engine is cool, attach a                                                      In extremely cold climates, add the
   small hose to the drain tube at the bot-                                                    amount recommended in the coolant
   tom of the radiator. Loosen the radia-                                                      manufacturer’s instructions.
   tor drain plug. Drain the coolant into
   a suitable container.                                                                    6. Replace the radiator cap to its fully
                                                                                               installed position, then back it off to
4. With the drain plug loose but not fully                                                     the first stop. This will prevent high
   removed, flush out the system with                                                          pressure from building up in the cool-
   running water.                                                                              ing system during this part of the pro-
                                                                                               cedure.


                                              5. Drain the system completely and
                                                 retighten the plug. Add a 50/50 mix-
                                                 ture of coolant and water as necessary
                                                 to provide freezing and corrosion
                                                 protection. When cold, fill the radiator
                                                 to a level 1 to 1 1/2 inches (25 to 38
                                                 mm) below the filler neck seat.



                                                                                                                               8-27
Maintenance


7. Start and idle the engine until the ther-                                                 2. Visually inspect the fluid level.
   mostat opens and the radiator upper
   hose becomes warm.                                                                        3. If necessary, add brake fluid until the
                                                                                                level reaches MAX. Do not fill above
8. Shut off the engine immediately.                                                             this line.
   Cover the radiator cap with a thick
   cloth and cautiously remove it. Step                                                      4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid certified
   back while the pressure releases.                                                            to meet Mazda specifications. Refer to
                                                                                                Section 10.
 9. Finally, check the radiator and add
    more engine coolant if needed, fol-
    lowing the procedures noted above.                                                                     CAUTION
    Reinstall the radiator cap securely                                                        Brake fluid will damage painted sur-
    when finished.                             J Inspecting the Brake Fluid                    faces. If brake fluid does get on a
                                                  Level                                        painted surface, wipe it off immedi-
10. If more engine coolant is needed,
    fill the overflow reservoir to the         Brake fluid should be checked and               ately.
    appropriate level marked on the            refilled as needed at least once each year:
    bottle.
                                               1. Clean the reservoir cap before
                                                  removal to prevent dirt or water from
                                                  entering the reservoir.

8-28
                                                                                                     Maintenance



           CAUTION                                 WARNING                                 WARNING
Using nonspecified brake fluids (see    Spilled Brake Fluid:                    Low Brake Fluid Levels:
chart, page 10-2) will damage the       Spilled brake fluid is dangerous. If    S Low brake fluid levels could be
system. Mixing different fluids will    it gets in your eyes, they could be       dangerous. Low levels could sig-
also damage it.                         seriously injured. If this happens,       nal brake lining wear or a leak.
If the brake system frequently          immediately flush your eyes with          Your brakes could fail and cause
requires new fluid, consult an Autho-   water and get medical attention.          an accident. If you find a low
rized Mazda Dealer.                     Brake fluid spilled on a hot engine       fluid level, have the brakes
                                        could cause a fire. Be careful not to     inspected.
                                        spill brake fluid on yourself or on     S Do not let the brake fluid reser-
                                        the engine.                               voir run dry. This may cause the
                                                                                  brakes to fail.




                                                                                                              8-29
Maintenance


                                              Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to
                                              meet Mazda specifications.                            CAUTION
                                              1. Clean the reservoir cap before          Clutch fluid will damage painted sur-
                                                 removal to prevent dirt and water       faces. If clutch fluid does get
                                                 from entering the reservoir.            on a painted surface, wipe it off
                                              2. Remove cap and rubber diaphragm         immediately.
                                                 from reservoir.
                                              3. Add fluid until the level reaches the              CAUTION
                                                 step in the reservoir.
                                                                                         Using nonspecified clutch fluids
                                              4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and cap      (see chart, page 10-2) will damage
J Inspecting Clutch Fluid Level*                 onto reservoir.                         the system. Mixing different fluids
During normal operation, the fluid level                                                 will also damage it.
in the clutch reservoir should remain                                                    If the clutch system frequently
constant. If for any reason the fluid level                                              requires new fluid, it should be
drops, maintain the fluid level at the step                                              inspected. Consult an Authorized
in the reservoir body.                                                                   Mazda Dealer immediately.
*Some models.


8-30
                                                                                                                Maintenance



                                        J Inspecting Power Steering
           WARNING                         Fluid Level
Spilled Clutch Fluid:                   Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir at
Spilled clutch fluid is dangerous. If   least twice a year (i.e., every spring and
it gets in your eyes, they could be     fall). Although you may check the fluid
seriously injured. If this happens,     when it is hot or cold, you should check
immediately flush your eyes with        it when hot, if possible, for a more accu-
water and get medical attention.        rate reading.
Clutch fluid spilled on a hot engine    If you check the power steering fluid
could cause a fire. Be careful not to   when it is cold, make sure the fluid
spill clutch fluid on yourself or on    reaches the FULL COLD range on the
the engine.                                                                           The level must be kept between the FULL
                                        dipstick. The reading will only be accu-
                                                                                      HOT and FULL COLD marks.
                                        rate if the fluid temperature is approxi-
                                        mately 50 to 85_F (10 to 30_C).               Do not add fluid if the level is within the
NOTE                                                                                  FULL HOT range.
                                        Visually examine the lines and hoses for
Low clutch fluid level may signal a     leaks and damage.
fluid leak. If you find a low fluid
level, have the clutch inspected.

                                                                                                                         8-31
Maintenance


1. Park on a level surface, well off the
   right-of-way, and set the parking
   brake firmly. Start the engine and let it
   run until the power steering fluid
   reaches normal operating tempera-
   ture. The power steering fluid will be
   at the right temperature when the
   engine coolant temperature gauge
   indicator will be near the center of the
   normal area between H and C.
2. While the engine idles, turn the steer-
   ing wheel back and forth several            4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick.   7. The fluid level must be at FULL HOT.
   times. Make sure the cap assembly is           The fluid level should be at the FULL       Add fluid if necessary. Do not add
   installed at this time.                        HOT range.                                  fluid if the level is within the FULL
3. Turn off the engine.                                                                       HOT range.
                                               5. Wipe it clean and put it back.
                                                                                           Don’t overfill.
                                               6. Remove the dipstick again and inspect
                                                  the level.


8-32
                                                                                                               Maintenance


                                                                                     J Inspecting Automatic
                                                        CAUTION                         Transmission Fluid Level*
                                            To avoid damage to the power steer-      The automatic transmission fluid level
                                            ing oil pump, don’t operate the          needs to be inspected under normal cir-
                                            vehicle for long periods when the        cumstances. Measure it as described
                                            power steering fluid level is low.       below.
                                                                                     The transmission fluid should be checked
                                            NOTE                                     at normal operating temperatures 150_F
                                                                                     to 170_F (66_C to 77_C).
                                            Use only specified power steering
                                            fluid (see chart, page 10-2).            Automatic transmission fluid expands
If new fluid is required frequently, con-                                            when warmed. For that reason, it is best to
sult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.                                                     examine the level after approximately 20
                                            NOTE                                     miles (32 km) of driving. If necessary,
                                                                                     however, it can also be inspected without
                                            Do not turn the steering wheel of your   driving, if outside temperatures are above
                                            vehicle with the engine off. It could
                                                                                     50_F (10_C).
                                            force power steering fluid out from
                                            the reservoir cap or in extreme cases,
                                            it could unseat the cap.                                               *Some models.


                                                                                                                        8-33
Maintenance



 NOTE                                                 CAUTION
 If the vehicle has been operated for
                                           S Low fluid level causes transmis-
 an extended period at high speeds, in
                                             sion slippage. Overfilling can
 city traffic during hot weather, or has
                                             cause foaming, loss of fluid, and
 been pulling a trailer, the vehicle
                                             malfunction.
 should be turned off for about 30
 minutes. This will allow the vehicle      S Use only specified fluid (page
 to cool before checking.                    10-2). A nonspecified fluid could
                                             result in transmission malfunc-
                                             tion and failure.
                                           S Do not drive your vehicle if the
                                             fluid level is below the bottom     1. Park on a level surface and set the
                                             hole on the dipstick and the out-      parking brake firmly.
                                             side bottom temperature is above    2. Idle the engine about two minutes.
                                             50_F (10_C).                           Push down on the brake pedal; move
                                                                                    the selector lever through all ranges
                                                                                    and set it at P (Park).



8-34
                                                                                                                Maintenance



                                                                                        5. If necessary, add fluid in .25L (1/2
             WARNING                                                                       pint) increments through the filler
                                                                                           tube until the level is correct.
 Sudden Vehicle Movement:
 Shifting the selector lever without                                                    6. If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
 first depressing the brake pedal is                                                       should be removed by a qualified
 dangerous. The vehicle could move                                                         technician.
 suddenly and cause an accident.
 Make sure the brake pedal is applied
 before shifting the selector.
                                                                                                     CAUTION
                                                                                         An overfill condition of transmission
3. With the engine still idling, wipe off                                                fluid may cause shift and/or engage-
   the dipstick handle, pull out the dip-   4. Pull it out again. At normal operating    ment concerns and/or possible dam-
   stick, wipe it clean, and put it back,      temperature, the level should be          age. Don’t overfill.
   making sure it is fully seated in the       within the crosshatched area on the
   filler tube.                                dipstick. If the vehicle has not been
                                               driven and the fluid is not at normal
                                               operating temperature, the fluid level
                                               should be between the two holes on
                                               the dipstick.

                                                                                                                         8-35
Maintenance



                                                                                       Before adding fluid, make sure the engine
 NOTE                                                                                  is turned off. Use special windshield
 Always dispose of used automotive                                                     washer fluid, rather than plain water,
 fluids in a responsible manner. Fol-                                                  because these special fluids contain addi-
 low your community’s standards for                                                    tives that dissolve road grime. Also,
 disposing of these types of fluids.                                                   washer fluid will not freeze in cold
 Call your local recycling center for                                                  weather.
 recycling automotive fluids.                                                          If you choose to use a windshield wash-
                                                                                       ing solution that must be mixed, follow
                                                                                       the manufacturer’s mixing instructions.
                                                                                       Improperly mixed solutions may freeze
                                                                                       unexpectedly.
                                        J Inspecting Washer Fluid Level
                                        Check the level of the windshield washer
                                        fluid every time you stop for fuel. The
                                        reservoir for washer fluid is located in the
                                        engine compartment.




8-36
                                                                                                            Maintenance



                                                                                   J Body Lubrication
            WARNING                                  WARNING                       All moving points of the body, such as
Washer Fluid:                            Freezing Washer Fluid:                    door and hood hinges and locks, should
Do not add the windshield washer         Before using the washer fluid in very     be lubricated each time the engine oil is
fluid to the engine coolant reservoir.   cold weather, warm up the wind-           changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on
This could damage your cooling           shield first by using the defroster. If   locks during cold weather.
system. Do not add engine coolant to     you do not warm up the windshield         Make sure the engine hood’s secondary
the washer fluid reservoir. This         first, the fluid may freeze and reduce    latch keeps the hood from opening when
could damage your wiper/washer           visibility when sprayed on the wind-      the primary latch is released.
system and could severely affect visi-   shield.
bility when sprayed on the wind-                                                   J Maintaining Wiper Blades
shield and may cause damage to
paint and body trim.
                                                                                                CAUTION
                                                                                    Hot waxes applied by automatic car
                                                                                    washes have been known to affect the
                                                                                    cleanability of windows.



                                                                                                                     8-37
Maintenance


Check the windshield wiper blades at          To make reaching the wiper blades easy,        J Replacing Windshield Wiper
least twice a year. Also check them when-     simply turn the ignition switch to ACC            Blade Assemblies
ever they seem less effective than usual.     and turn your wipers on. Wait for them to
                                              reach a vertical position and turn the igni-   When the wipers no longer clean well, the
Contamination of either the windshield        tion OFF. Do not move the wipers manu-         blades are probably worn or cracked.
or the blades with foreign matter can         ally. Moving the wipers manually may           Replace the wiper blade assemblies.
reduce wiper effectiveness. Common            damage them.
sources are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commercial car                                                                    CAUTION
washes.                                                     CAUTION                           To prevent damage to the wiper arms,
If the blades are not wiping properly,                                                        and other components, don’t move
                                                To prevent damage to the wiper
clean the window and blades with a good                                                       the wipers by hand.
                                                blades, don’t use gasoline, kerosene,
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse thor-
                                                paint thinner, or other solvents on or
oughly with clean water. Repeat if neces-
                                                near them.
sary.




8-38
                                                                                                               Maintenance


1. Pull the wiper arm away from the                                                    J Battery
   windshield and lock into the service                   CAUTION
   position.
2. Turn the blade at an angle from the
                                              To prevent damage to the windshield,                 WARNING
                                              don’t let the wiper arm fall on it.
   wiper arm. Push the lock pin with a                                                  Battery:
   screwdriver to release the blade and                                                 Batteries are dangerous. To avoid
   pull the wiper blade down toward the       NOTE                                      injury, pay careful attention to the
   windshield to remove it from the arm.                                                advice below.
                                              Install the blade so that the tabs are
3. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm      toward the bottom of the wiper arm.       Keep all flames, sparks, and lit
   and press it into place until a click is                                             smoking materials away from the
   heard.                                                                               battery. Battery cells contain hydro-
                                                                                        gen, a highly combustible gas.
                                                                                        Keep batteries, which contain
                                                                                        SULFURIC ACID, out of the reach
                                                                                        of children. Prevent battery contact
                                                                                        with skin, eyes, clothing, and the
                                                                                        vehicle.
                                                                                                                 (Continued)


                                                                                                                        8-39
Maintenance



 If electrolyte (battery fluid) gets into                                             S Rinse off spilled electrolyte immedi-
 your eyes, flush them with clean                                                       ately with a solution of water and bak-
 water for at least 15 minutes and                                                      ing soda.
 get immediate medical attention. If                                                  S If the vehicle will not be used for an
 possible, continue to apply water                                                      extended time, disconnect the battery
 with a sponge or cloth while on the                                                    cables.
 way to a doctor.
 If electrolyte gets on your skin, thor-                                              J Tires
 oughly wash the contacted area. If
 you feel pain or a burning sensa-                                                    For reasons of proper performance,
 tion, get medical attention immedi-                                                  safety, and better fuel economy, always
 ately.                                     To get the best service from a battery:   maintain recommended tire inflation
 When lifting a plastic-coated bat-                                                   pressures and stay within the recom-
 tery, excessive pressure on the end        S Keep it securely mounted.               mended load limits and weight distribu-
 walls could cause acid to spew                                                       tion.
                                            S Keep the top clean and dry.
 through the vent caps, resulting
 in personal injury. Lift the battery       S Keep terminals and connections
 with a carrier or with your hands on         clean, tight, and coated with petro-
 opposite corners.                            leum jelly or terminal grease.


8-40
                                                                                                           Maintenance




           WARNING                                  WARNING
Using Different Tire Types:             Using Wrong-Sized Tires:
Driving your vehicle with different     Using any other tire size or type than
types of tires is dangerous. It could   what is specified for your Mazda
cause poor handling and poor brak-      (page 10-9) may seriously affect
ing, leading to loss of control.        ride, handling, ground clearance,
Except when using the temporary         tire clearance, and speedometer cal-
spare tire, use only the same type      ibration. This could cause you to
tires (radial, bias-belted, bias-type   have an accident. Do not replace
tires) on all four wheels.              your tires with ‘‘high performance’’
                                        tires or larger-sized tires. Use only    t Tire inflation pressure
                                        tires that are the correct size speci-   Inspect all tire pressures monthly (includ-
                                        fied for your Mazda.                     ing the spare) when the tires are cold.
                                                                                 Maintain recommended pressures for the
                                                                                 best ride, top handling, and minimum tire
                                                                                 wear.
                                                                                 Refer to the specification chart (page
                                                                                 10-9).

                                                                                                                    8-41
Maintenance



                                                                                  t Tire inspection and maintenance
 NOTE                                                WARNING                      Inspect the tire treads, and remove stones,
 S Warm tires normally exceed rec-                                                nails, glass or other objects that may be
                                         Incorrect Tire Inflation:
   ommended pressures. Don’t                                                      wedged in the tread grooves. Check for
   release air from warm tires to        Overinflation or underinflation of
                                         tires is dangerous. Adverse handling     holes or cuts that may permit air to leak
   adjust the pressure.                                                           from the tire, and make the necessary
                                         or unexpected tire failure could
 S Underinflation can cause reduced                                               repairs.
                                         result in a serious accident. Always
   fuel economy and poor sealing of
                                         inflate the tires to the correct pres-   Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises
   the tire bead, which will deform
                                         sure (page 10-9)                         and other damage. If you suspect internal
   the wheel and cause separation of
   the tire from the rim.                                                         damage to the tire, have it demounted and
                                                                                  checked. You may need to repair or
 S Overinflation can produce a harsh                                              replace it.
   ride and a greater possibility of
   damage from road hazards.
 S So keep your tire pressure at the
   correct levels. If one frequently
   needs inflating, have it inspected.



8-42
                                                                                                                   Maintenance


                                            if irregular wear develops). During rota-
                                            tion, inspect them for correct balance and                CAUTION
                                            proper lug nut tightness.
                                                                                          S Rotate radial tires that have an
                                            Also, inspect them for uneven wear              asymmetrical tread pattern or
                                            and damage. Abnormal wear is usually            studs only from front to rear, not
                                            caused by one or a combination of the           from left to right.
                                            following:                                    S Rotate directional tires only from
                                            S Incorrect tire pressure                       front to rear, not from left to right.
                                                                                          S In situations where the tires differ
                                            S Improper wheel alignment                      from front to rear (snow traction),
                                            S Out-of-balance wheel                          simply rotate using a side to side
t Tire rotation                                                                             pattern.
                                            S Severe braking
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires
at 5,000 miles (8,000 km) and after that    After rotation, bring all tire pressures to
every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) (or sooner   specification (page 10-9).




                                                                                                                            8-43
Maintenance


                                                Replace the tire when this happens. You
                                                may need to replace it before the band is               WARNING
                                                across the entire tread.
                                                                                             Re-installing Wheels:
                                                For additional information on replacing      Whenever a wheel is removed and
                                                tires on 4x4 vehicles, refer to Section 5.   then re-installed, always remove any
                                                                                             corrosion that may be present on
                                                                                             the mounting surface of the wheel
                                                              WARNING                        and/or the surface of the hub, drum
                                                  Worn Tires:                                or rotor that contacts the wheel.
                                                                                             Installing wheels without good
                                                  Driving with worn-out tires danger-
                                                                                             metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
t Replacing a tire                                ous. Reduced braking, steering and
                                                                                             mounting surface can cause the
                                                  traction could result in an accident.
                                                                                             wheel lug nuts to loosen and could
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will     Always use tires that are in good
                                                                                             allow the wheel to come off while
appear as a solid band across the tread.          condition.
                                                                                             the vehicle is in motion, causing
When your tire shows a wear band, it has
                                                                                             loss of control.
only 1/16 inch (1.59 mm) of tread left.




8-44
                                                                                                         Maintenance



                                           Do not replace your Mazda 4x4 or
            WARNING                        Mazda 4x2 tires with ‘‘high perfor-                WARNING
Tire Specifications:                       mance’’ tires, or larger size tires    Replacement Tires and Snow Tires:
                                           than approved for your vehicle by
Never mix radial, bias-belted or           Mazda.                                 If you have questions concerning
bias-type tires. Never mix brands.                                                replacement tires, contact an Autho-
Use only the tire size that is listed on   Do not use P235/75R15 ‘‘All Season’’   rized Mazda Dealer. Failure to fol-
the Safety Compliance Certification        tires. For Mazda 4x4 Regular Cab       low these precautions may adversely
Label, located near the left front         vehicles, P235/75R15 ‘‘All Terrain’’   affect the handling of the vehicle
door latch.                                tires are acceptable only on 15x7      and make it easier to lose control
                                           inch wheels.                           and roll over, which could result in
Make sure that all replacement tires
are of the same size, type, load-carry-    Do not use P265/75R15SL tires on       serious or fatal injury.
ing capacity, and tread design (e.g.,      the Mazda 4x4 112 inch wheelbase.      If you use snow tires, make sure that
‘‘All Terrain,’’ etc.), as originally      The P265/75R15SL ‘‘All Terrain’’       they are the same size and grade as
specified by Mazda.                        tires are acceptable only on the 126   the tires you now have on your
                                           inch wheelbase Mazda 4x4 models,       vehicle. If they are not, your vehicle
                          (Continued)      and only with 15x7 inch wheels.        may not handle safely.




                                                                                                                   8-45
Maintenance


t Tire identification                                                                t Temporary spare tire
                                               Tire size
Note that the size in the following chart is   Designation                           Inspect the temporary spare tire at least
typical. To determine what specific size                                             monthly to make sure it’s properly
tire and rim is recommended by Mazda                         Identifies Passenger    inflated and stored. Refer to the Federal
for use on your vehicle, refer to the Safety                 Car Tire                Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label for
Compliance Certification Label on your                       Nominal Section         appropriate cold pressure. This label is
vehicle.                                                     Width in Millimeters    located on the driver’s door pillar.

                                                             Height-to-Width Ratio
                                                                                     The temporary spare tire is easier to han-
                                                             of Tire
                                                                                     dle because of its construction. It is lighter
                                                                                     and smaller than a conventional tire and
                                                             Identifies Tire         should be used only for an emergency
                                                             Construction:           and only for a short distance.
                                                             R–Radial, B–Bias        Use the temporary only until the conven-
                                                             belted, D–Diagonal      tional tire is repaired, which should be as
                                                             Rim Diameter in         soon as possible.
                                                             Inches                  Don’t use a temporary tire in your tire
                                               P215/75 R15                           rotation pattern.



8-46
                                                                                                             Maintenance



                                        t Replacing a wheel
           CAUTION                      When replacing a wheel, make sure the
                                                                                                 WARNING
S Don’t use your temporary spare        new one is the same as the original factory   Using a Wrong-Sized Wheel:
  tire rim with a snow tire or a con-   wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset.     Using a wrong-sized wheel is dan-
  ventional tire. Neither will prop-    Proper tire balancing provides the best       gerous. Braking and handling
  erly fit and could damage both tire   riding comfort and helps reduce tread         could be affected, leading to loss of
  and rim.                              wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause          control and an accident. Always use
S The temporary spare tire has a        vibration and uneven wear, such as cup-       wheels of the correct size on your
  tread life of up to 3,000 miles       ping and flat spots.                          Mazda.
  (4,800 km), depending on road
  conditions and driving habits.
S When the tread wear solid-band
  indicator appears, replace the tire
  with the same type of temporary
  spare.




                                                                                                                      8-47
Maintenance




             WARNING                                  CAUTION
 Aftermarket Wheel Assemblies:              A wrong-sized wheel may adversely
 Use of aftermarket wheel assemblies        affect:
 that are different in size or offset may   S Tire fit
 damage your vehicle or cause acci-         S Wheel and bearing life
 dents resulting in serious injury.         S Ground clearance
                                            S Snow-chain clearance
                                            S Speedometer calibration
                                            S Headlight aim
                                            S Bumper height                     J Headlight Replacement
                                                                                The headlamps on your vehicle are prop-
                                                                                erly aimed at the assembly plant.
                                                                                If your vehicle has been in an accident, a
                                                                                qualified service technician should check
                                                                                the alignment of your headlamps.


8-48
                                                                                                         Maintenance


t To remove a bulb:
The headlights on your vehicle use
                                                       WARNING                                 WARNING
replaceable bulbs. When the light burns     Handling Halogen Bulbs:                 Children and Halogen Bulbs:
out, simply replace the bulb, rather than   When a halogen bulb breaks, it is       Playing with a halogen bulb is dan-
the whole light.                            dangerous. These bulbs contain          gerous. Serious injuries could be
                                            pressurized gas. If one is broken, it   caused by dropping a halogen bulb
                                            will explode and serious injuries       or breaking it some other way.
                                            could be caused by the flying glass.    Always keep halogen bulbs out of
                                            If the glass portion is touched with    the reach of children.
                                            bare hands, body oil could cause the
                                            bulb to overheat and explode when
                                            lit. Never touch the glass portion of
                                            the bulb with your bare hands and
                                            always wear eye protection when
                                            handling or working around halo-
                                            gen bulbs.




                                                                                                                  8-49
Maintenance



                                           1. Make sure the headlight control           5. Remove the bulb retaining ring by
 NOTE                                         switch is in the OFF position.               rotating it counterclockwise (when
 If the bulb is accidentally touched, it                                                   viewed from the rear) to free it from
                                           2. Open the hood. If you are replacing          the bulb socket, and slide the ring off
 should be cleaned with rubbing alco-         the driver side headlight, unclip the
 hol before being used.                                                                    the plastic base. Keep the ring in the
                                              electronic module on the right side of       rearward position. You must use it
 Do not remove the burned-out bulb            the battery and move it out of the way.      again to hold the new bulb in place.
 unless you can immediately replace it
 with a new one. If a bulb is removed      3. Locate the headlight bulb through the     6. Carefully remove the bulb assembly
 for an extended period of time, con-         hole in the upper radiator support           from its connector by gently pulling it
 taminants may enter the headlight            assembly.                                    rearward without turning.
 housing and affect its performance.       4. Disconnect the electrical connector
                                              from the bulb by pulling rearward.




8-50
                                                                                                                        Maintenance


t To install a bulb:                           2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the
                                                  plastic base until it contacts the rear of
1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic       the socket. Lock the ring into the
   base facing upward, insert the glass           socket by rotating it clockwise until
   end of the bulb into the light assembly.       you feel a ‘‘stop.’’
   You may need to turn the bulb left or
   right to line up the grooves in the plas-   3. Install the electrical connector into the
   tic base with the tabs in the light            rear of the plastic base until it snaps,
   assembly. When the grooves are                 locking it into position.
   aligned, push the bulb into the socket
   until the plastic base contacts the rear    4. Turn the headlights on and make sure
   of the light assembly.                         that they work properly. If the head-
                                                  light was correctly aligned before you       J Foglight Bulb Replacement
                                                  changed the bulb, you should not             1. Remove the bulb socket from the
                                                  need to align it again.                         foglight by turning counterclockwise.
                                                                                               2. Disconnect the electrical connector
                                                                                                  from the foglamp bulb.
                                                                                               3. Connect the electrical connector to the
                                                                                                  new foglamp bulb.
                                                                                               4. Install the bulb socket in the foglamp
                                                                                                  turning clockwise.

                                                                                                                                  8-51
Maintenance

Bulb Replacement (Front)




8-52
Maintenance




      8-53
Maintenance

Bulb Replacement (Rear)




8-54
Maintenance




      8-55
Memo




8-56
    Customer Information
9   Who to consult about a problem; what to do if your vehicle has a safety defect; what warranties protect
    your vehicle; driving outside the United States and Canada; adding equipment; tire quality grades:
    This is the kind of consumer information you’ll find in Section 9.




                                                                        Customer Assistance          9- 2
                                                                 Mazda Importer/Distributors         9- 5
                                                                  Warranties for Your Mazda          9- 6
                                                       Outside the United States and Canada          9- 6
                                                                            Slide-In Camper          9- 7
                                                 Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories            9- 7
                                              Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)            9- 8
                                                                    Reporting Safety Defects         9-11
                                                                         Service Publications        9-12

                                                                                                              9-1
Customer Information

Customer Assistance
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We’re here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in
top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of your
Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the
following steps:

   STEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer
   Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best
   way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER
   RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the
   GENERAL MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.




9-2
                                                                                               Customer Information



STEP 2: Call the Mazda National Customer Assistance Center
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership
management, call Mazda North American Operations’ Customer Assistance Center toll-
free at:
                                      1-800-222-5500
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located
    on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer’s name and location
6. Your question(s)




                                                                                                               9-3
Customer Information



If you would like to write a letter, please address it to the following. Attn: Customer Assistance, which corresponds with your state:

                     COVERING STATES                                                        OFFICE
 All states excluding Illinois, Indiana, Michigan, Ohio,             Mazda North American Operations
 Wisconsin                                                           7755 Irvine Center Drive
                                                                     Irvine, CA 92618-2922
                                                                     P.O. Box 19734
                                                                     Irvine, CA 9623-9734


 Illinois                                                            Mazda Distributors Great Lakes
 Indiana                                                             618 Kenmoor Avenue, SE
 Michigan                                                            Grand Rapids, MI 49546
 Ohio                                                                P.O. Box 2008
 Wisconsin                                                           Grand Rapids, MI 49501-2008


This way, we can be sure to respond to you as efficiently as possible. That is our goal.
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor. (Please see page 9-5.)

9-4
                                                                                      Customer Information

Mazda Importer/Distributors
 U.S.A. (Importer/Distributor)           PUERTO RICO                        SAIPAN
 Mazda North American                    Plaza Motors Corp.                 Pacific International
 Operations                              (Mazda de Puerto Rico)             Marianas, Inc.
 7755 Irvine Center Drive                P.O. Box 362722                    (d.b.a. Midway Motors)
 Irvine, CA 92618-2922                   San Juan, Puerto Rico 00936-2722   P.O. Box 887
 P.O. Box 19734                          TEL: (787) 788-9300                Saipan, MP 96950
 Irvine, CA 92623-9734                                                      TEL: (670) 234-7524
 TEL: 1-800-222-5500 (in the U.S.A.)     GUAM
       (949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)                                      AMERICAN SAMOA
                                         Keico Motors Ltd.
 (Distributor in each area)              P.O. Box CP, Agana, Guam 96910     Polynesia Motors, Inc.
 CANADA                                  TEL: (671) 477-7807                P.O. Box 1120
                                                                            Pago Pago, American Samoa 96799
 Mazda Canada, Inc.                                                         TEL: (684) 699-9347
 305 Milner Avenue, Suite 400
 Scarborough, Ontario M1B 3V4
 Canada
 TEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (In Canada)
 TEL: (416) 609-9909
      (Outside Canada)

                                                                                                         9-5
Customer Information

Warranties for Your Mazda             Outside the United States
S New Vehicle Limited Warranty        and Canada                                   You may have these problems if you do:
S Safety Restraint System Limited     Government regulations in the United         S Recommended fuel may be unavail-
  Warranty                            States require that automobiles meet           able. Any kind of leaded fuel or
S Anti-Perforation Limited Warranty   specific emission regulations and safety       low-octane fuel will affect vehicle
                                      standards. Therefore, vehicles built for       performance and damage the emis-
S Federal Emission Control Warranty                                                  sion controls and engine.
                                      use in the United States, its territories,
  — Emission Defect Warranty          and Canada may differ from those sold
  — Emission Performance Warranty                                                  S Proper repair facilities, tools, testing
                                      in other countries.                            equipment, and replacement parts may
S California Emission Control         The differences may make it difficult          not be available.
  Warranty (if applicable)            or even impossible for your vehicle to       The manufacturer’s warranty applies
S Replacement Parts and Accessories   receive satisfactory servicing in other      only to Mazda vehicles registered and
  Limited Warranty                    countries. We strongly recommend that        normally operated in the United States,
S Tire Warranty                       you NOT take your Mazda outside these        its territories, and Canada.
                                      areas.
 NOTE
 Detailed warranty information is
 provided with your Mazda.


9-6
                                                                                                  Customer Information

Slide-In Camper                            Add-On Non-Genuine Parts
Your Mazda vehicle is not designed to be   and Accessories
used with a slide-in camper.               Non-genuine parts and accessories for
                                                                                                  WARNING
                                           Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.      Installation of Non-Genuine Parts
                                           These may fit your vehicle, but they        or Accessories:
             WARNING                       are not approved by the manufacturer        Installation of non-genuine parts
 Riding in the Truck Bed:                  for use with Mazda vehicles. When you       or accessories could be dangerous.
                                           install non-genuine parts or accessories,   Improperly designed parts or acces-
 Riding in the truck bed, on the
                                           they could affect your vehicle’s perfor-    sories could seriously affect your
 bumper, or on the tailgate, whether
                                           mance or safety system; the manufac-        vehicle’s performance or safety sys-
 it’s open or closed, is dangerous.
                                           turer’s warranty doesn’t cover this.        tem. This could cause you to have
 Someone doing this could be in-
                                           Before you install any non-genuine parts    an accident or increase your chances
 jured or killed during a sudden stop
                                           or accessories, consult an Authorized       of injuries in an accident. Always
 or accident. Camper type covers of
                                           Mazda Dealer.                               consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer
 any kind offer no real protection
 from these dangers and may trap                                                       before you install non-genuine parts
 poisonous exhaust fumes. They                                                         or accessories.
 should only be occupied when the
 vehicle is parked without the engine
 running. Never allow anyone to ride
 outside the passenger compartment.


                                                                                                                        9-7
Customer Information

                                                                                    Uniform Tire Quality
                                           Mazda assumes no responsibility for      Grading System (UTQGS)
             WARNING                       death, injury, or expenses that may
                                                                                    This information relates to the tire
                                           result from the installation of add-on
 Add-On Electrical and Electronic          non-genuine parts or accessories.        grading system developed by the U.S.
 Equipment:                                                                         National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
 Incorrectly choosing or installing                                                 istration for grading tires by tread wear,
 improper add-on equipment or                                                       traction, and temperature performance.
 choosing an improper installer
                                                                                    J Tread Wear
 could be dangerous. Essential sys-
 tems could be damaged, causing                                                     The tread wear grade is a comparative
 engine stalling, air bag (SRS)                                                     rating based on the wear rate of the tire
 activation, ABS inactivation, or a                                                 when tested under controlled conditions
 fire in the vehicle. Be very careful in                                            on a specified government test course.
 choosing and installing add-on elec-                                               For example, a tire graded 150 would
 trical equipments, such as mobile                                                  wear one-and-a-half times as well on the
 telephones, two-way radios, stereo                                                 government course as a tire graded 100.
 systems, and car alarm systems.




9-8
                                                                                                        Customer Information


The relative performance of tires depends                                                  Sustained high temperatures can cause
upon the actual conditions of their use,                    WARNING                        the material of the tire to degenerate
however, and may depart significantly                                                      and reduce tire life, and excessive tem-
from the norm because of variations in          Tire Traction Grade:                       peratures can lead to sudden tire failure.
driving habits, service practices and           The traction grade assigned to this
differences in road characteristics and         tire is based on braking (straight         Grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
climate.                                        ahead) traction tests and does not         mance which all passenger vehicle tires
                                                include acceleration, cornering            must meet under the Federal Motor
J Traction—AA, A, B, C                          (turning), hydroplaning or peak            Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
                                                traction characteristics.                  B and A represent higher levels of perfor-
The traction grades from highest to lowest,                                                mance on the laboratory test wheel than
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades repre-                                                    the minimum required by law.
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-   J Temperature—A, B, C
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test        The temperature grades, A (the highest),
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire       B, and C, represent the tire’s resistance
marked C may have poor traction perfor-        to the generation of heat and its ability
mances.                                        to dissipate heat when tested under con-
                                               trolled conditions on a specified indoor
                                               laboratory test wheel.


                                                                                                                               9-9
Customer Information


                                           These grades will be added to the side-
             WARNING                       walls of passenger vehicle tires over the
                                           next several years according to a schedule
 Tire Temperature Grade:                   established by the NHTSA and the tire
 The temperature grade for this tire       manufacturers.
 is established for a tire that is prop-
 erly inflated and not overloaded.         The grade of tires available as standard or
 Excessive speed, underinflation, or       optional equipment on Mazda vehicles
 excessive loading, either separately      may vary with respect to grade.
 or in combination, can cause heat         ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES
 buildup and possible tire failure.        MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES
                                           AND TO ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE
                                                                                         Refer to the tire sidewall for the specific
                                           SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
                                                                                         tire grades of tires which are equipped on
                                                                                         the vehicle.




9-10
                                                                                                  Customer Information

Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has          between you, your dealer, or Mazda
                                                                                       NOTE
a defect which could cause a crash            Motor Corporation (Your Mazda
or could cause injury or death, you           Importer/Distributor).                   If you live in the U.S.A., all corre-
should immediately inform the                 To contact NHTSA, you may either         spondence to Mazda Motor Cor-
National Highway Traffic Safety               call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free   poration should be forwarded to:
Administration (NHTSA) in addition            at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in           Mazda North American
to    notifying     Mazda     Motor           Washington, D.C. area) or write to:         Operations
Corporation (Your Mazda Importer/             NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-            Attn: Customer Assistance
Distributor).                                 portation, Washington, D.C. 20590.          7755 Irvine Center Drive
If NHTSA receives similar com-                You can also obtain other information       Irvine, California 92618-2922
plaints, it may open an investigation,        about motor vehicle safety from the         P.O. Box 19734
and if it finds that a safety defect exists   Hotline.                                    Irvine, CA 92623-9734
in a group of vehicles, it may order a                                                    or call toll-free at
recall and remedy campaign. How-                                                          1-800-222-5500.
ever, NHTSA cannot become                                                              If you live outside of the U.S.A.,
involved in individual problems                                                        please contact the nearest Mazda
                                                                                       Distributor shown on page 9-5 in
                                                                                       this booklet.

                                                                                                                       9-11
Customer Information

Service Publications
Factory-authorized Mazda service publi-      WORKSHOP MANUAL:                            OWNER’S MANUAL:
cations are available for owners who wish    Covers recommended maintenance and          Contains information regarding the proper
to do some of their own maintenance and      repair procedures of the powertrain, body   care and operation of your vehicle. This is
repair.                                      and chassis.                                not a technician’s manual.
When requesting any of our publications
through an Authorized Mazda Dealer,          WIRING DIAGRAM:
refer to the chart.                          Provides electrical schematics as well as
                                             component location for the entire elec-
If they don’t have what you need in stock,   trical system.
they can order it for you.

                                                PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER                            PUBLICATION
                                                          9999 95 022B 00                     2000 WORKSHOP MANUAL
                                                          9999 95 020G 00                      2000 WIRING DIAGRAM
                                                          9999 95 23CS 00                      2000 OWNER’S MANUAL




9-12
     Specifications
10


                                  Lubricant Quality    10-2
                                        Dimensions     10-3
                      Payload Capacity and Standard
                           Equipment Specifications    10-4
                                             Engine    10-6
                                  Electrical System    10-6
                                         Capacities    10-7
                                    Air Conditioner    10-8
                                               Tires   10-9
                                        Light Bulbs    10-9


                                                              10-1
Specifications

Lubricant Quality
                        Item                             Classification or Equivalent   NOTE
 Engine oil                                       API Certified SAE 5W-30
                                                                                        Use molybdenum disulphide grease
 Automatic transmission fluid                     Mazda ATF Type 5                      for suspension upper arm shafts.
 Manual transmission oil                          MerconR ATF or M-III
 Transfer case oil*1                              MerconR ATF or M-III
 Front*1 and Rear differential oil                API GI-5 SAE 80W90
 Propeller shaft   grease*1     Sliding Joint     Molybdenum disulphide grease
                                Universal Joint   NLGI No. 2 (Lithium base)
 Manual steering gear grease                      C3AZ19578A or equivalent ESWMIC87-A
 Power steering fluid                             MerconR ATF or M-III
 Wheel bearing grease                             NLGI No. 2 (Lithium base)
 Multi-purpose grease                             NLGI No. 2 (Lithium base)
 Molybdenum disulphide grease                     NLGI No. 2
 Brake and clutch fluid                           FMVSS116 DOT-3
*1 4x4 models



10-2
                                                         Specifications

Dimensions
                                   Regular Cab        Cab Plus
  Overall length         in (mm)   187.5* (4,763)   202.9* (5,153)
  Overall width          in (mm)   70.3 (1,785)      70.3 (1,785)
  Overall height
     4x2                 in (mm)    62 (1,575)       62.4 (1,585)
     4x4                 in (mm)   65.2 (1,655)      66.3 (1,684)
     Wheelbase           in (mm)   111.4 (2,831)    125.7 (3,192)
  Cargo bed
     Inside length       in (mm)   72.2 (1,834)      72.3 (1,836)
     Inside length       in (mm)   51.2 (1,301)      51.2 (1,301)
     Inside height       in (mm)    16.5 (419)        16.5 (419)
*With rear step-bumper




                                                                     10-3
Specifications

Payload Capacity and Standard Equipment Specifications
                                              4x2 Payload Package          4x4 Payload Package
                                          #1-Std              #2-Opt   #1-Std              #2-Opt
 Maximum Payload Rating: (1) (2) (lbs.)
 — 112I Wheelbase                         1260                  1660   1260                  1500
 — 126I Wheelbase                         1260                  1620   1260                  1500
 GVWR: (lbs.)
 — 112I Wheelbase                         4320                  4740   4760                  4980
 — 126I Wheelbase                         4540                  4900   4940                  5120
 GAWR: (3) (lbs.) — w/112I Wheelbase
 — Front Min.                             2288                  2288   2490                  2490
 — Front Max.                             2400                  2400   2710                  2710
 — Rear Min.                              2317                  2735   2511                  2731
 — Rear Max.                              2600                  2750   2600                  2750
See footnotes on page 10-5.


10-4
                                                                                                                                              Specifications



                                                                 4x2 Payload Package                                      4x4 Payload Package
                                                            #1-Std                      #2-Opt                       #1-Std                     #2-Opt
 GAWR: (3) (lbs.) — w/126I Wheelbase
 — Front Min.                                                2558                        2558                         2773                        2773
 — Front Max.                                                2600                        2600                         2850                        2850
 — Rear Min.                                                 2421                        2747                         2569                        2749
 — Rear Max.                                                 2600                        2750                         2600                        2750

(1) Load rating represents maximum allowable weight of people, cargo and body equipment and is reduced by optional equipment weight.
(2) PICKUP BOX REMOVAL PROGRAM — Allows aftermarket alteration of models by pickup box removal and installation of a second unit body.
    Contact the Body Builders Advisory Service for information.
(3) Gross Axle Weight Rating is determined by the rated capacity of the minimum component of the Axle System (Axle, computer-selected springs, wheels, tires)
    of a specific vehicle. Front and rear GAWR’s will, in all cases, sum to a number equal to or greater than the GVWR for the particular vehicle. Maximum loaded
    vehicle (including passengers, equipment and payload) cannot exceed the GVW rating or GAWR (front or rear).




                                                                                                                                                           10-5
Specifications

Engine                                                                    Electrical System
 Item                      2.5L        3.0L FFV*            4.0L          Item           Model     2.5L       3.0L       4.0L
 Type                    4 cylinder     6 cylinder        6 cylinder      Battery
                           in line,        V-6,              V-6,         Maintenance-    All    58AH-12V   58AH-12V   58AH-12V
                          4 cycle        4 cycle           4 cycle        free
                          gasoline       gasoline          gasoline
 Bore and            3.78 x 3.402 in    3.5 x 3.14 in    3.94 x 3.31 in
 stroke                  (96.0 x       (89 x 80 mm)     (100 x 84 mm)
                        86.4 mm)
 Displacement             153 cu in      182 cu in         245 cu in
                         (2,298 cc)     (2,968 cc)        (3,965 cc)
 Compression
                           9.4:1          9.14:1            9.0:1
 ratio
 Spark plug                1.07 –          1.07 –            1.3 –
 gap                     1.17 mm         1.17 mm           1.4 mm
                         (0.042 –        (0.042 –          (0.052 –
                         0.046 in.)      0.046 in.)       0.056 in.)
*Flexible Fuel Vehicle




10-6
                                                                                                                         Specifications

Capacities
Item                        2.5L        3.0L FFV*           4.0L       Item                      2.5L        3.0L FFV*            4.0L
Engine oil with filter    4.5 US qt      4.5 US qt       5.0 US qt     Automatic               9.8 US qt      10.0 US qt       10.0 US qt
                         (3.8 Imp qt,   (3.8 Imp qt,    (4.2 Imp qt,   transmission           (7.9 Imp qt,   (8.5 Imp qt,     (8.5 Imp qt,
                          4.3 liters)    4.3 liters)     4.7 liters)     4x2                   9.0 liters)    9.5 liters)      9.5 liters)
Engine oil without        4.0 US qt      4.0 US qt       4.0 US qt     Automatic                              10.3 US qt       10.3 US qt
filter                   (3.4 Imp qt,   (3.4 Imp qt,    (3.4 Imp qt,   transmission                –         (8.8 Imp qt,     (8.8 Imp qt,
                          3.8 liters)    3.8 liters)     3.8 liters)     4x4                                  9.8 liters)      9.8 liters)
             without      6.5 US qt      9.5 US qt       7.8 US qt     Transfer case            2.5 US pints (2.1 Imp pints, 1.2 liters)
             A/C         (5.4 Imp qt,   (7.9 Imp qt,    (6.5 Imp qt,   Front axle
                          6.2 liters)    9.0 liters)     7.4 liters)
C l t
Coolant                                                                  Dana 35 front axle     3.6 US pints (3.0 Imp pints, 1.7 liters)
             with A/C     7.2 US qt      10.2 US qt      8.6 US qt       (4x4 only)
                         (6.0 Imp qt,   (8.5 Imp qt,    (7.2 Imp qt,     Dana 28 front axle     3.0 US pints (2.5 Imp pints, 1.4 liters)
                          6.8 liters)    9.6 liters)     8.1 liters)     (2.5L and 3.0L
Windshield washer                                                        automatic
reservoir                     2.8 US qt (2.4 Imp qt, 6.8 liters)         transmission only)

Manual transmission       5.6 US pints (4.7 Imp pints, 2.65 liters)


                                                                                                                       *Flexible Fuel Vehicle


                                                                                                                                     10-7
Specifications

                                                                  Air Conditoner*
 Item                   2.5L            3.0L           4.0L       Gas complies with SAE J639:         R-134a
 Rear axle            5.0 – 5.3 US pints (4.2 – 4.6 Imp pints,    Maximum operating charge:       Refer to label in
  Conventional 7.5”               2.4 – 2.5 liters)                                             engine compartment
 Limited Slip         4.75 – 5.0 US pints (4.0 – 4.2 Imp pints,
  Differential 8.8I               2.2 – 2.4 liters)
 Fuel tank
                       16.5 US gal (13.7 Imp gal, 62.4 liters)
   Regular Cab
                       19.5 US gal (16.2 Imp gal, 73.8 liters)
   Cab Plus




*Some models.

10-8
                                                                                                                                      Specifications

Tires                                                                     Light Bulbs
                                                          Temporary                                                       Number
 Item            Tire         Front          Rear           Spare                                                                          Bulb
                                                                                            Light Bulb                    of Bulbs
                                                                                                                                          Number
 Size            4x2             P225/70R 15              P225/70R 15
                                                                                                                          Required
                                 P245/75R 16              P235/75R 15      Headlilghts                                        2             9007
                 4x4             P215/75R 15              P225/70R 15      Foglights                                          2           9006 HB4
                                 P235/75R 15              P235/75R 15
                                 P265/75R 15              P235/75R 15                                                         4             3157
                                                                           Front parking/turn signal lights
                                 P245/75R 16              P235/75R 15                                                         2             194
 Inflation       4x2      P225/70R 15     35 (2.4, 241)   35 (2.4, 241)    Rear turn signal lights                            2             3156
 pressure psi             35 (2.4, 241)
 (kg/cm2,                 P245/75R 16                                      Rear brake/Tailights                               2             3157
 kPa)                     26 (1.8, 179)                                    Back-up lights                                     2             3156
                 4x4      P215/75R 15     35 (2.4, 241)   35 (2.4, 241)    License plate light (with bumper)                  2             194
                          35 (2.4, 241)
                          P235/75R 15                                      License plate light (without bumper)               1             194
                          30 (2.1, 207)
                                                                           Interior light                                     1             912
                          P265/75R 15
                          30 (2.1, 207)                                   *1 Replaceable at authorized Mazda radio service centers.
                          P245/75R 16                                     *2 Refer to your Mazda Dealer for bulb replacement.
                          30 (2.1, 207)                                   *3 Replace cruise control switch.
psi: pounds per square inch

                                                                                                                                              10-9
Specifications



                                        Number                                                              Number
                                                    Bulb                                                                      Bulb
               Light Bulb               of Bulbs                            Light Bulb                      of Bulbs
                                                   Number                                                                    Number
                                        Required                                                            Required
 High-mount brake light                    2        906      Malfunction indicator light                         1              194
 Cargo light                               1        922      4x4 indicator lights – I/P                          2              194
 Map/Interior light (Cab Plus)             2        904      A/C control illumination                            1              161
 Map/Interior light (Regular Cab)          1        904      Headlight switch illumination                       1             1815
 Instrument panel gauge illumination       5        194      Heater control illumination                         1              161
 Radio illumination                        –         *1      Cruise control switch illumination                  2               *3
 Brake warning light/ABS                   1        194     *1 Replaceable at authorized Mazda radio service centers.
 Charging system light                     1        194     *2 Refer to your Mazda Dealer for bulb replacement.
                                                            *3 Replace cruise control switch.
 Seat belt warning light                   1        194
 High beam indicator                       1        194
 Transfer case switch indicator light      1         *2
                                                            Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refer to page 6-8
 Turn signal indicator light               2        194



10-10
     Index
11




             11-1
Index

                                                       Page                                                             Page                                                         Page

A                                                                Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18                Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
                                                                   Putting your vehicle in gear . . . . . . . 5-19                Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Acid Rain or Industrial Fallout,                                   Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23          Applying brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
  Etching Caused by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2              Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24         Brake lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts                                           Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19        Brakes pull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
  and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7          Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . 8-33                    Fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Air-Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77                                                                            Foot brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Aluminum Wheel Maintenance . . . . . . 7-10                                                                                         Four-wheel antilock brake
AM/FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90           B                                                                    system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
AM/FM Radio with Cassette and                                                                                                       Front disc brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
  Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93               Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39     Hydraulic power brakes . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
AM/FM Radio with Cassette                                        Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11         Low grip or low pedal . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
  Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91    Battery Voltage Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56               Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
AM/FM Radio with Compact                                         Before Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9         Rear drum brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
  Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92         After getting in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10          Stopping distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41, 5-44               Before getting in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9          Rear-wheel antilock brake
Anti-Theft System, SecuriLockt                                   Belts, Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10           system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
  Passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12     Belt, Front Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14             Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
  Procedure to program spare keys . . . 3-14                     Belts, Rear Lap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14       Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
  Programming spare keys . . . . . . . . . 3-13                  Bird Droppings, Insects or Tree                                  Bulb Replacement, Front . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
  THEFT indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13               Sap, Damage Caused by . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2                Bulb Replacement, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

11-2
                                                                                                                                                                                 Index

                                                      Page                                                           Page                                                            Page

C                                                               Cleaning the Window Interiors . . . . . . 7-13                Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
                                                                Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75              Accelerating with cruise
Camper, Slide-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7          Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77            control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Carbon Monoxide (Engine                                           Dehumidifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82          Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
  Exhaust Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8          Fan blower control knob . . . . . . . . . 5-76                To cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6      Function selector control knob . . . . . 5-76                 To decrease cruising speed . . . . . . . . 5-51
Cargo Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34        Heater controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83        To increase cruising speed . . . . . . . . 5-50
Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . 5-109                 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83       To resume cruising speed . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72         Temperature control knob . . . . . . . . 5-76                 To set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Center Seat Belt, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14            Windshield defrosting                                       Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29              and defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81       Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Changing the Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19         Clock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99      Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Charging System Warning Light . . . . . 5-61                    Clutch Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Checking Power Steering                                         Coolant, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
  Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31        Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26     D
Child-Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21               Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
  Attaching seats with tether straps . . . 2-26                                                                               Dashboard Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
                                                                  Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
  Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23     Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54          Dashboard Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
  Older children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28         Cooling (Air-Conditioning) . . . . . . . . . 5-77             Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11                                                                     Dehumidifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Cleaning the Seat Belt Webbing . . . . . . 7-13                                                                               Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Cleaning the Upholstery and                                                                                                     Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
  Interior Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

                                                                                                                                                                                  11-3
Index

                                                        Page                                                            Page                                                         Page
  Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3       Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4      Environmental Paint Damage,
  Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6       Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7      How to Minimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4   Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12           Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Driving                                                           Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7              Cleaning the wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
  After getting in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10         Engine Compartment Overviews . . . . . 8-13                      Bright-metal maintenance . . . . . . . . . 7-7
  Before getting in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9         Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22        Cleaning headlights
  Hazardous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12            Changing coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26              and taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
  High speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15           Inspecting coolant level . . . . . . . . . . 8-23              Cleaning mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
  On hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18       Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3        Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
  On sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17        Engine Exhaust Gas                                               Cleaning rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
  Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14                (Carbon Monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8              Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
  Through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17            Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16      Maintaining the finish . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
  Wheel spin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14           Adding engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19           Repairing finish damage . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
  Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15       Changing engine oil and filter . . . . . 8-19                  Underbody maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
  With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33         Inspecting engine oil level . . . . . . . . 8-18
Driving Your Mazda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1                Pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55, 8-17
                                                                    Recommended oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16             F
                                                                  Engine Coolant Temperature
E                                                                   Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54   Fan Blower Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
                                                                  Engine, FFV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4    Flasher, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
                                                                                                                                 Flashing the Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4



11-4
                                                                                                                                                                                 Index

                                                       Page                                                           Page                                                           Page
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26     Emergency maneuvers . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36                FFV engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
  Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29            Off pavement edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34          Fuel, Running Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
  Temporary spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36                Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27       Function Selector Control Knob . . . . . 5-76
  Tire, jack and tool storage . . . . . . . . 6-26                 Shifting between 4x4 HIGH                                     Defrosting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Fluids                                                                and 4x4 LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27           Floor-defrosting position . . . . . . . . . 5-79
  Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 8-33                  Shifting from 2-wheel drive                                   Floor position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
  Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28          to 4x4 HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25         Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
  Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7        Shifting from 4x4 LOW to                                      Panel-floor position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
  Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30         2-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26         Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
  Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31            Shifting from 4x4 HIGH to                                     Vent position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
  Windshield washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36                  2-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26       Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
FM Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86            Tire replacement requirements . . . . . 5-32                  Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Foglight Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . 8-51                 Front Seat Passenger Position                                   Fuse panel description . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Foot Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36        (Child Restraints) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25       Fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
4x4 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63         Front Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
4x4 LOW Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-63                 Front Center Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
4-Wheel Antilock Brake System                                    Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55   G
  (4-Wheel ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41             Fuel Reset Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
  Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60           Fuel-Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24    GAWR and GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-Wheel Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24              Fuel-Filler Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23    Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
  Electronic shift control . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24            Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . 5-13                Battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
  Electronic shift control system                                Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2         Engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
     indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25           Cleaner air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4     Engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . 5-54

                                                                                                                                                                                  11-5
Index

                                                        Page                                                              Page                                                           Page
  Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55     I                                                                 Inspecting Power Steering
  Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54                                                                              Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
  Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54          Ignition Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2             Inspecting Washer Fluid Level . . . . . . . 8-36
  Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57            ACC (Accessory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2            Installing a Child-Restraint System . . . . 2-23
  Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54             Key removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4        Instrument Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71           LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2     Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
                                                                     OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2       Cleaning instrument panel . . . . . . . . 7-13
                                                                     ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2      Cleaning instrument panel lens . . . . 7-14
H                                                                    START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2         Cleaning interior plastic lights . . . . . 7-14
                                                                     Testing the warning lights . . . . . . . . . 5-5                  Cleaning seat belt webbing . . . . . . . 7-13
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2              Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11                  Cleaning upholstery and
Hazardous Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12            Importer/Distributors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5                interior trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Headlight High-Beam                                               In Case of Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1                 Cleaning window interiors . . . . . . . . 7-13
  Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66          Infant Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21         Dashboard precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Headlight Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48                Inside Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4          Interior Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65       Inspecting Automatic Transmission                                    With map light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Heater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83             Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33          Without map light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80    Inspecting Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . 8-28                 Interior Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
High Speed Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15             Inspecting Clutch Fluid Level . . . . . . . 8-30                  Introduction, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22         Inspecting Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30




11-6
                                                                                                                                                                                        Index

                                                          Page                                                             Page                                                             Page

J                                                                   L                                                                Lumbar Support Adjustment . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Jack Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35         Label Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37           M
  Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27          Labels, Service and Information . . . . . 3-26
Jump Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4        Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67             Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4         Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70   Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . 5-62
                                                                    Lighting Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65        Manual Transmission Operation . . . . . 5-14
                                                                      Combination cargo and                                           Recommendations for shifting . . . . . 5-16
K                                                                                                                                     Shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
                                                                         high-mount stoplight . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2     Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66         Map Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6                  Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65        Mazda Importer/Distributors . . . . . . . . . 9-5
  Arming and disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9                    Turn and lane change signal . . . . . . . 5-67                 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
  Keyless entry personal alarm . . . . . . . 3-8                    Lights                                                            Day/night mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
  Locking the doors                                                   Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65     Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
    (with keyless entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8                  Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33     Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
  Replacing lost transmitters . . . . . . . . 3-10                    Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34     Money-Saving Suggestions . . . . . . . . . 4-11
  Replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9                 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
  Unlocking the doors                                                 Side marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53         O
    (with keyless entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7                  Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
                                                                    Low Brake Fluid Level Warning . . . . . 5-59                     Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Knowing Your Mazda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
                                                                    Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37           Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27




                                                                                                                                                                                         11-7
Index

                                                      Page                                                          Page                                                          Page
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16   Power Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70      Clock operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Outside Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3        Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46       Common operating conditions . . . . 5-111
Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31       Power Steering Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . 8-31               Compression adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Outside the United States                                      Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16          Dolby noise reduction . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
  and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6     Protecting Your Mazda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1           Eject function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24   Push-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7     How to adjust the volume . . . . . . . . 5-94
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3                                                                    How to insert a compact disc
Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26     R                                                                 and begin playing . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
Owner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9                                                                          How to insert a tape . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Owner Maintenance Precautions . . . . . 8-11                   Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86        How to take care of and clean
Owner Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 8-9                   AM characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86             your system and discs . . . . . . . . 5-110
  At least monthly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10          FM characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86           How to turn the radio on and off . . . 5-94
  At least twice a year . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10         Radios                                                          Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
  While operating your vehicle . . . . . . . 8-9                 AM/FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90          SEEK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
                                                                 AM/FM radio with cassette and                                 Shuffle feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
P                                                                  compact disc player . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93              Tape/CD select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
                                                                 AM/FM radio with cassette                                     Tape direction select . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Paint Chipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4         player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91     Tips on caring for the cassette
Paint Damage, How to Minimize                                    AM/FM radio with compact                                        player and tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
  Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2            disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92        Tone balance and
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40       AM/FM select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94             speaker output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Parking Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-59                   Automatic Music Search . . . . . . . . 5-104                  TUNE adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6           Autoset memory preset . . . . . . . . . 5-103               Rear Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

11-8
                                                                                                                                                                                       Index

                                                      Page                                                                Page                                                             Page
Rear Quarter Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18                Emergency locking mode . . . . . . . . . . 2-6                   Snowplowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Rear Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14          Energy management feature . . . . . . . . 2-5                    Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Rear Storage Compartment                                           Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17        Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
  (with net) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36        Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10     Spare Tire, Temporary . . . . . . . . 6-36, 8-46
Recommendations for Shifting . . . . . . 5-16                      Front Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14          Special Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . 4-12
  Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17            Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19             Hazardous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
  Upshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16        Pregnant women, seat belt usage . . . 2-19                         High speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Repairing Damage to the Finish . . . . . . . 7-7                   Rear lap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14          Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Replacing Windshield Wiper                                         Rotated tongue, correction . . . . . . . . 2-16                    Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
  Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38      Shoulder belt adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12                Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11                Twisted D-ring, correction . . . . . . . . 2-15                    Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Rocking the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14             Untwist/unjam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15               Snowplowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Rope Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35        Warning light/chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10                 Through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
                                                                Seat Belt Warning                                                     Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
                                                                   Light/Chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 5-61                 Wheel spin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
S                                                               Seat Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2          Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
                                                                Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2   Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . 9-11                 Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4       Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Safety Seat Tether Straps . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26               Lumbar support adjustment . . . . . . . . 2-4                      Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3                Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2        Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2       Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12               Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5        Slide-In Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7             Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
  Automatic locking mode . . . . . . . . . . 2-7


                                                                                                                                                                                        11-9
Index

                                                       Page                                                               Page                                                             Page
  Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8        System description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31              Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
  Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9           Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45           Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
  Lubricant quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2                                                                                Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
  Payload capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4            T                                                                    2-wheel drive vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
  Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9                                                                      Trailer Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54       Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57        Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7        Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19    Trailer Towing Load Tables . . . . . . . . . 4-28
  Preparing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8                Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21       Trailer Towing Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
  Starting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9               Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21        Transmission, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74     Tape and Tape Player Care,                                         Transmission, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Supplemental Air Bag                                                Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109        Transmission Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
  Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29            Tape Care, Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109              Transmission Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
  Constant monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45             Temperature Control Knob . . . . . . . . . 5-76                    Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
  Front air bag activation . . . . . . . . . . 2-42              Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54               Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
  How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39          Temporary Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . 6-36, 8-46
  Importance of being seated . . . . . . . 2-39                  Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35              U
  Limitations to front air bag                                   Tilt Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
     activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43       Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40   Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
  Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47            Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16       Uniform Tire Quality
  Non-activation of front air bags . . . . 2-44                     Inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41             Grading System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
  Passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32              Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43         Temperature A,B,C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
  Passenger air bag deactivation                                 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18        Traction AA, A,B,C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
     switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33        4-wheel drive vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21                 Tread Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8


11-10
                                                                                                                                                                                Index

                                                     Page                                                            Page                                                          Page

V                                                              4x4 LOW indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63                 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
                                                               Fuel reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61        Rear quarter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74     Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62      Winshield Defrosting and
Vehicle Information Labels . . . . . . . . . 4-36              Headlight high-beam . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63                 Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
                                                               Malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62              Windshield Washer Fluid Level . . . . . . 8-36
W                                                              Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64        Windshield Wipers and Washer . . . . . . 5-68
                                                               Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61       Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Warning Lights Inspection . . . . . . . . . . 5-59             Warning beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65             Wiper blade replacement . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Warning Lights/Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59            Warning inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59              Wiper blades, maintaining . . . . . . . . 8-37
 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60   Warranties for Your Mazda . . . . . . . . . . 9-6                 Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64   Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5    Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
 Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64        Water Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59        Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
 Charging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61         Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47             Y
 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64      Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
 Door ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64      Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17              Your Vehicle at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
 4x4 indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63        One-touch power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17




                                                                                                                                                                              11-11
Part No.
9999-95-023C-01
 C Mazda North American Operations
Printed in U.S.A.

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Stats:
views:3
posted:6/10/2013
language:
pages:388
Description: 2001 Mazda B-Series Owner's Manual